Alvarion Technologies BMAX-BA23 Base station BreezeMAX 2300 User Manual BreezeMAX TDD BST System Manual

Alvarion Technologies Ltd. Base station BreezeMAX 2300 BreezeMAX TDD BST System Manual

Contents

User Manual

BreezeMAX™ TDD Modular Base Station System ManualSW Version 4.0October 2006P/N Rev.A
ii BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System ManualDocument HistoryDocument HistoryTopic Description Version/Date IssuedFirst Release New Product Manual SW Version 4.0, September 2006
BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual iiiDocument HistoryLegal Rights© Copyright 2006 Alvarion Ltd. All rights reserved.The material contained herein is proprietary, privileged, and confidential and owned by Alvarion or its third party licensors. No disclosure thereof shall be made to third parties without the express written permission of Alvarion Ltd.Alvarion Ltd. reserves the right to alter the equipment specifications and descriptions in this publication without prior notice. No part of this publication shall be deemed to be part of any contract or warranty unless specifically incorporated by reference into such contract or warranty.Trade NamesAlvarion®, BreezeCOM®, WALKair®, WALKnet®, BreezeNET®, BreezeACCESS®, BreezeMANAGE™, BreezeLINK®, BreezeCONFIG™, BreezeMAX™, AlvariSTAR™, BreezeLITE™, MGW™, eMGW™, WAVEXpress™, MicroXpress™, WAVEXchange™, WAVEView™, GSM Network in a Box and TurboWAVE™ and/or other products and/or services referenced here in are either registered trademarks, trademarks or service marks of Alvarion Ltd.All other names are or may be the trademarks of their respective owners.Statement of ConditionsThe information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice. Alvarion Ltd. shall not be liable for errors contained herein or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing, performance, or use of this manual or equipment supplied with it.Warranties and DisclaimersAll Alvarion Ltd. ("Alvarion") products purchased from Alvarion or through any of Alvarion's authorized resellers are subject to the following warranty and product liability terms and conditions.Exclusive Warranty(a) Alvarion warrants that the Product hardware it supplies and the tangible media on which any software is installed, under normal use and conditions, will be free from significant defects in materials and workmanship for a period of fourteen (14) months from the date of shipment of a given Product to Purchaser (the "Warranty Period"). Alvarion will, at its sole option and as Purchaser's sole remedy, repair or replace any defective Product in accordance with Alvarion' standard R&R procedure.
iv BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System ManualLegal Rights(b) With respect to the Firmware, Alvarion warrants the correct functionality according to the attached documentation, for a period of fourteen (14) month from invoice date (the "Warranty Period")". During the Warranty Period, Alvarion may release to its Customers firmware updates, which include additional performance improvements and/or bug fixes, upon availability (the "Warranty"). Bug fixes, temporary patches and/or workarounds may be supplied as Firmware updates. Additional hardware, if required, to install or use Firmware updates must be purchased by the Customer. Alvarion will be obligated to support solely the two (2) most recent Software major releases. ALVARION SHALL NOT BE LIABLE UNDER THIS WARRANTY IF ITS TESTING AND EXAMINATION DISCLOSE THAT THE ALLEGED DEFECT IN THE PRODUCT DOES NOT EXIST OR WAS CAUSED BY PURCHASER'S OR ANY THIRD PERSON'S MISUSE, NEGLIGENCE, IMPROPER INSTALLATION OR IMPROPER TESTING, UNAUTHORIZED ATTEMPTS TO REPAIR, OR ANY OTHER CAUSE BEYOND THE RANGE OF THE INTENDED USE, OR BY ACCIDENT, FIRE, LIGHTNING OR OTHER HAZARD.Disclaimer(a) The Software is sold on an "AS IS" basis. Alvarion, its affiliates or its licensors MAKE NO WARRANTIES, WHATSOEVER, WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WITH RESPECT TO THE SOFTWARE AND THE ACCOMPANYING DOCUMENTATION. ALVARION SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NON-INFRINGEMENT WITH RESPECT TO THE SOFTWARE. UNITS OF PRODUCT (INCLUDING ALL THE SOFTWARE) DELIVERED TO PURCHASER HEREUNDER ARE NOT FAULT-TOLERANT AND ARE NOT DESIGNED, MANUFACTURED OR INTENDED FOR USE OR RESALE IN APPLICATIONS WHERE THE FAILURE, MALFUNCTION OR INACCURACY OF PRODUCTS CARRIES A RISK OF DEATH OR BODILY INJURY OR SEVERE PHYSICAL OR ENVIRONMENTAL DAMAGE ("HIGH RISK ACTIVITIES"). HIGH RISK ACTIVITIES MAY INCLUDE, BUT ARE NOT LIMITED TO, USE AS PART OF ON-LINE CONTROL SYSTEMS IN HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTS REQUIRING FAIL-SAFE PERFORMANCE, SUCH AS IN THE OPERATION OF NUCLEAR FACILITIES, AIRCRAFT NAVIGATION OR COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS, AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL, LIFE SUPPORT MACHINES, WEAPONS SYSTEMS OR OTHER APPLICATIONS REPRESENTING A SIMILAR DEGREE OF POTENTIAL HAZARD. ALVARION SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY OF FITNESS FOR HIGH RISK ACTIVITIES.(b) PURCHASER'S SOLE REMEDY FOR BREACH OF THE EXPRESS WARRANTIES ABOVE SHALL BE REPLACEMENT OR REFUND OF THE PURCHASE PRICE AS SPECIFIED ABOVE, AT ALVARION'S OPTION. TO THE
BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual vLegal RightsFULLEST EXTENT ALLOWED BY LAW, THE WARRANTIES AND REMEDIES SET FORTH IN THIS AGREEMENT ARE EXCLUSIVE AND IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, EITHER IN FACT OR BY OPERATION OF LAW, STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO WARRANTIES, TERMS OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, SATISFACTORY QUALITY, CORRESPONDENCE WITH DESCRIPTION, NON-INFRINGEMENT, AND ACCURACY OF INFORMATION GENERATED. ALL OF WHICH ARE EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMED. ALVARION' WARRANTIES HEREIN RUN ONLY TO PURCHASER, AND ARE NOT EXTENDED TO ANY THIRD PARTIES. ALVARION NEITHER ASSUMES NOR AUTHORIZES ANY OTHER PERSON TO ASSUME FOR IT ANY OTHER LIABILITY IN CONNECTION WITH THE SALE, INSTALLATION, MAINTENANCE OR USE OF ITS PRODUCTS.Limitation of Liability(a) ALVARION SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO THE PURCHASER OR TO ANY THIRD PARTY, FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF USE, INTERRUPTION OF BUSINESS OR FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, PUNITIVE OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND, WHETHER ARISING UNDER BREACH OF CONTRACT, TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), STRICT LIABILITY OR OTHERWISE AND WHETHER BASED ON THIS AGREEMENT OR OTHERWISE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.(b) TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, IN NO EVENT SHALL THE LIABILITY FOR DAMAGES HEREUNDER OF ALVARION OR ITS EMPLOYEES OR AGENTS EXCEED THE PURCHASE PRICE PAID FOR THE PRODUCT BY PURCHASER, NOR SHALL THE AGGREGATE LIABILITY FOR DAMAGES TO ALL PARTIES REGARDING ANY PRODUCT EXCEED THE PURCHASE PRICE PAID FOR THAT PRODUCT BY THAT PARTY (EXCEPT IN THE CASE OF A BREACH OF A PARTY'S CONFIDENTIALITY OBLIGATIONS).Radio Frequency Interference StatementThe Subscriber Unit equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a class B digital device, pursuant to ETSI EN 301 489-1 rules and Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a residential environment notwithstanding use in commercial, business and industrial environments. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.The Base Station equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a class A digital device, pursuant to ETSI EN 301 489-1 rules and Part 15 of
vi BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System ManualLegal Rightsthe FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in commercial, business and industrial environments. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at the user's own expense.FCC Radiation Hazard Warning Base Station - To comply with FCC RF exposure requirements in Section 1.1307 and 2.1091 of FCC Rules, the antenna used for this transmitter must be fixed-mounted on outdoor permanent structures with a separation distance of at least 2 meter from all persons and must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.Indoor CPE - To comply with FCC RF exposure requirements in Section 1.1307and 2.1091 of FCC Rules, the antenna used for this transmitter must be kept at a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all persons and must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.Outdoor CPE - To comply with FCC RF exposure requirements in Section 1.1307 and 2.1091 of FCC Rules, the antenna be used for this transmitter must be fixed-mounted on outdoor permanent structures with a separation distance of at least 120 cm from all persons and must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.R&TTE Compliance StatementThis equipment complies with the appropriate essential requirements of Article 3 of the R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC.Safety Considerations - GeneralFor the following safety considerations, "Instrument" means the BreezeMAX units' components and their cables.GroundingBase Station chassis, Power Feeders and outdoor units are required to be bonded to protective grounding using the bonding stud or screw provided with each unit. Safety Considerations - DC Powered Equipment (BST & Power Feeder)
BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual viiLegal RightsRestricted Access Area: The DC powered equipment should only be installed in a Restricted Access Area.Installation Codes: The equipment must be installed according to the latest edition of the country national electrical codes. For North America, equipment must be installed in accordance with the US National Electrical Code and the Canadian Electrical Code.Overcurrent Protection: A readily accessible Listed branch circuit overcurrent protective device, rated 40A for the modular Base Station or 20A for the Power Feeder, must be incorporated in the building wiring.CAUTION: This equipment is designed to permit connection between the earthed conductor of the DC supply circuit and the grounding conductor at the equipment. See installation instructions.The equipment must be connected directly to the DC Supply System grounding electrode conductor.All equipment in the immediate vicinity must be grounded in the same way, and not be grounded elsewhere.The DC supply system is to be local, i.e. within the same premises as the equipment.There shall be no disconnect device between the grounded circuit conductor of the DC source (return) and the point of connection of the grounding electrode conductor.Lithium BatteryThe battery on the NPU card is not intended for replacement.CautionTo avoid electrical shock, do not perform any servicing unless you are qualified to do so.CAUTION ATTENTIONRisk of electric shock and energy hazard.Disconnecting one Power Interface Unit (PIU) disconnects only one PIU module. To isolate the Base Station completely, disconnect both PIUsRisque de décharge électrique et d'electrocution. La déconnection d'un seul module d'alimentation (PIU) n'isole pas complètement la Station de Base. Pour cela, il faut impérativement débrancher les deux modules d'alimentation (PIU).
viii BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System ManualLegal RightsLine VoltageBefore connecting this instrument to the power line, make sure that the voltage of the power source matches the requirements of the instrument.RadioThe instrument transmits radio energy during normal operation. To avoid possible harmful exposure to this energy, do not stand or work for extended periods of time in front of its antenna. The long-term characteristics or the possible physiological effects of radio frequency electromagnetic fields have not been yet fully investigated.Outdoor Units and Antennas Installation and GroundingEnsure that outdoor units, antennas and supporting structures are properly installed to eliminate any physical hazard to either people or property. Make sure that the installation of the outdoor unit, antenna and cables is performed in accordance with all relevant national and local building and safety codes. Even where grounding is not mandatory according to applicable regulation and national codes, it is highly recommended to ensure that the outdoor unit and the antenna mast (when using external antenna) are grounded and suitable lightning protection devices are used so as to provide protection against voltage surges and static charges. In any event, Alvarion is not liable for any injury, damage or regulation violations associated with or caused by installation, grounding or lightning protection.Disposal of Electronic and Electrical WasteDisposal of Electronic and Electrical WastePursuant to the WEEE EU Directive electronic and electrical waste must not be disposed of with unsorted waste. Please contact your local recycling authority for disposal of this product.
BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual ixLegal RightsImportant NoticeThis user manual is delivered subject to the following conditions and restrictions:This manual contains proprietary information belonging to Alvarion Ltd. Such information is supplied solely for the purpose of assisting properly authorized users of the respective Alvarion products.No part of its contents may be used for any other purpose, disclosed to any person or firm or reproduced by any means, electronic and mechanical, without the express prior written permission of Alvarion Ltd.The text and graphics are for the purpose of illustration and reference only. The specifications on which they are based are subject to change without notice.The software described in this document is furnished under a license. The software may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of that license.Information in this document is subject to change without notice. Corporate and individual names and data used in examples herein are fictitious unless otherwise noted.Alvarion Ltd. reserves the right to alter the equipment specifications and descriptions in this publication without prior notice. No part of this publication shall be deemed to be part of any contract or warranty unless specifically incorporated by reference into such contract or warranty. The information contained herein is merely descriptive in nature, and does not constitute an offer for the sale of the product described herein.Any changes or modifications of equipment, including opening of the equipment not expressly approved by Alvarion Ltd. will void equipment warranty and any repair thereafter shall be charged for. It could also void the user's authority to operate the equipment.Some of the equipment provided by Alvarion and specified in this manual, is manufactured and warranted by third parties. All such equipment must be installed and handled in full compliance with the instructions provided by such manufacturers as attached to this manual or provided thereafter by Alvarion or the manufacturers. Non-compliance with such instructions may result in serious
x BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System ManualLegal Rightsdamage and/or bodily harm and/or void the user's authority to operate the equipment and/or revoke the warranty provided by such manufacturer.
About This ManualThis manual describes the BreezeMAX TDD ("BreezeMAX") Base Station equipment Release 1 using SW version 4.0, and details how to install, operate and manage the system components.This manual is intended for technicians responsible for installing, setting and operating the BreezeMAX Base Station equipment, and for system administrators responsible for managing the system.This manual contains the following chapters and appendices:Chapter 1 - System description: Describes the BreezeMAX system and its components.Chapter 2 - Installation: Describes how to install the Base Station system components.Chapter 3 - Commissioning: Describes how to configure basic parameters and validate units' operation.Chapter 4 - Operation and Administration: Describes how to use the Monitor application for configuring parameters, checking system status and monitoring performance. Appendix A - Software Upgrade: Describes how to load new software files using TFTP, and how to switch to a new software version in BreezeMAX units.Appendix B - Defining Service Profiles for Generic VoIP Gateways: Describes the principles of defining Service Profiles for 3rd party generic (non DRAP based) VoIP devices.Glossary: A listing of commonly used terms.Index
ContentsChapter 1 - System Description1.1 Introducing BreezeMAX................................................................................................21.2 Base Station Equipment...............................................................................................51.2.1 Base Station Chassis...........................................................................................51.2.2 Network Processing Unit (NPU)...........................................................................51.2.3 Access Unit (AU-IDU) ..........................................................................................61.2.4 AU-ODU-HP.........................................................................................................71.2.5 Base Station Radio Configurations ......................................................................71.2.6 Power Feeder.......................................................................................................91.2.7 Power Interface Unit (PIU) .................................................................................101.2.8 Power Supply Unit (PSU)...................................................................................101.2.9 Air Ventilation Unit (AVU)...................................................................................111.2.10 GPS....................................................................................................................111.3 Networking Equipment ...............................................................................................121.4 Management Systems.................................................................................................121.4.1 AlvariSTAR™.....................................................................................................131.4.2 BreezeLITE™.....................................................................................................141.4.3 BreezeMAX Service Manager............................................................................141.5 Specifications..............................................................................................................151.5.1 Radio..................................................................................................................151.5.2 Base Station 2.X GHz Antennas (Optional) .......................................................161.5.3 Base Station 3.5 GHz Antennas (Optional)........................................................171.5.4 AU-IDU to AU-ODU Communication..................................................................17
xiv BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System ManualContents1.5.5 Data Communication (Ethernet Ports) ...............................................................181.5.6 Configuration and Management.........................................................................181.5.7 Standards Compliance, General........................................................................191.5.8 Environmental ....................................................................................................191.5.9 Services .............................................................................................................201.5.10 Physical and Electrical .......................................................................................21Chapter 2 - Installation Guidelines2.1 Installing the AU-ODU.................................................................................................282.1.1 AU-ODU Installation Requirements ...................................................................282.1.2 Guidelines for Positioning the AU-ODU .............................................................292.1.3 IF Cables............................................................................................................302.1.4 Pole Mounting the ODU .....................................................................................302.1.5 AU-ODU.............................................................................................................342.1.6 Connecting the Cables.......................................................................................352.2 Installing the Base Station Equipment......................................................................372.2.1 BST Installation Requirements...........................................................................372.2.2 BMAXWMAX-BST-SH Chassis Slot Assignments.............................................382.2.3 Power Requirements..........................................................................................392.2.4 HOT SWAP Support ..........................................................................................392.2.5 Power Interface Unit (PIU) .................................................................................392.2.6 Power Supply Unit (PSU)...................................................................................422.2.7 Access Unit Indoor Module (AU-IDU) ................................................................442.2.8 Network Processing Unit (NPU).........................................................................462.2.9 Using the Hot Swap Injector/Ejector Handles ....................................................482.2.10 Installing the Base Station Chassis and Modules ..............................................50
BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual xvContents2.2.11 Air Ventilation Unit (AVU)...................................................................................522.3 Installing the ODU Power Feeder ..............................................................................542.3.1 Installation Requirements...................................................................................542.3.2 The ODU Power Feeder ....................................................................................552.3.3 Installing the ODU Power Feeder ......................................................................562.4 Installing the GPS Adapter ........................................................................................582.4.1 Installation Requirements...................................................................................582.4.2 The GPS Adapter...............................................................................................592.4.3 Installing the GPS Adapter.................................................................................60Chapter 3 - Commissioning3.1 Configuring Basic Parameters of Base Station........................................................643.1.1 NPU Parameters Required for Management .....................................................643.1.2 Base Station Configuration Parameters.............................................................663.1.3 RADIUS Parameters ..........................................................................................663.1.4 Chain parameters...............................................................................................673.1.5 Radio Cluster .....................................................................................................673.1.6 ODU ...................................................................................................................673.1.7 AU ......................................................................................................................673.1.8 SU ......................................................................................................................693.2 Operation Verification.................................................................................................703.2.1 AU-ODU LEDs ...................................................................................................703.2.2 Base Station LEDs.............................................................................................703.2.3 ODU Power Feeder LEDs..................................................................................743.2.4 GPS Adapter LEDs ............................................................................................743.2.5 Verifying the Ethernet Connection .....................................................................75
xvi BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System ManualContentsChapter 4 - Operation and Administration4.1 BreezeMAX System Management..............................................................................784.2 The Monitor Program..................................................................................................804.2.1 Accessing the Monitor Program.........................................................................804.2.2 Using the Monitor Program ................................................................................814.3 The NPU's Main Menu.................................................................................................844.3.1 Base Station Menu.............................................................................................844.3.2 NPU Menu..........................................................................................................844.3.3 Radio Cluster Menu ...........................................................................................844.3.4 ODU Menu .........................................................................................................844.3.5 AU Menu ............................................................................................................854.3.6 SU Menu ............................................................................................................854.3.7 Services Menu ...................................................................................................854.3.8 Exit .....................................................................................................................854.4 Base Station Menu ......................................................................................................864.4.1 Show ..................................................................................................................864.4.2 Configuration......................................................................................................874.4.3 Alarms and Traps...............................................................................................914.4.4 RADIUS..............................................................................................................944.4.5 Licenses...........................................................................................................1024.4.6 Chain................................................................................................................1044.4.7 GPS Info...........................................................................................................1054.5 NPU Menu ..................................................................................................................1074.5.1 Show ................................................................................................................1074.5.2 Unit Control ......................................................................................................1094.5.3 Configuration....................................................................................................114
BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual xviiContents4.5.4 Performance Monitoring...................................................................................1214.6 Radio Cluster Menu...................................................................................................1244.6.1 Show Summary................................................................................................1244.6.2 Select ...............................................................................................................1254.6.3 Add...................................................................................................................1254.6.4 Radio Cluster Parameters................................................................................1254.7 ODU Menu..................................................................................................................1274.7.1 Show Summary................................................................................................1274.7.2 Select ...............................................................................................................1284.7.3 Add...................................................................................................................1294.7.4 ODU Parameters..............................................................................................1294.7.5 Frequency Bands File and Frequency Bands Groups .....................................1304.8 AU Menu.....................................................................................................................1324.8.1 Show Summary................................................................................................1324.8.2 Upgrading AU’s SW .........................................................................................1334.8.3 SW Files in NPU ..............................................................................................1344.8.4 Select ...............................................................................................................1354.8.5 AU Slot # Menu................................................................................................1364.8.6 Performance Monitoring...................................................................................1484.9 SU Menu.....................................................................................................................1504.9.1 Show Summary................................................................................................1504.9.2 Show Summary by AU.....................................................................................1524.9.3 Upgrading SU’s SW .........................................................................................1524.9.4 SW Files in NPU ..............................................................................................1524.9.5 Select by Name................................................................................................1544.9.6 Select by MAC Address ...................................................................................154
xviii BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System ManualContents4.9.7 SU # Menu .......................................................................................................1544.9.8 Add New SU.....................................................................................................1724.9.9 Clear All Configured SU SW Files....................................................................1724.10Services Menu...........................................................................................................1734.10.1 Introduction to Services....................................................................................1734.10.2 Introduction to Filtering Features .....................................................................1814.10.3 Common Operations in Services Menu ...........................................................1824.10.4 The Services Menu ..........................................................................................1834.10.5 Defining Local Service Profiles ........................................................................2084.10.6 Defining Local Services....................................................................................2094.10.7 Defining RADIUS Based Services ...................................................................2094.10.8 Pre-configured Profiles.....................................................................................2104.11NPU Parameters Summary ......................................................................................216A.1 Before you Start ........................................................................................................232A.2 File Loading Procedure ............................................................................................233A.3 Completing the Software Upgrade (Switching Versions)......................................235B.1 Introduction ...............................................................................................................238B.1.1 Priority Marking ................................................................................................238B.1.2 General Assumptions.......................................................................................238B.2 1 POTS Basic VoIP G.729 Service Profile ...............................................................240B.2.1 Service Characteristics ....................................................................................240B.2.2 RTP BW Calculation ........................................................................................240B.2.3 RTCP BW Calculation......................................................................................240B.2.4 QoS Profile.......................................................................................................240B.3 1 POTS Advanced VoIP G.729 Service Profile........................................................242B.3.1 Service Characteristics ....................................................................................242
BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual xixContentsB.3.2 Voice RTP BW Calculation ..............................................................................242B.3.3 Voice RTCP BW Calculation............................................................................242B.3.4 T.38 14,400 Kbps Fax RTP BW Calculation....................................................242B.3.5 FAX RTCP BW Calculation..............................................................................243B.3.6 QoS Profiles.....................................................................................................243B.4 1 POTS Basic VoIP G.711 Service Profile ...............................................................244B.4.1 Service Characteristics ....................................................................................244B.4.2 RTP BW Calculation ........................................................................................244B.4.3 RTCP BW Calculation......................................................................................244B.4.4 QoS Profile.......................................................................................................244B.5 1 POTS Advanced VoIP G.711 Service Profile........................................................246B.5.1 Service Characteristics ....................................................................................246B.5.2 Voice RTP BW Calculation ..............................................................................246B.5.3 Voice RTCP BW Calculation............................................................................246B.5.4 T.38 14,400 Kbps Fax RTP BW Calculation....................................................246B.5.5 FAX RTCP BW Calculation..............................................................................247B.5.6 QoS Profiles.....................................................................................................247
FiguresFigure 1-1: BreezeMAX System Architecture................................................................................4Figure 2-1: AU-ODU-HP Pole Installation Using Special Clamps...............................................32Figure 2-2: AU-ODU-HP Pole Installation Using Metal Band......................................................33Figure 2-3: Bottom Panel of the AU-ODU ...................................................................................34Figure 2-4: BMAXWMAX-BST-SH Chassis Slot Assignments....................................................38Figure 2-5: PIU Module Front Panel............................................................................................40Figure 2-6: PSU Module Front Panel..........................................................................................43Figure 2-7: AU-IDU Module Front Panel .....................................................................................44Figure 2-8: NPU Module Front Panel..........................................................................................46Figure 2-9: AVU Drawer Front Panel ..........................................................................................52Figure 2-10: ODU Power Feeder Front Panel.............................................................................55Figure 2-11: ODU Power Feeder Rear Panel .............................................................................55Figure 2-12: GPS Adapter Front Panel.......................................................................................59Figure 2-13: GPS Adapter Rear Panel........................................................................................59Figure 4-1: Base Station Chassis Slot Assignment.....................................................................87Figure 4-2: Filtering Functionality..............................................................................................182
TablesTable 1-1: Number of AU-IDUs, AU-ODUs and Power Feeders Required for Various Configura-tions.............................................................................................................................................10Table 1-2: PSU Requirements, Configurations with one NPU (excluding PSU redundancy) .....11Table 1-3: Radio Specifications...................................................................................................15Table 1-4: Base Station 2.X GHz Antennas, Electrical Specifications ........................................16Table 1-5: Base Station 3.5 GHz Antennas, Electrical Specifications.........................................17Table 1-6: AU-IDU to AU-ODU Communication..........................................................................17Table 1-7: Data Communication (Ethernet Ports) .......................................................................18Table 1-8: Configuration and Management.................................................................................18Table 1-9: Standards Compliance, General................................................................................19Table 1-10: Environmental Specifications...................................................................................19Table 1-11: Services ...................................................................................................................20Table 1-12: Mechanical Specifications, Base Station Equipment ...............................................21Table 1-13: Electrical Specifications, Base Station Equipment...................................................21Table 1-14: Connectors, Base Station Equipment ......................................................................23Table 1-15: Base Station 2.X GHz Antennas, Mechanical Specifications...................................24Table 1-16: Base Station 3.5 GHz Antennas, Mechanical Specifications...................................25Table 2-1: AU-ODU Types ..........................................................................................................28Table 2-2: IF Cables Requirements ............................................................................................30Table 2-3: Maximum IF Cable Length (Double Shielded Cables)...............................................30Table 2-4: AU-ODU LEDs ...........................................................................................................34Table 2-5: AU-ODU Connectors..................................................................................................34Table 2-6: Power Requirements, Base Station Equipment.........................................................39
xxiv BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System ManualTablesTable 2-7: PIU LEDs ...................................................................................................................41Table 2-8: PSU Requirements, Configurations with one NPU (excluding PSU redundancy) .....42Table 2-9: PSU LEDs..................................................................................................................43Table 2-10: AU-IDU LEDs...........................................................................................................45Table 2-11: NPU Connectors ......................................................................................................47Table 2-12: NPU LEDs................................................................................................................47Table 2-13: AVU LEDs................................................................................................................52Table 2-14: ODU Power Feeder Connectors ..............................................................................55Table 2-15: ODU Power Feeder LEDs........................................................................................56Table 2-16: GPS Adapter Connectors.........................................................................................59Table 2-17: GPS Adapter LEDs..................................................................................................60Table 3-1: Basic NPU Parameters ..............................................................................................64Table 3-2: AU-ODU-LEDs...........................................................................................................70Table 3-3: AU-IDU LEDs.............................................................................................................71Table 3-4: NPU LEDs..................................................................................................................72Table 3-5: PIU LEDs ...................................................................................................................73Table 3-6: PSU LEDs..................................................................................................................73Table 3-7: AVU LEDs..................................................................................................................73Table 3-8: ODU Power Feeder LEDs..........................................................................................74Table 3-9: GPS Adapter LEDs ....................................................................................................74Table 4-1: COM Port Configuration.............................................................................................80Table 4-2: Default Passwords ...................................................................................................110Table 4-3: Frequency Bands.....................................................................................................131Table 4-4: Automatic Association of Channel 1 Upon First Power-Up......................................144Table 4-5: Rates (Modulation Schemes and Coding) ...............................................................147Table 4-6: Intermediate Step Mask...........................................................................................168
BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual xxvTablesTable 4-7: Hybrid VLAN Mode ..................................................................................................180Table 4-8: Hybrid VLAN Mode ..................................................................................................187Table 4-9: Priority Marking Values ............................................................................................195Table 4-10: CT Values ..............................................................................................................202Table 4-11: Pre-Configured Data Service Profiles ....................................................................211Table 4-12: Pre-Configured Forwarding Rules for Data Service...............................................212Table 4-13: Pre-Configured Priority Classifiers for Data Services ............................................212Table 4-14: Pre-Configured QoS Profiles for Data Services.....................................................212Table 4-15: Pre-Configured Voice Service Profiles (for DRAP-based Gateways) ...................213Table 4-16: Pre-Configured Service Profiles for Generic (non-DRAP) VoIP Services..............213Table 4-17: Pre-Configured Forwarding Rule for Voice Services .............................................214Table 4-18: Pre-Configured Priority Classifiers for Generic (non-DRAP) VoIP Service............214Table 4-19: Pre-Configured BE and RT QoS Profile for Voice Services...................................214Table 4-20: Pre-Configured CG QoS Profile for Generic (non-DRAP) VoIP Services..............215Table 4-21: Pre-Configured Forwarding Rule for Transparent Services...................................215Table 4-22: Pre-Configured QoS Profile for Transparent Services...........................................215Table 4-23: NPU Monitor Parameters Summary.......................................................................216
1Chapter 1 - System DescriptionIn This Chapter:“Introducing BreezeMAX” on page 2“Base Station Equipment” on page 5“Networking Equipment” on page 12“Management Systems” on page 12“Specifications” on page 15
2System DescriptionChapter 1 - System Description1.1 Introducing BreezeMAXBreezeMAX TDD (BreezeMAX) is Alvarion's WiMAX-ready platform operating in Time Division Duplex (TDD) mode. It leverages Alvarion's market-leading knowledge of Broadband Wireless Access (BWA), industry leadership, proven field experience, and core technologies including many years of experience with OFDM technology.Built from the ground up based on the IEEE 802.16/ETSI HIPERMAN standards, BreezeMAX is designed specifically to meet the unique requirements of the wireless Metropolitan Area Network (MAN) environment and to deliver broadband access services to a wide range of customers, including residential, SOHO, SME and multi-tenant customers. Its Media Access Control (MAC) protocol was designed for point-to-multipoint broadband wireless access applications, providing a very efficient use of the wireless spectrum and supporting difficult user environments. The access and bandwidth allocation mechanisms accommodate hundreds of subscriber units per channel, with subscriber units that may support different services to multiple end users. The system uses OFDM radio technology, which is robust in adverse channel conditions and enables operation in non line of sight links. This allows easy installation and improves coverage, while maintaining a high level of spectral efficiency. Modulation and coding can be adapted per burst, ever striving to achieve a balance between robustness and efficiency in accordance with prevailing link conditions.BreezeMAX supports a wide range of network services, including Internet access (via IP or PPPoE tunneling), VPNs and Voice over IP. Service recognition and multiple classifiers that can be used for generating various service profiles enable operators to offer differentiated SLAs with committed QoS for each service profile.BreezeMAX offers an innovative solution for a Self-Install CPE, including all the features, embedded capabilities and supplementary tools that support easy installation by a non-professional user and fully automated network-entry, authentication and services provisioning.The elements that enable and support the Self-Install solution include:4-channels Access Unit and high-power radios at the Base Station2nd or 4th order transmit diversity at the Base Station.
Introducing BreezeMAXBreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 34th order receive diversity at the Base Station using Maximum Receive Ratio Combining (MRRC). Uplink sub-channels using OFDMA-16 for increased service efficiency and improved link budget.A high-power CPE with an integral antenna array, providing 360 degrees coverage with smart selection of Tx and Rx antennas. An optional wall/window mounted antenna to extend the coverage area.Automatic frequency scanning and best Access Unit/Base Station selection algorithms in the CPE.Enhanced Automatic Transmit Power Control (ATPC) and dynamic rate selection (multirate) optimized for multiple sub-channels in the uplink.Centralized CPE authentication and service provisioning using either a commercial RADIUS server or an entry level BreezeMAX Service Manager server available from Alvarion.Centralized Service Profiles distribution to ensure location-free service availability and fully controlled service provisioning.A suite of features and support tools to enable fast and simple installation according to various business models. The system operates in Time Division Duplex (TDD) and is currently available in the 2.3 GHz (WCS), 2.5 GHz (MMDS and MCS) and 3.5 GHz frequency bands. The actual operating frequencies used by the system can be configured according to applicable radio regulations, license conditions and specific deployment considerations.A BreezeMAX system comprises the following:Customer Premise Equipment (CPE): BreezeMAX Subscriber Units and Alvarion's Voice/Networking Gateways.Base Station (BST) Equipment: BreezeMAX Base Station equipment, including the modular Base Station, Outdoor Radio Units, GPS Receiver and other components.
4System DescriptionChapter 1 - System DescriptionNetworking Equipment: Standard switches/routers and other networking equipment, supporting connections to the backbone and/or Internet.Management Systems: SNMP-based Management, RADIUS server(s) and other Operation Support Systems.Figure 1-1: BreezeMAX System Architecture
Base Station EquipmentBreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 51.2 Base Station EquipmentThe Multi Carrier, High Power, Full Duplex Base Station provides all the functionality necessary to communicate with SUs and to connect to the backbone of the Service Provider. The Base Station comprises the following elements:1.2.1 Base Station ChassisThe Base Station equipment is based on an 8U high cPCI (compact Peripheral Component Interconnect) shelf designed for installation in a 19" or 21" (ETSI) rack. This chassis has a total of nine double Euro (6U high) slots and six single Euro (3U high) slots. All the modules are hot swappable, and high availability can be provided through multiple redundancy schemes.The six single Euro slots re intended for one or two redundant Power Interface Units (PIU) and up to four redundant Power Supply Units (PSUs). One of the double Euro slots is dedicated to the Network Processing Unit (NPU) module, supporting a central networking and management architecture. Another double Euro slot is reserved for an optional redundant NPU (NPU redundancy support is planned for a future release). The remaining seven double Euro slots are dedicated mainly for Access Unit (AU) indoor modules, thus enabling various future redundancy configurations. Additionally, the Base Station chassis contains an air convection and ventilation fan tray (AVU).1.2.2 Network Processing Unit (NPU)The Network Processing Unit is the "heart" of the BreezeMAX Base Station. The NPU module serves as the central processing unit that manages the base station's components and the SUs served by it. It also aggregates the traffic from the AU modules and transfers it to the IP Backbone through a dedicated Gigabit/Fast Ethernet interface. The NPU main functions are:
6System DescriptionChapter 1 - System DescriptionAggregate backbone Ethernet connectivity via a 100/1000 Base-T network interface.Traffic classification and connection establishment initiation.Policy based data switching.Service Level Agreements management.RADIUS NAS, enabling centralized SUs’ authentication and services authorization by RADIUS server(s).Centralized agent in the Base Station to manage all cell site's AUs and all registered SUs.Base Station overall operation control, including AU diagnostic and control, PSU monitoring, AVU management and redundancy support.Alarms management, including external alarm inputs and activation of external devices (future option).Synchronization, including GPS antenna interface, clock and IF reference generation and distribution to the Base Station modules as well as to other collocated Base Station chassis (future option).An SNMP agent incorporated into the NPU enables extensive In Band (IB) management of the Base Station and all its registered SUs. Out Of Band (OOB) management is supported through a dedicated 10/100 Base-T interface. A serial RS-232 port supports local configuration, monitoring and debugging.Two NPU modules can be used to provide a 1+1 redundancy scheme. The redundancy mechanism, to be supported in future releases, will be based on a Master <-> Slave principle, where the slave is in passive mode and is constantly updating all the learning tables and networking parameters of the master card.1.2.3 Access Unit (AU-IDU)The double Euro AU-IDU module contains the WiMAX-ready MAC and modem and is responsible for the wireless network connection establishment and for bandwidth management. Each AU-IDU connects to the NPU via the back plane. In addition, each AU-IDU connects to all other AU slots via the back plane over a shared bus.
Base Station EquipmentBreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 7Each AU-IDU includes four channels using a common PHY and MAC that can connect to up to four outdoor radio units, according to the selected diversity mode (refer to Section 1.2.5 below for more details). The AU-IDU module connects to the AU-ODUs via Intermediate Frequency (IF) cables carrying full duplex data, control and management signals between the AU-IDU and the AU-ODU, as well as power (-48 VDC) and 64 MHz synchronization reference clock from the AU-IDU to the AU-ODU. The IF Tx and Rx frequencies are 240 MHz and 140 MHz, respectively. IDU-ODU service channel at 14 MHz serves for bi-directional control, status and management signaling.1.2.4 AU-ODU-HPThe AU-ODU-HP (High Power ODU) is a full duplex multi-carrier radio unit that connects to an external antenna. It is designed to provide high system gain and interference robustness utilizing high transmit power and low noise figure. It supports a bandwidth of up to 14 MHz, enabling future options such as increased capacity through either larger channels or using an IF multiplexer.The AU-ODU-HP provides a maximum output power of 36 dBm.1.2.5 Base Station Radio ConfigurationsThe 4-Channels High-Power AU-IDUs support the following radio configurations:1.2.5.1 Single Channel per AU, No DiversityThis is the basic configuration, where each AU-IDU connects to one ODU, serving a single sector with a directional antenna.1.2.5.2 Multiple Channels per AU, No DiversityUp to 4 channels per AU-IDU can be used to cover several sectors, where each channel connects to one ODU, with one ODU per sector. A single AU-IDU can cover a 360° cell. Where the coverage of the cell can be built from 3 sectors of 120° each with frequency reuse 1, or 4 sectors of 90° each with frequency reuse 1 (i.e. frequency per sector) or 1/2 (i.e. 2 frequencies for 4 sectors where each frequency is used for 2 opposite sectors). All ODUs served by the same AU-IDU share a common MAC and modem. Each ODU is managed separately.
8System DescriptionChapter 1 - System DescriptionThe following figure describes the multi channel use to cover a cell of 360° with 4 sectors, using frequency reuse 1:The following figure describes the multi channel use to cover a cell of 360° with 4 sectors, using frequency reuse 1/2:1.2.5.3 2nd Order DiversityMultiple channel configuration with second order diversity allows coverage of one sector with space diversity by a single AU-IDU and two ODUs connected to channels 1 and 2. The same frequency and transmit power are set for both ODUs. The two ODUs served by the same AU-IDU share a common MAC and modem.
Base Station EquipmentBreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 91.2.5.4 4th Order DiversityMultiple channel configuration with fourth order diversity allows a single sector coverage by a single AU-IDU with 4 ODUs. In each sector, both space and polarization diversities are implemented, using dual polarization slant antennas. The channels are paired: channels 1 and 2 form one pair, channels 3 and 4 form the second pair. The two ODUs connected to each pair are connected to the same dual polarization antenna. The same frequency and transmit power are set for all four ODUs. All ODUs served by the same AU-IDU share a common MAC and modem.1.2.6 Power FeederThe Base station’s PIU can support a maximum current of 35 A (@-40.5 VDC). Using proper design considerations, up to six AU-ODU-HP units can be powered directly from the Base Station (via the back panel and AU-IDUs). The ODU Power Feeder is used as an additional power source providing power (-48 VDC) to AU-ODU-HP High Power ODUs. It transfers transparently all signals between the AU-IDU and the ODU, while injecting DC power received from an external source. Each ODU Power Feeder unit can serve up to four High Power ODUs. Up to three ODU Power Feeder units can be installed in a 1U high Power Feeder panel.The following table displays the number of ODUs and Power Feeder modules required for various radio configurations:
10 System DescriptionChapter 1 - System Description1.2.7 Power Interface Unit (PIU)The single Euro PIU module is the interface between the Base Station site's DC power source and the Base Station chassis PSUs and external AU ODUs, which receive power via the AU-IDUs. The PIU filters and stabilizes the Base Station input power and protects the system from power problems such as over voltage, surge pulses, reverse polarity connection and short circuits. It also filters high frequency interference (radiated emissions) and low frequency interference (conducted emissions) to the external power source. Each Base Station chassis contains two slots for an optional 1+1 PIU redundancy. One PIU is sufficient to support a fully populated chassis. Two PIU modules provide redundant power feeding (two input sources) while avoiding current flow between the two input sources.1.2.8 Power Supply Unit (PSU)The single Euro PSU module is a 48 VDC power supply unit. Each Base Station chassis can contain up to four PSU modules providing N+1 redundancy configurations.Table 1-2 displays the number of PSU modules (excluding redundant units) required for various Base Station configurations without NPU redundancy (one NPU):Table 1-1: Number of AU-IDUs, AU-ODUs and Power Feeders Required for Various ConfigurationsDiversity Mode Number of Sectors (AU-IDUs) Number of ODUs Number of Power FeedersSecond Order Diversity 3 6 -48 16122Fourth Order Diversity 3 12 241636245
Base Station EquipmentBreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 111.2.9 Air Ventilation Unit (AVU)The 2U high AVU includes a 1U high integral chamber for inlet airflow and a 1U high fan tray with an internal alarm module. To support high availability Base Station, the fan tray includes 10 brush-less fans, where 9 fans are sufficient for cooling a fully loaded chassis. A failure in any of the fans is indicated by both the front panel LEDs and a trap that is sent to the management system. To further support high availability, the chassis may operate with the hot-swappable fan tray extracted from it for a period of time sufficient for replacing it (up 10 minutes).1.2.10 GPSGPS is used to synchronize the air link frames of Intra-site and Inter-site located sectors to ensure that in all sectors the air frame will start at the same time, and that all sectors will switch from transmit (downlink) to receive (uplink) at the same time. This synchronization is necessary to prevent Intra-site and Inter-site sectors interference and saturation (assuming that all sectors are operating with the same frame size and with the same DL/UL ratio). The GPS clock required is 1PPS with accuracy of 10-11 and maximum jitter of 100ns. These GPS clock requirements can be reached by indoor or outdoor installed GPS unit when it is synchronized to at least 4 satellites.1.2.10.1 Indoor GPS ReceiverThe Indoor GPS Receiver comprises a GPS receiver integrated with a stable OCXO oscillator, within a unit designed for mounting in a standard 19 inch rack. A 50 meter coaxial cable connects it to an active antenna. The indoor installed GPS system is able to provide up to 40 hours of clock holdover with a maximal drift of 50 microseconds when the GPS system losses satellites synchronization. The Indoor GPS provides 1PPS at TTL levels and the control channel is driven by an RS-232 serial interface. The unit is powered directly from a -48 VDC power source.Table 1-2: PSU Requirements, Configurations with one NPU (excluding PSU redundancy)Number of AU-IDUs Minimum Required Number of PSUs1 - 2 13 - 4 25 - 6 3
12 System DescriptionChapter 1 - System Description1.2.10.2 Outdoor GPS ReceiverThe all-outdoor GPS Receiver is a pole mountable GPS receiver and antenna in a single environmentally protected enclosure. The Outdoor GPS Receiver is powered by a 12 VDC power source, supplied to it by the NPU via the GPS Adapter. The RS-422 interface allows installation at distances up to 100m.1.2.10.3 GPS Adapter UnitThe GPS Adapter connects the different GPS units to the NPU, adapting the different interfaces. Future versions may include an internal GPS module that will allow an all-in-one low-cost solution. A future optional addition of OCXO in the GPS Adapter box may provide an improved hold over solution when the GPS is not synchronized. The GPS Adapter is powered by 12 VDC supplied by the NPU. The GPS Adapter is installed in a 1U high panel (the same panel that is used for the ODU Power Feeders).1.3 Networking EquipmentThe Base Station is connected to the backbone through standard data communication and telecommunication equipment. The NPU aggregates the traffic from all AUs, connecting to the backbone through a 100/1000 Base-T port.point-to-point link from the Base Station to the backbone can be either wired or wireless.1.4 Management SystemsThe end-to-end IP-based architecture of the system enables full management of all components, using standard management tools. An SNMP agent in the NPU/Micro Base Station implements standard and proprietary MIBs for remote setting of operational modes and parameters of the Base Station equipment as well as the Subscriber Units served by it. Security features incorporated in BreezeMAX units restrict the access for management purposes.In addition, the Ethernet WAN can be used to connect to other Operation Support Systems including servers, Customer Care systems and AAA (Authentication, Authorization and Admission) tools.
Management SystemsBreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 131.4.1 AlvariSTAR™AlvariSTAR is a comprehensive Carrier-Class network management system for Alvarion's Broadband Wireless Access products-based Networks. AlvariSTAR is designed for today's most advanced Service Providers' Network Operation Centers (NOCs), providing the network Operation, Administration and Maintenance (OA&M) staff and managers with all the network surveillance, monitoring and configuration capabilities that they require in order to effectively manage the BWA network while keeping the resources and expenses at a minimum.AlvariSTAR is designed to offer the network's OA&M staff with a unified, scalable and distributable network management system. AlvariSTAR system uses a distributed client-server architecture, which provides the service provider with a robust, scalable and fully redundant network management system in which all single points of failure can be avoided.AlvariSTAR provides the following BWA network management functionality:Device DiscoveryDevice InventoryTopologyFault ManagementConfiguration ManagementService ManagementData CollectionPerformance MonitoringDevice embedded software upgradeSecurity ManagementNorthbound interface to other Network Management Systems.Embedded with the entire knowledge base of BWA network operations, AlvariSTAR is a unique state-of-the-art power multiplier in the hands of the service provider that enables the provisioning of satisfied customers. AlvariSTAR
14 System DescriptionChapter 1 - System Descriptiondramatically extends the abilities of the service provider to provide a rich portfolio of services and to support rapid customer base expansion.1.4.2 BreezeLITE™Alvarion's BreezeLITE is an SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) application designed for on-line management of BreezeMAX system components. This utility simplifies the installation and maintenance of small size installations by easily enabling the change of settings or firmware upgrade for one Base Station/Micro Base Station at a time (including the managed device's components and associated SUs).BreezeLITE allows accessing a wide array of monitoring and configuration options, including:Device Manager for Base Station and Micro Base Station, including NPU, AUs and SUsUnit status and current configuration verificationSelected unit configuration modificationService Profiles verification and modificationService ProvisioningFirmware upgrade for the NPU/Micro Base Station, AUs and SUsOn-line performance data monitoring and statistics collectionA special MS Excel Add-In for effective tabular and graphical display of collected dataSupport for http cut-through to Voice Gateways and Networking Gateways1.4.3 BreezeMAX Service ManagerBreezeMAX Service Manager provides centralized management of user authentication and authorization using the industry standard RADIUS protocol. The BreezeMAX Service Manager receives from the NPU (operating as a NAS) the authentication details (User Name and Password) upon network entry of a new CPE, and respond (if authentication if verified by matching details in the database) by sending properties of the Services that should be granted to the user.
SpecificationsBreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 151.5 Specifications1.5.1 RadioTable 1-3: Radio SpecificationsItem DescriptionFrequency Unit/Band Frequency (MHz)AU-ODU-HP-2.3 2300 - 2360AU-ODU-HP-2.3-WCS 2305 - 2315, 2350 - 2360AU-ODU-HP-2.5-A1 2496 - 2602AU-ODU-HP-2.5-A2 2590 - 2690AU-ODU-HP-TDD-3.4a 3399.5 - 3455AU-ODU-HP-TDD-3.4b 3455 - 3500AU-ODU-HP-TDD-3.5a 3500 - 3555AU-ODU-HP-TDD-3.4a 3545 - 3600Operation Mode TDD, Full duplex Channel Bandwidth 3.5 MHz5 MHzCentral Frequency Resolution 0.125 MHz (actual configurable frequencies depend on the local radio regulations and allocated spectrum)Antenna Port (AU-ODU) N-Type, 50 ohmMax. Input Power (at AU-ODU antenna port)-60 dBm before saturation, -8 dBm before damageOutput Power (at AU-ODU antenna port)36 dBm +/-1 dB maximumPower control range: 10 dBModulation OFDM modulation, 256 FFT points; BPSK, QPSK, QAM16, QAM64FEC Convolutional Coding: 1/2, 2/3, 3/4
16 System DescriptionChapter 1 - System Description1.5.2 Base Station 2.X GHz Antennas (Optional)Typical Sensitivity (BER=1E-6) Modulation & CodingMinimum SNR (dB)Sensitivity (dBm) @ 3.5 MHz BWSensitivity (dBm) @ 5 MHz BWBPSK 1/2 2.5 -99.5 -98BPSK 3/4 4.8 -97.5 -96QPSK 1/2 5.9 -96.5 -95QPSK 3/4 8.6 -93.5 -92QAM16 1/2 11.4 -90.5 -89QAM16 3/4 14.8 -87.5 -86QAM64 2/3 20 -82.5 -81QAM64 3/4 20.9 -81.5 -80Table 1-4: Base Station 2.X GHz Antennas, Electrical SpecificationsItem DescriptionBS ANT 60/2.X V 16.5 dBi minimum in the 2.3-2.7 GHz band, 60°AZ x 7°EL sector antenna, vertical polarization, compliance with ETSI EN 301 525 V.1.1.1 (2000-06) CS and RoHSBS ANT 90/2.X V 15.5 dBi minimum in the 2.3-2.7 GHz band, 90°AZ x 7°EL sector antenna, vertical polarization, compliance with ETSI EN 301 525 V.1.1.1 (2000-06) CS and RoHSBS ANT 120/2.X V 14 dBi minimum in the 2.3-2.7 GHz band, 120°AZ x 7°EL sector antenna, vertical polarization, compliance with ETSI EN 301 525 V.1.1.1 (2000-06) CS and RoHSBS ANT 60/2.X H 16.5 dBi minimum in the 2.3-2.7 GHz band, 60°AZ x 7°EL sector antenna, horizontal polarization, compliance with ETSI EN 301 525 V.1.1.1 (2000-06) CS and RoHSBS ANT 90/2.X H 15.5 dBi minimum in the 2.3-2.7 GHz band, 90°AZ x 7°EL sector antenna, horizontal polarization, compliance with ETSI EN 301 525 V.1.1.1 (2000-06) CS and RoHSBS ANT 120/2.X H 14 dBi minimum in the 2.3-2.7 GHz band, 120°AZ x 7°EL sector antenna, horizontal polarization, compliance with ETSI EN 301 525 V.1.1.1 (2000-06) CS and RoHSBS ANT 60/2.X DP 2 x 17 dBi minimum in the 2.3-2.7 GHz band, 65°AZ x 7°EL sector antenna, dual slant +/- 45° polarization, compliance with ETSI EN 302 085 CS2 and RoHSBS ANT 90/2.X DP 2 x 15.5 dBi minimum in the 2.3-2.7 GHz band, 90°AZ x 8°EL sector antenna, dual slant +/- 45° polarization, compliance with ETSI EN 302 085 CS2 and RoHSBS ANT 120/2.X DP 2 x 13 dBi minimum in the 2.3-2.7 GHz band, 120°AZ x 8°EL sector antenna, dual slant +/- 45° polarization, compliance with ETSI EN 302 085 CS2 and RoHSTable 1-3: Radio SpecificationsItem Description
SpecificationsBreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 171.5.3 Base Station 3.5 GHz Antennas (Optional)1.5.4 AU-IDU to AU-ODU CommunicationTable 1-5: Base Station 3.5 GHz Antennas, Electrical SpecificationsItem DescriptionBS ANT 60V/3.3-3.8 16.5 dBi minimum in the 3.3-3.8 GHz band, 60° AZ x 10° EL, vertical polarization, compliant with ESTI EN 302 085 V.1.1.2 (2001-02) CS2.BS ANT 90V/3.3-3.8 15 dBi typical in the 3.3-3.8 GHz band, 90° AZ x 9° EL, vertical polarization, compliant with ESTI EN 302 085 V.1.1.2 (2001-02) CSI,CS2,CS3BS ANT 120/3.5V 14 dBi typical in the 3.3-3.7 GHz band, 120° AZ x 6.7° EL, vertical polarization, compliant with ESTI EN 302 085 V.1.2.3 (2005-09) CS1.BS ANT 60/3.5H 16 dBi typical in the 3.4-3.6 GHz band, 60° AZ x 9° EL, horizontal polarization, compliant with EN 302 085, V1.1.1 CS3BS ANT 90/3.5H 14 dBi typical in the 3.4-3.6 GHz band, 85° AZ x 9° EL, horizontal polarization, compliant with EN 302 085, V1.1.1 CS3BS ANT 60/3.X DP 2 x 16.5 dBi minimum in the 3.3-3.8 GHz band, 65°AZ x 7°EL sector antenna, dual slant +/- 45° polarization, compliance with ETSI EN 302 085 CS2 and RoHSBS ANT 90/3.X DP 2 x 15.5 dBi minimum in the 3.3-3.8 GHz band, 90°AZ x 7°EL sector antenna, dual slant +/- 45° polarization, compliance with ETSI EN 302 085 CS2 and RoHSBS ANT 120/3.X DP 2 x 13 dBi minimum in the 3.3-3.8 GHz band, 120°AZ x 7°EL sector antenna, dual slant +/- 45° polarization, compliance with ETSI EN 302 085 CS2 and RoHSOmni ANT 3.4-3.6 10 dBi typical in the 3.4-3.6 GHz band, 360° AZ x 9° EL, vertical polarizationTable 1-6: AU-IDU to AU-ODU CommunicationItem Description IF Frequency Tx: 240 MHzRx: 140 MHzRef Synchronization Frequency 64 MHzBi-Directional Control Frequency 14 MHzIF cable Impedance 50 ohmMaximum IF cable Attenuation 10 dB @ 240 MHz7.5 dB @ 140 MHz8 dB @ 64 MHz
18 System DescriptionChapter 1 - System Description1.5.5 Data Communication (Ethernet Ports)1.5.6 Configuration and ManagementMinimum IF cable Shielding Effectiveness 90 dB in the 10-300 MHz bandMaximum IF cable Return Loss 20 dB in the 10-300 MHz bandMaximum IF cable DC Resistance 1.5 ohmTable 1-7: Data Communication (Ethernet Ports)Item DescriptionStandard Compliance IEEE 802.3 CSMA/CDMaximum Packet Size 1550 Bytes (including 4 CRC bytes and 4 VLAN tag bytes)Speed Data Port 100/1000 Mbps, Full DuplexManagement Port 10/100 Mbps, Half/Full Duplex with Auto NegotiationTable 1-8: Configuration and ManagementItem DescriptionOut Of Band (OOB) Management  Telnet via Management portSNMP via Management portMonitor portIn Band (IB) Management via Data Port SNMP TelnetSNMP Agents SNMP ver 1 clientMIB II (RFC 1213), Private BreezeMAX MIBsAuthentication and Authorization RADIUSSoftware upgrade Using TFTP Configuration upload/download Using TFTP Table 1-6: AU-IDU to AU-ODU CommunicationItem Description
SpecificationsBreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 191.5.7 Standards Compliance, General1.5.8 EnvironmentalTable 1-9: Standards Compliance, GeneralType StandardEMC ETSI EN 301 489-1/4ETSI EN 300-385Safety EN 60950-1UL 60 950-1Environmental ETS 300 019:Part 2-1 T 1.2 & part 2-2 T 2.3 for indoor & outdoorPart 2-3 T 3.2 for indoorPart 2-4 T 4.1E for outdoorRadio ETSI EN 301 753 V.1.1.1ETSI EN 301 021 V.1.6.1FCC 04-135FCC 27.53Table 1-10: Environmental SpecificationsType Unit DetailsOperating temperature Outdoor units -40°C to 55°C Indoor equipment 0°C to 40°COperating humidity Outdoor units 5%-95% non condensing, Weather protectedIndoor equipment 5%-95% non condensing
20 System DescriptionChapter 1 - System Description1.5.9 ServicesTable 1-11: ServicesItem DescriptionMax number of Services per BST 4,095 (0ne or several services may be defined per subscriber, one or more subscribers can be supported per SU)Min number of data connections per Service 2 (1 uplink, 1 downlink)Max number of data connections per Service 8 (4 uplink, 4 downlink)Max number of data connections per SU 126Max number of data connections per AU 3999 - 3 x number of SUs (3 connections are reserved for each SU) Max number of SUs per AU 510Max number of AUs per BST 7Max number of MAC addresses in Bridging Table BST: 6,000 SU: 512 (Aging time is configurable. The default is 3 minutes for SU, 10 minutes for NPU)Max number of VLANs per Service 16Max number of VLANs per SU 16Max number of VLANs (VPL IDs) per BST1,024Max number of concurrent voice calls per Voice/L2 Service50Max number of concurrent voice calls per AU 300
SpecificationsBreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 211.5.10 Physical and Electrical 1.5.10.1 Mechanical Specifications, Base station Equipment* 1U=44.45 mm (1.75"), 1HP=5.08 mm (0.2")1.5.10.2 Electrical Specifications, Base station EquipmentTable 1-12: Mechanical Specifications, Base Station EquipmentUnit Dimensions (cm) Weight (kg) BST-SH 8U ETSI type shelf, 8U x 43.19 x 24 6.9 (excluding AVU)PIU 3U x 5HP x 16 0.35PSU 3U x 8HP x 16 0.7NPU 6U x 7HP x 16 0.7AU-IDU-4CH 6U x 7HP x 16AU-ODU-HP 31.5 x 16 x 16 5.5AVU 2U x 84HP x 16 1.7Power Feeder panel 1U ETSI type panel 0.14Power Feeder Module 15.7 x 14.6 x 3.17 0.6GPS Adapter 15.7 x 14.6 x 3.17 0.4Outdoor GPS Receiver Tubular enclosure, 15.5 D x 12.7 H 0.363Indoor GPS Receiver 1U x 30.8 x 21.3 1.4Table 1-13: Electrical Specifications, Base Station EquipmentUnit Details Power Source -40.5 to -60 VDCPIU 16W maximum (active PIU)PSU 200W maximum output powerEfficiency: 80% minimumNPU 72W maximum, 50W typical, including power required for GPS Adapter (1.2W maximum) and Outdoor GPS Receiver (6W maximum)AU-IDU 46W maximum, 39W typicalAU-ODU-HP 82W maximum, 75W typicalAVU 24W maximum, 23W typical
22 System DescriptionChapter 1 - System DescriptionODU Power Feeder Power Source: -40.5 to -60 VDCPower Dissipation: 2W per channelChassis with 3 AU-IDUs (excluding ODUs and Power Feeders)310W maximum (1 NPU, 3 AU-IDUs, 1+1 PIUs, 2+1 PSUs)Base station with 3 AU-IDUs, including 1 ODU per AU-IDU555W maximum (1 NPU, 3 AU-IDUs with 1 ODU per AU-IDU, 1+1 PIUs, 2+1 PSUs)Base station with 3 AU-IDUs, including 2 ODUs per AU-IDU800W maximum (1 NPU, 3 AU-IDUs with 2 ODUs per AU-IDU, 1+1 PIUs, 2+1 PSUs)Base station with 3 AU-IDUs, including 4 ODUs per AU-IDU1300W maximum (1 NPU, 3 AU-IDUs with 4 ODUs per AU-IDU, 1+1 PIUs, 2+1 PSUs, 2 Power Feeders)Chassis with 4 AU-IDUs (excluding ODUs and Power Feeders)366W maximum (1 NPU, 4 AU-IDUs, 1+1 PIUs, 2+1 PSUs)Base station with 4 AU-IDUs, including 1 ODU per AU-IDU690W maximum (1 NPU, 4 AU-IDUs with 1 ODU per AU-IDU, 1+1 PIUs, 2+1 PSUs)Base station with 4 AU-IDUs, including 2 ODUs per AU-IDU1025W maximum (1 NPU, 4 AU-IDUs with 2 ODUs per AU-IDU, 1+1 PIUs, 2+1 PSUs, 1 Power Feeder)Base station with 4 AU-IDUs, including 4 ODUs per AU-IDU1700W maximum (1 NPU, 4 AU-IDUs with 4 ODUs per AU-IDU, 1+1 PIUs, 2+1 PSUs, 3 Power Feeders)Full Chassis with 6 AU-IDUs (excluding ODUs and Power Feeders)480W maximum (1 NPU, 6 AU-IDUs, 1+1 PIUs, 3+1 PSUs)Full Base station with 6 AU-IDUs, including 1 ODU per AU-IDU975W maximum (1 NPU, 6 AU-IDUs with 1 ODU per AU-IDU, 1+1 PIUs, 3+1 PSUs)Full Base station with 6 AU-IDUs, including 2 ODUs per AU-IDU1480W maximum (1 NPU, 6 AU-IDUs with 2 ODUs per AU-IDU, 1+1 PIUs, 3+1 PSUs, 2 Power Feeders)Base station with 6 AU-IDUs, including 4 ODUs per AU-IDU2500W maximum (1 NPU, 6 AU-IDUs with 4 ODUs per AU-IDU, 1+1 PIUs, 3+1 PSUs, 5 Power Feeders)GPS Adapter 12 VDC from the NPU, 1.2W maximumIndoor GPS Receiver Power Source: -36 to -72 VDCPower Dissipation: 20W maximum, 12W typicalOutdoor GPS Receiver 12 VDC from the NPU via the GPS Adapter, 6W maximumTable 1-13: Electrical Specifications, Base Station EquipmentUnit Details
SpecificationsBreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 231.5.10.3 Connectors, Base station EquipmentTable 1-14: Connectors, Base Station EquipmentUnit Connector DescriptionPIU -48V 3 pin/40A D-Type male Amphenol P/N 717TWA3W3PHP2V4RRM6NPU DATA 100/1000Base-T (RJ-45) with 2 embedded LEDs.Cable connection to a PC: CrossedCable connection to a hub: StraightMGMT 10/100Base-T (RJ-45) with 2 embedded LEDs.Cable connection to a PC: CrossedCable connection to a hub: StraightGPS/SYNC IN 15-pin micro D-Type jackGPS/SYNC OUT 15-pin micro D-Type jackALRM IN 9-pin micro D-Type jackALRM OUT 9-pin micro D-Type jackMON 3-pin low profile jackAU-IDU ODU 1, ODU 2 2 x TNC jack, lightning protected AU-ODU, AU-ODU-HP IF TNC jack, lightning protectedANT N-Type jack, 50 ohm, lightning protectedODU Power Feeder ODU 1 -4 4 x TNC jack, lightning protectedIDU 1-4 4 x TNC jack, lightning protectedPower 3 pin/20A D-Type male, Amphenol P/N GPS Adapter BASE STATION INTERFACE15-pin D-Type jackIDU GPS CMD 9-pin D-Type jackIDU GPS 1PPS IN BNC jackODU GPS RJ-45 jack
24 System DescriptionChapter 1 - System Description1.5.10.4 Base Station 2.X GHz Antennas, Mechanical SpecificationsIndoor GPS Receiver POWER 4 pins power plugTIME OF DAY CHANNEL9-pin D-Type jackCOMMAND CHANNEL9-pin D-Type jack2.048MHz BNC jack1PPS BNC jackANTENNA TNC jackOutdoor GPS Receiver 12-pin round plugTable 1-15: Base Station 2.X GHz Antennas, Mechanical SpecificationsUnit Description Dimensions (cm) Weight (kg) BS ANT 60/2.X V Downtilt Mounting Kit: 2" to 4.5" pole Connector: N-Type female109.3 x 21.3 x 12.4 5 maximumBS ANT 90/2.X V Downtilt Mounting Kit: 2" to 4.5" pole Connector: N-Type female109.3 x 21.3 x 12.2 5 maximumBS ANT 120/2.X V Downtilt Mounting Kit: 2" to 4.5" pole Connector: N-Type female109.3 x 20.5 x 11.9 5 maximumBS ANT 60/2.X H Downtilt Mounting Kit: 2" to 4.5" pole Connector: N-Type female109.3 x 21.3 x 12.4 5 maximumBS ANT 90/2.X H Downtilt Mounting Kit: 2" to 4.5" pole Connector: N-Type female109.3 x 21.3 x 12.2 5 maximumBS ANT 120/2.X H Downtilt Mounting Kit: 2" to 4.5" pole Connector: N-Type female109.3 x 20.5 x 11.9 5 maximumBS ANT 60/2.X DP Downtilt Mounting kit: 4 to 12 cm pole Connector: 2 x N-Type female 100 x 12 x 5 2 maximumBS ANT 90/2.X DP Downtilt Mounting kit: 4 to 12 cm pole Connector: 2 x N-Type female 100 x 12 x 5 2 maximumBS ANT 120/2.X DP Downtilt Mounting kit: 4 to 12 cm pole Connector: 2 x N-Type female 100 x 17 x 9 5 maximumTable 1-14: Connectors, Base Station EquipmentUnit Connector Description
SpecificationsBreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 251.5.10.5 Base Station 3.5 GHz Antennas, Mechanical SpecificationsTable 1-16: Base Station 3.5 GHz Antennas, Mechanical SpecificationsUnit Description Dimensions (cm) Weight (kg) BS ANT 60V/3.3-3.8 Mounting kit: 2" to 4" pole Connector: N-Type female50 x 20 x 3 1.5BS ANT 90V/3.3-3.8 Mounting kit: 2" to 4" poleConnector: N-Type female53.6 x 36 x 3 2.3BS ANT 120/3.5V Mounting kit: 0.75" to 2" poleMechanical tilt: 0° to -30°.Connector: N-Type female 76.2 x 8.3 x 7.6 2.0BS ANT 60/3.5H Mounting kit: 2" to 4" pole Connector: N-Type female48 x 20 x 4 2BS ANT 90/3.5H Mounting kit: 2" to 4" poleConnector: N-Type female 60 x 25 x 5.5 2BS ANT 60/3.X DP Downtilt Mounting kit: 4 to 12 cm pole Connector: 2 x N-Type female 85.1 x 16 x 6.1 2 maximumBS ANT 90/3.X DP Downtilt Mounting kit: 4 to 12 cm pole Connector: 2 x N-Type female 85.1 x 16 x 6.1 2 maximumBS ANT 120/3.X DP Downtilt Mounting kit: 4 to 12 cm pole Connector: 2 x N-Type female 68.8 x 17 x 14.5 4 maximumOmni ANT 3.4-3.6 Mounting bracket: 30 to 53 mm pole. Connector: N-Type female 67.5 tubular, 2 diameter 0.3
2Chapter 2 - Installation GuidelinesIn This Chapter:“Installing the AU-ODU” on page 28“Installing the Base Station Equipment” on page 37“Installing the ODU Power Feeder” on page 54“Installing the GPS Adapter” on page 58NOTERefer to the BreezeMAX Base Station Installation Manual for more detailed instructions on installation of the Base Station and its components.
28 InstallationChapter 2 - Installation Guidelines2.1 Installing the AU-ODUThe following sections describe how to install the AU-ODU, including pole mounting the ODU and connecting the cables.2.1.1 AU-ODU Installation Requirements2.1.1.1 AU-ODU Packing ListODU: Any of the following:Pole mounting kit2.1.1.2 Additional Installation RequirementsThe following items are also required to install the ODU:IF cable with two TNC connectors* (see Section 2.1.3 for details on IF cable types and length).Antenna* and RF cable* for connecting the antenna to the AU-ODU.Grounding cable with an appropriate termination.Installation tools and materials, including appropriate means (e.g. a 1" to 4" pole) for installing the AU-ODU and antenna. An “H” kit for installation of up to 4 ODUs and 4 antennas that serve a single sector is optionally available*.Table 2-1: AU-ODU TypesItem DescriptionBMAX-BST-AU-ODU-HP-2.3 High Power AU-ODU operating in the 2.3 GHz band (2300-2360 MHz)BMAX-BST-AU-ODU-HP-2.3-WCS High Power AU-ODU operating in the 2.3 GHz band, complying with WCS limitations (2305-2315, 2350-2360 MHz)BMAX-BST-AU-ODU-HP-2.5-A1 High Power AU-ODU operating in the 2.5 GHz A1 band (2496-2602 MHz)BMAX-BST-AU-ODU-HP-2.5-A2 High Power AU-ODU operating in the 2.5 GHz A2 band (2590-2690 MHz)
Installing the AU-ODUBreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 292.1.2 Guidelines for Positioning the AU-ODUThis section provides key guidelines for selecting the optimal installation locations for the AU-ODU and its antenna.Select the optimal locations for the equipment using the following guidelines:The ODU can be either pole or wall mounted. Its location should enable easy access to the unit for installation and testing.The higher the placement of the antenna, the better the achievable link quality. The antenna should be installed so as to provide coverage to all Subscriber Units within its service area.The ODU should be installed as close as possible to the antenna.NOTEItems marked with an asterisk (*) are available from Alvarion.CAUTIONONLY experienced installation professionals who are familiar with local building and safety codes and, wherever applicable, are licensed by the appropriate government regulatory authorities should install outdoor units and antennas.Failure to do so may void the BreezeMAX product warranty and may expose the end user or Service Provider to legal and financial liabilities. Alvarion and its resellers or distributors are not liable for injury, damage or regulation violations associated with the installation of Outdoor Units or antennas.NOTEThe recommended minimum distance between any two antennas in neighboring sectors is 0.5 meters.The minimum distance between any two antenna in the same sector (space diversity configuration) is 1.3 meters.NOTEAn “H” kit for installation of up to 4 ODUs and 4 antennas that serve a single sector is optionally available from Alvarion. Refer to the detailed Base Station Installation Manual for information on installing the “H” accessory.
30 InstallationChapter 2 - Installation Guidelines2.1.3 IF CablesThe AU-ODU is connected to the Micro Base Station (or to the ODU Power Feeder) via an IF cable carrying both signals and power. The maximum permitted attenuation of the IF cable at applicable frequencies, its screening effectiveness and its maximum permitted DC resistance (the sum of the DC resistance of the inner and outer conductors) are provided in the following table.To comply with the required screening effectiveness requirement, it is recommended to use double shielded cables. The following table provides details on maximum length for some popular cables.2.1.4 Pole Mounting the ODUThe ODU can be mounted on a 1" to 4" pole using one of the following options:Special clamps and threaded rods are supplied with each unit. There are two pairs of threaded holes on the back of the unit, enabling to use the clamps for mounting the unit on diverse pole diameters.Table 2-2: IF Cables RequirementsItem DescriptionScreening Effectiveness 90 dB minimum in the 10-300 MHz band.IF cable Impedance 50 ohmMaximum IF cable Attenuation 10 dB @ 240 MHz7.5 dB @ 140 MHz8 dB @ 64 MHzMaximum IF cable DC Resistance 1.5 ohmMaximum IF cable Return Loss 20 dB in the 10-300 MHz bandTable 2-3: Maximum IF Cable Length (Double Shielded Cables)Cable Maximum Length for AU-ODU-HPLMR-195 30 metersLMR-240 60 metersLMR-400 150 meters
Installing the AU-ODUBreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 31The protrusions with grooves on the top backsides of the unit, and the protrusion on the bottom backside, enable the use of 9/16" wide metal bands (not included with the package) to secure the unit to a pole. NOTEInstall the unit with the bottom panel, which includes the LEDs, facing downward.
32 InstallationChapter 2 - Installation Guidelines2.1.4.1 Pole Mounting the AU-ODU-HP Using ClampsFigure 2-1 illustrates the method of mounting a High Power AU-ODU-HP on a pole, using the clamps and threaded rods.Figure 2-1: AU-ODU-HP Pole Installation Using Special ClampsNOTEThere is a groove on one end of the threaded rod. Insert the threaded rods with the grooves pointing outward, as these grooves enable you to use a screwdriver to fasten the rods to the unit.I
Installing the AU-ODUBreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 332.1.4.2 Pole Mounting the AU-ODU-HP Using Metal BandsFigure 2-2 illustrates the method of mounting a High Power AU-ODU-HP on a pole, using metal bands.Figure 2-2: AU-ODU-HP Pole Installation Using Metal Band
34 InstallationChapter 2 - Installation Guidelines2.1.5 AU-ODUFigure 2-3: Bottom Panel of the AU-ODUCAUTIONDo not open the impermeability test screw - you may impair the sealing of the unit against moisture and humidity.Table 2-4: AU-ODU LEDsName Description FunctionalityPWR Power indication  Off - Power failureGreen - Power to ODU is OK, internal 3.3 VDC power supply is OK.ALARM IDU-ODU communication and synthesizer status indication Off - IDU-ODU communication is OK, synthesizer is locked.Green - IDU-ODU communication failure or synthesizer is not lockedETH Not UsedTable 2-5: AU-ODU ConnectorsName Connector FunctionalityIF TNC jack Connection to the AU-IDU/Micro Base Station/ODU Power Feeder
Installing the AU-ODUBreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 352.1.6 Connecting the Cables2.1.6.1 Connecting the Grounding CableThe Grounding screw (marked ) is located on the bottom panel of the outdoor unit.1Connect one end of a grounding cable to the grounding screw and tighten the grounding screw firmly. 2Connect the other end of the grounding cable to a good ground (earth) connection.2.1.6.2 Connecting the Antenna Cable1Connect one end of the coaxial RF cable to the RF connector (marked ) located on the bottom panel of the unit. 2Connect the other end of the RF cable to the antenna.3The RF connectors should be properly sealed to protect against rain and moisture.2.1.6.3 Connecting the IF Cable1Connect one end of the coaxial IF cable to the IF connector on the bottom panel of the unit.ANT N-Type jack, 50 ohm Connection to an external antenna (GND) Grounding screw Connection to ground (earth) To connect the grounding cable: To connect the RF cable: To connect the IF cable:Table 2-5: AU-ODU ConnectorsName Connector Functionality
36 InstallationChapter 2 - Installation Guidelines2Verify that the length of the IF cable is sufficient to reach the AU-IDU/Power Feeder. See IF cable length limitation in Section 2.1.3.3The IF cable connector should be properly sealed to protect against rain and moisture.4Route the cable to the location selected for the indoor equipment.
Installing the Base Station EquipmentBreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 372.2 Installing the Base Station Equipment2.2.1 BST Installation Requirements2.2.1.1 Packing ListBase Station Chassis:BMAX-BST-SH Base Station ChassisBMAX-BST-AVU Air Ventilation Unit (installed)Cables Tray kit2.5 meter DC cableBMAX-BST-PIU (1 or 2 per chassis) Power Interface Unit(s)2.5 meter DC cable (for a redundant PIU. One cable is supplied with each chassis)BMAX-BST-PSU (up to 4 per chassis) Power Supply Unit(s)BMAX-BST-NPU Network Processing Unit and Monitor cableBMAX-BST-AU-IDU-4CH (up to 6 per chassis) Access Unit Indoor Unit(s)2.2.1.2 Additional Installation RequirementsThe following items are also required to install the BST:Ethernet cable (straight) for connecting the NPU to a Hub/Switch. A grounding cable with appropriate terminations for connecting the chassis to the rack or another ground (earth) connection.For installation in a 21" ETSI rack: Two 21" ETSI rack adaptersNOTEThe maximum length of the Ethernet cable is 100m when operating at 100 Mbps and 70m when operating at 1 Gbps.
38 InstallationChapter 2 - Installation GuidelinesA portable PC for configuring parameters using the Monitor cable (supplied with the NPU)Other installation tools and materials2.2.2 BMAX-BST-SH Chassis Slot AssignmentsThe Base Station chassis comprises 6 3U high slots and 9 6U high slots, as shown in Figure 2-4.The Cable Tray (the installation kit is supplied with the chassis) should be installed on the top of the chassis front to enable convenient routing of cables connecting to power source(s), outdoor unit(s) and other equipment.To enable power source and/or Power Interface Unit 1+1 redundancy, two PIU modules can be installed in the designated slots. If a single PIU module is used, it can be inserted into either one of the two available slots.The number of installed PSU modules depends on the specific configuration (number of AUs) and NPU redundancy scheme (refer to Table 2-8). If less than 4 PSU modules are used, they can be installed in any of the designated slots.The NPU should be installed in slot number 5 (slot numbers are marked on the Cable Guide). Slot 6 is reserved for a future redundant NPU.Slots 1-4 and 7-9 can hold up to six AU-IDU modules. Unused slots should remain covered until required.Figure 2-4: BMAX-BST-SH Chassis Slot AssignmentsAir Ventillation UnitCable Tray
Installing the Base Station EquipmentBreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 392.2.3 Power RequirementsUse the following table to calculate worst-case power source requirements for the Base Station equipment (see also some examples in Table 1-13):2.2.4 HOT SWAP SupportThe NPU, AU-IDU and new PIU modules includes a blue HOT SWAP LED and a micro-switch in the injector/ejector handle to support hot-swap control. After releasing the ejector's button, the HOT SWAP LED should turn on, indicating that power to/from the back-panel is disconnected and the module can be removed safely. For more details refer to Section 2.2.9.2.2.5 Power Interface Unit (PIU)The single Euro PIU module is the interface between the Base Station site's DC power source and the Base Station Chassis Power Supply Units and external ODUs, which receive power via the IDUs. The PIU filters and stabilizes the Base Station input power and protects the system from power problems such as over voltage, surge pulses, reverse polarity connection and short circuits. It also filters high frequency interference (radiated emissions) and low frequency interference (conducted emissions) to the external Table 2-6: Power Requirements, Base Station EquipmentUnit Details Power Source -40.5 to -60 VDCPIU 16W maximum (active PIU)PSU 200W max output powerEfficiency: 80% minimumNPU 72W maximum, including power required for GPS Adapter (1.2W maximum) and Outdoor GPS Receiver (6W maximum)AU-IDU-4CH 46W maximumAU-ODU-HP 82W maximum (from PIU or Power Feeder)AVU 24W maximumPower Feeder 2W per ChannelNOTEThe PSU(s) do not supply power to the AU-ODUs. Up to 6 AU-ODUs can be powered directly from the power source via the PIU and the back plane. Additional AU-ODUs are powered from ODU Power Feeders.
40 InstallationChapter 2 - Installation Guidelinespower source. Each Base Station chassis contains two slots for an optional 1+1 PIU redundancy. One PIU is sufficient to support a fully populated chassis. Two PIU modules provide redundant power feeding (two input sources) while avoiding current flow between the two input sources.Figure 2-5: PIU Module Front PanelNOTEThe HOT SWAP blue LED does not exist in first generation PIUs. CAUTIONIn a first generation PIU (without HOT SWAP LED), disconnect power from the PIU module before inserting/ejecting it to/from the chassis. Before disconnecting the power cable from the PIU, the power source must be disconnected to avoid irreversible damage due to a potential excessively high transient current.In a second generation PIU (with HOT SWAP LED), disconnect power from the PIU module only after it is taken out from the chassis (or after the HOT SWAP LED is turned on). Connect power to the PIU only after it is fully inserted into the chassis.
Installing the Base Station EquipmentBreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 412.2.5.1 Preparing a Power CableA 2.5m DC power cable is supplied with each chassis. Additional DC cables can be ordered from Alvarion. If necessary, use the following instruction to prepare a DC cable.1Use a cable capable of supporting a current of at least 40A. Use a cable with 2 x 8AWG (or thicker) wires for the power plus an additional 8AWG to 20AWG ground wire.2The matching power connector to be used is Amphenol D-type power P/N 177TWA/3W3/SP3Y with high power socket contacts P/N 17DM53744-1.3Connect the cable to the power connector as follows:Pin 1 (RTN): Red (8 AWG min wire)Pin 2 (-48V): Black (8 AWG min wire)Pin 3 ( ): Ground (shield) (8AWG-20AWG wire)4Attach suitable terminal rings to the side that connects to the power source.Table 2-7: PIU LEDsPWR and MASTER LEDs PIU StatusPWR MASTEROff Off Chassis is not connected to powerRed Off Power is not connected or power input is out of range or PIU card is damaged. Chassis is powered by the redundant PIURed Green Power input is out of range or PIU card is damaged. Chassis is powered by the PIUGreen Off Power to PIU is OK. PIU is in redundant mode and the chassis is powered from the other PIUGreen Green Power to PIU is OK. The chassis is powered from the PIU.HOT SWAP Off: Power from the module to the chassis is not disconnected, the PIU is not ready for removalBlue: Power from the module to the chassis can be disconnected and the PIU can be safely removedFor instructions on using the HOT SWAP handles refer to Section 2.2.9.To prepare the power cable:
42 InstallationChapter 2 - Installation Guidelines2.2.6 Power Supply Unit (PSU)The single Euro PSU module is a 48 VDC power supply unit. Each Base Station chassis can contain up to four PSU modules providing N+1 redundancy configurations. The following table displays the number of PSU modules (excluding redundant units) required for various Base Station configurations:Table 2-8: PSU Requirements, Configurations with one NPU (excluding PSU redundancy)Number of AU-IDUs Minimum Required Number of PSUs1 - 2 13 - 4 25 -6 3NOTEThe PSU(s) do not supply power to the AU-ODUs. The regular AU-ODUs are powered directly from the power source via the PIU and the back plane. The High Power AU-ODU-HPs are powered from an ODU Power Feeder.
Installing the Base Station EquipmentBreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 43Figure 2-6: PSU Module Front PanelTable 2-9: PSU LEDsLED Status DescriptionPWR ALRMOff Off No power or fatal damageOff Red Power input is out of range or PSU is damaged or PSU is inhibited by NPUGreen Off Power is OK and PSU operates properly
44 InstallationChapter 2 - Installation Guidelines2.2.7 Access Unit Indoor Module (AU-IDU)The double Euro Access Unit IDU module contains the wireless IEEE 802.16a MAC and modem and is responsible for the wireless network connection establishment and for bandwidth management. Each AU-IDU includes four PHY channels that can connect to AU-ODUs.Figure 2-7: AU-IDU Module Front Panel
Installing the Base Station EquipmentBreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 45Table 2-10: AU-IDU LEDsName Description FunctionalityPWR Power indication Off - AU-IDU is not poweredRed - AU-IDU power supply failed (low power)Green - AU-IDU power is OK ALRM Alarm indication Off - AU-IDU is OKRed - AU-IDU failure WLINK Wireless link status indication Off - No SU is associatedGreen - At least one SU is associatedWACT IDU transmission indication Off - No IDU transmissionGreen - IDU transmission OKSP Spare Not UsedIP IP activity indication Off - No downlink (AU to SU) IP activityGreen (blinking) - Downlink (AU to SU) IP activityODU1 - ODU4 PWR IDU to ODU Power Indication Off - No IDU to ODU power outputRed - IDU to ODU power output failedGreen - IDU to ODU power output OKODU1 -ODU4 ALRM IDU to ODU communication statusOff - IDU-ODU communication OKRed - IDU-ODU communication failureHOT SWAP IDU readiness for hot swap removalOff: Power to the module is not disconnected, the AU-IDU is not ready for removalBlue: Power to the module can be disconnected and the AU-IDU can be safely removedFor instructions on using the HOT SWAP handles refer to Section 2.2.9.
46 InstallationChapter 2 - Installation Guidelines2.2.8 Network Processing Unit (NPU)The NPU module serves as the central processing unit that manages the base station's components and the SUs served by it. It also aggregates the traffic from the AU modules and transfers it to the IP backbone through a dedicated Gigabit/Fast Ethernet interface.Figure 2-8: NPU Module Front Panel
Installing the Base Station EquipmentBreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 47Table 2-11: NPU ConnectorsName Connector FunctionalityDATA 100/1000Base-T (RJ-45) with 2 embedded LEDs. Connection to the backbone. Cable connection to a hub/switch/router: StraightMGMT 10/100Base-T (RJ-45) with 2 embedded LEDs. Connection to OOB management. Cable connection to a PC: CrossedCable connection to a hub/switch/router: StraightGPS/SYNC IN 15-pin micro D-Type jack Connection to a GPS Adapter (or, in the future, to another NPU) that supplies synchronization signals. GPS/SYNC OUT 15-pin micro D-Type jack Not used currently. Supply of synchronization signals to another unit ALRM-IN 9-pin micro D-Type jack Not used currently. Connections to external alarm indicators (3 alarm inputs, NC or NO)ALRM-OUT 9-pin micro D-Type jack Not used currently. Connections for activation of external devices (4 dry contact pairs)MON 3-pin low profile jack Access for debugging and configuration using the Monitor programTable 2-12: NPU LEDsName Description FunctionalityPWR Power indication Off - NPU is not powered Red - NPU power failureGreen - NPU power is OKALRM NPU Alarm indication Off - NPU is OKRed - NPU failureBST ALRM Base Station chassis alarm indicationOff - All Base Station modules are OKRed - Failure in one (or more) Base Station modules EXT ALRM External alarm indication Off - No alarmsRed - Alarm received via the ALRM IN connector (not applicable in current release)MASTER Master/Slave operation indication Off - Secondary NPU (backup). Not supported in current release. Green - Primary NPU
48 InstallationChapter 2 - Installation Guidelines2.2.9 Using the Hot Swap Injector/Ejector HandlesThe Base Station modules include special handles for high-force insertion/extraction of modules. Each of the 6U high modules (NPU, AU-IDU) includes two such handles, whereas each of the 3U high-modules (PIU, PSU) includes a single handle at the bottom of the front panel. The bottom injector/ejector handle of the NPU and AU-IDU modules includes a micro-switch to support hot-swap control. Second generation PIU modules also support hot-swap, as indicated by the HOT SWAP blue LED.2.2.9.1 Inserting Modules1Firmly push in the module into its intended slot (slot 5 for the NPU, slot 1-4, 7-9 for AU-IDU).2Press the handles up (the upper handle if available)/down (the lower handle) simultaneously until you hear the locking click and the red buttons are released. The blue HOT SWAP LED will briefly turn on (only in AU and NPU), indicating that the module is being powered up.3Secure the module in place by closing the screws at the top and bottom of the front panel.GPS/SYNC GPS/IF clock synchronization functionality indication Off - GPS/IF clock synchronization is disabledGreen - GPS/IF clock is synchronization enabledHOT SWAP NPU readiness for hot-swap removalOff: Power to the module is not disconnected, the NPU is not ready for removalBlue: Power to the module can be disconnected and the NPU can be safely removedFor instructions on using the HOT SWAP handles refer to Section 2.2.9.To insert a module with hot-swap support (NPU, AU-IDU, PIU):CAUTIONIn a PIU with HOT SWAP LED, connect power to the PIU only after it is fully inserted into the chassis.Table 2-12: NPU LEDsName Description Functionality
Installing the Base Station EquipmentBreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 491Firmly push in the module into its intended slot.2Press the handle down until you hear the locking click and the red button is released.3Secure the module in place by closing the screw at the top of the front panel.2.2.9.2 Ejecting Modules1Release the screws at the top and the bottom of the front panel.2Press the handles' red button until the handles are unlocked.3Wait until the blue HOT SWAP LED turns on, indicationg that the module has been disconnected and can be removed. 4Press the handles down (the upper handle)/up (the lower handle) until the module is unlocked, firmly hold the handles and take the module out of the chassis. NOTEIf a module is fully inserted without properly locking the handles, it will become operational. However, in this state the hot-swap mechanism is not supported. A warning message (trap) will be sent.To insert a PSU or a PIU without HOT SWAP support:CAUTIONIn a PIU without HOT SWAP LED, disconnect power from the PIU module before inserting it to the chassis. To eject a module with hot-swap support (NPU, AU-IDU, new PIU):CAUTIONIn a PIU with HOT SWAP LED, disconnect power from the PIU module only after it is taken out from the chassis (or after the HOT SWAP LED is turned on). To eject a PSU or a PIU without HOT SWAP support:
50 InstallationChapter 2 - Installation Guidelines1Release the screw at the top of the front panel.2Press the handle's red button until the handle is unlocked.3Press the handle up until the module is unlocked, firmly hold the handle and take the module out of the chassis.2.2.10 Installing the Base Station Chassis and ModulesThe indoor equipment should be installed as close as possible to the location where the IF cable(s) enters the building. The location of the indoor equipment should take into account its connection to the power source(s) and to the base station networking equipment.1 Attach the Cable Guide to the top panel of the chassis using the screws and washers supplied with the Cable Guide.2Install the chassis in a 19" cabinet. For installation in a 21" cabinet, attach suitable ETSI rack adapters to the chassis. To provide a sufficient space for the Cable Guide and to allow air flow for preventing over-heating, leave a free space of at least 1U between the upper covers of the chassis and other units in the cabinet.3Connect one end of a grounding cable to the ground terminal located on the rear panel of the chassis and firmly tighten the grounding screw. Connect the opposite end of the grounding cable to a ground connection or to the cabinet, if applicable.4Carefully insert the modules into the relevant slots. Secure the modules in their intended locations (refer to Section 2.2.9.1 for instructions on modules' insertion). 5Place blank covers over all of the unused slots.6Connect the DATA port of the NPU to the backbone data equipment (use a straight Ethernet cable to connect to a hub/switch/router). The maximum CAUTIONIn a PIU without HOT SWAP LED, disconnect power from the PIU module before ejecting it from the chassis. Before disconnecting the power cable from the PIU, the power source must be disconnected to avoid irreversible damage due to a potential excessively high transient current.To install the Base Station chassis and modules:
Installing the Base Station EquipmentBreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 51length of the Ethernet cable is 100m when operating at 100 Mbps and 70m when operating at 1 Gbps.7If the MGMT port will be used for remote management, connect it to the appropriate data equipment (use a straight Ethernet cable to connect to a hub/switch/router). The maximum length of the Ethernet cable is 100m.8Connect the DC power cable to the power jack of the PIU module. If a redundant PIU is installed, connect a DC power cable also to the second PIU module. Connect the power cord(s) to the 48 VDC power source(s), as follows. Connect the black wire to the 48 VDC contact of the power source. Connect the red wire to the + (Return) contact. Connect the ground wire to the ground.9For AU-ODUs that connect directly to AU-IDUs: Connect the IF cable(s) (already connected at the other end to the AU-ODU(s)) to the proper channels (ODU 1 to ODU 4 connectors) of the applicable AU-IDU module(s). If only a single AU-ODU per AU-IDU is used, connect the IF cable(s) to the appropriate ODU-1 connector(s). To avoid transmissions at undesired frequencies, verify that the frequency and bandwidth parameters are properly configured before connecting the IF cables.For AU-ODU that are powered by a Power Feeder: Refer to Section 2.3.3.CAUTIONA maximum of six AU-ODU-HP units can be powered directly from the Base Station (via the ODU connectors of AU-IDUs). Additional AU-ODU-HP units shauld be powered by ODU Power Feeder(s).
52 InstallationChapter 2 - Installation Guidelines2.2.11 Air Ventilation Unit (AVU)The 2U high, 84 HP wide AVU includes a 1U high integral chamber for inlet airflow and a 1U high fan tray with an internal alarm module. To support a high availability Base Station, the fan tray includes 10 brush-less fans, where 9 fans are sufficient for cooling a fully loaded chassis. To further support high availability, the chassis can operate with the hot-swappable fan tray extracted from it for a period of time sufficient for replacing it (up to 10 minutes).If the red ALRM LED is on while the PWR LED is green, it indicates a failure of at least one fan. Although the Base Station chassis may continue operating with one failed fan, it is recommended to replace the AVU as soon as possible.Release the 4 screws securing the AVU to the chassis.Using the handle take out the faulty chassis.Insert a new AVU drawer and close the screws. The replacement should be completed in less than 10 minutes.Figure 2-9: AVU Drawer Front PanelTable 2-13: AVU LEDsLED Status DescriptionPWR ALRMOff Off No 5V power inputRed Red 12V power failedGreen Red One or more fans have failedGreen Off AVU operates properlyTo replace an AVU drawer:
Installing the Base Station EquipmentBreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 532.2.11.1 Replacing an NPUTo minimize downtime and facilitate fast and easy NPU replacement, it is recommended to maintain an updated copy of the NPU configuration. Refer to Section 4.5.2.6 for details on preparing and uploading a backup file of the NPU configuration.1Release the screws at the top and the bottom of the NPU's front panel.2Press the handles' red button until the handles are unlocked.3Wait until the blue HOT SWAP LED turns on, indicating that the module has been disconnected and can be removed. 4Press the handles down (the upper handle)/up (the lower handle) until the module is unlocked. Firmly hold the handles and take the module out of the chassis.5Disconnect all IF cables connecting the AU-IDUs to the AU-ODUs. This is necessary as the initial configuration of the new NPU is most probably inappropriate.6Firmly push the new NPU module into its intended slot (slot 5).7Press the handles up (the upper handle)/down (the lower handle) simultaneously until you hear the locking click and the red buttons are released. The blue HOT SWAP LED will briefly turn on, indicating that the module is being powered up.8Secure the module in place by closing the screws at the top and bottom of the front panel.9Download the backup file using a DOS based TFTP. Use the command: tftp i <NPU port IP address> put <file name>. The default IP address of the MGMT port is 10.0.0.1.10 Use the monitor program to configure the IP parameters (IP address, Subnet Mask, Default Gateway Address) of the MGMT port. These parameters are not affected by the loaded file.11 Reset the system.12 Reconnect the IF cables.
54 InstallationChapter 2 - Installation Guidelines2.3 Installing the ODU Power Feeder 2.3.1 Installation Requirements2.3.1.1 Packing ListA 19” panel (can hold up to three ODU Power Feeder modules).ODU Power Feeder module, including a DC power cable, four 0.5 meter IF cables and four screws.2.3.1.2 Additional Installation RequirementsA grounding cable with appropriate terminations for connecting the unit's ground terminal to the rack or to a ground connection.For installation in a 21" ETSI rack: two 21" ETSI rack adaptersOther installation tools and materials
Installing the ODU Power FeederBreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 552.3.2 The ODU Power FeederThe ODU Power Feeder is used to provide power (-48 VDC) to AU-ODU-HP High Power ODUs. It transfers transparently all signals between the AU-IDU and the ODU, while injecting DC power received from an external source. Each ODU Power Feeder unit can serve up to four High Power ODUs. Up to three ODU Power Feeder units can be installed in a 1U high Power Feeder panel.Figure 2-10: ODU Power Feeder Front Panel Figure 2-11: ODU Power Feeder Rear Panel Table 2-14: ODU Power Feeder ConnectorsName Connector FunctionalityIDU 1 - 4 4 x TNC jacks Connection to ODU connectors of AU-IDUs/Micro Base StationODU 1 - 4 4 x TNC jacks Connections to IF connectors of AU-ODU-HP units-48V 3-pin D-Type power jack Connection to DC power source(GND) Grounding Screw Connection to ground (earth)
56 InstallationChapter 2 - Installation Guidelines2.3.2.1 Preparing a Power CableA 2.5m DC power cable is supplied with each ODU Power Feeder module. Additional DC cables can be ordered from Alvarion. If necessary, use the following instruction to prepare a DC cable.1Use a cable capable of supporting a current of at least 10A. Use a cable with 2 x 10AWG (or thicker) wires for the power plus an additional 10AWG to 20AWG ground wire.2The matching power connector to be used is Amphenol D-type power P/N 177TWA/3W3/SP3Y with high power socket contacts P/N 17DM53744-1.3Connect the cable to the power connector as follows:Pin 1 (RTN): Red (10 AWG min wire)Pin 2 (-48V): Black (10 AWG min wire)Pin 3 ( ): Ground (shield) (10AWG-20AWG wire)4Attach suitable terminal rings to the side that connects to the power source.2.3.3 Installing the ODU Power FeederThe ODU Power Feeder should be installed as close as possible to the location where the IF cable(s) enters the building. The location of the ODU Power Feeder should take into account its connection to the power source and to the Base Station equipment.Table 2-15: ODU Power Feeder LEDsName Description FunctionalityPWR Input power indication Off - ODU Power Feeder is not poweredGreen - ODU Power Feeder power is OKODU PWR 1 - 4 Output power indications Off - AU-ODU-HP is not connectedRed - Power output problem (short or overload)Green - AU-ODU-HP is connected and poweredTo prepare the power cable:
Installing the ODU Power FeederBreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 571The panel is supplied with blank covers. Release the nuts on the rear side of the panels to remove the blank cover(s) you want to replace with ODU Power Feeder module(s). Attach the ODU Power Feeder module(s) to the panel using the four screws supplied with each module.2Place the panel with the ODU Power Feeder module(s) on a shelf/desk or install it in a 19" cabinet, next to the Base Station equipment. For installation in a 21" cabinet, attach suitable ETSI rack adapters to the chassis.3Connect one end of a grounding cable to the grounding screw located on the rear panel of each ODU Power Feeder module and firmly tighten the grounding screw. Connect the opposite end of the grounding cable(s) to a ground (earth) connection or to the cabinet, if applicable.4Connect the IDU connector(s) to the appropriate ODU connector(s) of the AU-IDU(s) using the short (0.5 meter) IF cables supplied with the module.5Connect the power cord to the ODU Power Feeder’s DC socket, located on the rear panel. Connect the other end of the power cord to the -48 VDC power source.6Connect the IF cable(s), that should already be connected at the other end to the AU-ODU-HP(s), to the appropriate ODU connector(s). To avoid transmissions at undesired frequencies, verify that the frequency and bandwidth parameters are properly configured before connecting the IF cables.To install the ODU Power Feeder:
58 InstallationChapter 2 - Installation Guidelines2.4 Installing the GPS Adapter 2.4.1 Installation Requirements2.4.1.1 Packing ListA 19” panel (can hold also ODU Power Feeder modules).GPS Adapter module, including a 2m NPU to GPS Adapter cable and four screws.2.4.1.2 Additional Installation RequirementsA grounding cable with appropriate terminations for connecting the unit's ground terminal to the rack or to a ground connection.For installation in a 21" ETSI rack: two 21" ETSI rack adaptersOther installation tools and materials
Installing the GPS AdapterBreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 592.4.2 The GPS AdapterThe GPS Adapter connects the different GPS units to the NPU, adapting the different interfaces. Future versions may include an internal GPS module that will allow an all-in-one low-cost solution. A future optional addition of OCXO in the GPS Adapter box may provide an improved hold over solution when the GPS is not synchronized. The GPS Adapter is powered by 12 VDC supplied by the NPU. The GPS Adapter is installed in a 1U high panel (the same panel that is used for the ODU Power Feeders).Figure 2-12: GPS Adapter Front Panel Figure 2-13: GPS Adapter Rear Panel Table 2-16: GPS Adapter ConnectorsName Connector FunctionalityBASE STATION INTERFACE15 pin D-Type jack 1PPS and 16MHz synchronization signals (LVDS interface) to the NPUPower (12 VDC) from the NPUSerial control signals (RS-442 interface) from the NPUCMD 9 pin D-Type jack Serial control signals (RS-232 interface) to the Indoor GPS Receiver.1PPS IN BNC jack 1PPS signal (TTL levels) from Indoor GPS Receiver
60 InstallationChapter 2 - Installation Guidelines2.4.3 Installing the GPS Adapter1The GPS Adapter is installed on the 1U high panel that can be used also for installation of ODU Power Feeder modules. The panel is supplied with blank ODU GPS RJ-45 jack 1PPS (RS-442 interface) from Outdoor GPS ReceiverSerial control signals (RS-422 interface) to Outdoor GPS ReceiverPower (12 VDC) to Outdoor GPS Receiver(GND) Grounding Screw Connection to ground (earth)Table 2-17: GPS Adapter LEDsName Description FunctionalityPWR Input power indication Off - Power input failure Green - 12 VDC power supply from NPU is OK1PPS 1PPS signal indication Blinking Green - 1PPS signal from GPS Receiver is detectedRed - 1PPS signal is not detectedActive GPS - ODU ODU GPS selection indication Green - indicates that the selected GPS Receiver: is ODU (Outdoor)Off - ODU GPS Receiver is not selectedActive GPS - IDU IDU GPS selection indication Green - indicates that the selected GPS Receiver: is IDU (Indoor)Off - IDU GPS Receiver is not selectedActive GPS - INT INT GPS selection indication Green - indicates that the selected GPS Receiver: is INT (Internal). Internal is not supported in current release.Off - INT GPS Receiver is not selectedINT CLOCK Internal clock source indication Green - Internal 16MHz clock is ok (not supported in current release)Red - Internal clock is not available or clock failureTo install the GPS Adapter:Table 2-16: GPS Adapter ConnectorsName Connector Functionality
Installing the GPS AdapterBreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 61covers. Release the nuts on the rear side of the panel to remove the blank cover you want to replace with the GPS Adapter. Attach the GPS Adapter module to the panel using the four screws supplied with it.2Place the panel with the GPS Adapter (and optionally ODU Power Feeders) on a shelf/desk or install it in a 19" cabinet, next to the Base Station equipment. The distance from the Base Station equipment should allow connection of the 2 meters NPU to GPS Adapter cable. For installation in a 21" cabinet, attach suitable ETSI rack adapters to the panel.3Connect one end of a grounding cable to the grounding screw located on the rear panel of the GPS Adapter and firmly tighten the grounding screw. Connect the opposite end of the grounding cable to a ground (earth) connection or to the cabinet, if applicable.4Connect the NPU to GPS Adapter cable to the BASE STATION INTERFACE connector on the front panel of the GPS Adapter. Connect the other end of the cable to the GPS/SYNC IN connector of the NPU.5Select the GPS Receiver to be used using the GPS SELECT miniature DIP switches:To use Outdoor GPS Receiver, move the ODU (left-most) switch to the ON (up) position. Make sure that the two other switches are in the OFF (down) position.To use Indoor GPS Receiver, move the IDU (middle) switch to the ON (up) position. Make sure that the two other switches are in the OFF (down) position.The INT (Internal) GPS Receiver option is not available in current release.6Connect the applicable cable(s) to the selected GPS Receiver.NOTERefer to the documentation supplied with the GPS Receiver for instructions on how to install and connect it.
3Chapter 3 - CommissioningIn This Chapter:“Configuring Basic Parameters of Base Station” on page 64“Operation Verification” on page 70
64 CommissioningChapter 3 - Commissioning3.1 Configuring Basic Parameters of Base Station3.1.1 NPU Parameters Required for ManagementAfter completing the installation process, as described in the preceding chapter, some basic NPU parameters must be configured using the Monitor application via the MON port of the NPU. These parameters are necessary to enable remote management using SNMP or Telnet.If the NPU is in the default factory configuration, or if the IP parameters of either the Data or Management port are known, you may configure the parameters using Telnet. You may also use BreezeLITE, provided you know the IP parameters of one port and the Authorized Managers list in the NPU is either empty (default) or includes the IP address of the BreezeLITE station.Refer to Chapter 4 for information on how to access the Monitor application either via the MON port or via Telnet and how to use it.Refer to the BreezeLITE User Manual for information on how to use it. The basic parameters are listed in Table 3-1. Refer to Chapter 4 for detailed information on the applicable parameters.NOTEThe default Installer password is "installer".Table 3-1: Basic NPU ParametersManagement Option ParametersMGMT port Management Port IP addressManagement Port Subnet MaskManagement Port GatewayManagement Port Destination SubnetManagement Port Destination Subnet MaskManagement Port Management Traffic Enable/Disable
Configuring Basic Parameters of Base StationBreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 65The following are the guidelines for configuring the basic NPU parameters:All parameters of both ports should be configured. Otherwise, default values shall be used.If OOB management via a router connected to the Management port is used, the parameters should be configured to ensure different subnets for the Data port, the Management port (local OOB management) and the Management Port Destination. The Management Port Destination Subnet is the subnet behind a router connected to the Management port.Authorized Manager(s) must be configured properly to enable remote management using AlvariSTAR (or another SNMP based application).DATA port Data Port IP address Data Port Subnet MaskData Port GatewayData Port Management VLAN IDData Port Management Traffic Enable/DisableData Port Speed Authorized Managers (per manager)IP AddressSend TrapsRead CommunityWrite CommunityNOTEIt is highly recommended to use the Management port for local management only. Typically the port should be down (disconnected).CAUTIONDo not configure the IP Address of the Management port to 0.0.0.0, as this will cause loss of management connectivity via the Data port.Table 3-1: Basic NPU ParametersManagement Option Parameters
66 CommissioningChapter 3 - CommissioningAfter the basic NPU parameters have been configured, the Base Station can be managed remotely using either Telnet or SNMP-based management.To enable proper operation of the Base Station and all its components, the following parameters must also be configured:3.1.2 Base Station Configuration ParametersOperator IDCell IDDuplex Mode (must be TDD)DL-UL RatioExternal 1PPS Clock (must be enabled to support 1PPS from GPS)External 16MHz Clock (in this release must be disabled)3.1.3 RADIUS Parameters3.1.3.1 RADIUS General ParametersShared Secret3.1.3.2 RADIUS Authentication At least one Authentication server must be defined to enable RADIUS-based provisioning of services.IP AddressNOTEIf no Authorized Manager is defined in the device, it can be managed using SNMP by any station. If at least one Authorized Manager is defined, the device can be managed only by a station whose parameters match a defined Authorized Manager.NOTEThe following list includes only parameters that are mandatory for proper operation of the Base Station. Configuration of other parameters may be done either at the same time or later.
Configuring Basic Parameters of Base StationBreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 67UDP Port3.1.3.3 RADIUS Accounting At least one Accounting server must be defined to enable RADIUS-based provisioning of services.IP AddressUDP Port3.1.4 Chain parametersChain NumberGPS Protocol3.1.5 Radio ClusterRadio Cluster ID: Verify that all required Radio Cluster IDs are defined3.1.6 ODUDefine the necessary ODUs. For each ODU, configure the following:ODU IDAssociated Radio ClusterConfigured ODU Frequency BandTx PowerAdmin Status: Enable when completing the configuration process3.1.7 AU3.1.7.1 SW Files in NPU - Default SW File (Advanced Si)NameAction
68 CommissioningChapter 3 - CommissioningThe following must be configured for each AU:3.1.7.2 Unit Control - SW Versions Control3.1.7.2.1 SW FileNameAction3.1.7.2.2 SU SW FileNameAction3.1.7.3 MAC ParametersSector IDMaximum Cell Radius (km)3.1.7.4 Phy ParametersBandwidth3.1.7.5 Multi Channel ParametersDiversity ModeThe following parameters must be configured for each channel used if Diversity Mode is No Diversity. Otherwise, only Channel 1 needs to be configured:Associated ODUDownlink (Tx) Frequency (MHz)Admin Status: Enable when completing the configuration process3.1.7.6 Multirate ParametersUplink Basic Rate
Configuring Basic Parameters of Base StationBreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 69Downlink Basic Rate3.1.8 SU3.1.8.1 SW Files in NPU - Default SW File (Advanced Si)NameAction
70 CommissioningChapter 3 - Commissioning3.2 Operation VerificationThe following sections describe how to verify the correct functioning of the Outdoor Units, Indoor Units, Ethernet connection and data connectivity.3.2.1 AU-ODU LEDsTo verify the correct operation of the AU-ODU, examine the LED indicators located on the bottom panel of the outdoor unit. The following tables list the provided LEDs and their associated indications.3.2.2 Base Station LEDsTo verify the correct operation of the Base Station equipment, examine the LED indicators located on the front panels of the modules. The following tables list the LEDs of the Base Station modules and their associated indications.NOTEVerifying the correct operation of the Outdoor Unit using the LEDs, as described below, is only possible after the configuration of basic parameters has been completed.Table 3-2: AU-ODU-LEDsName Description FunctionalityPWR Power indication  Off - Power failureGreen - Power to ODU is OK, internal 3.3 VDC power supply is OK.ALARM IDU-ODU communication and synthesizer status indication Off - IDU-ODU communication is OK, synthesizer is locked.Green - IDU-ODU communication failure or synthesizer is not lockedETH Not Used
Operation VerificationBreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 71Table 3-3: AU-IDU LEDsName Description FunctionalityPWR Power indication Off - AU-IDU is not powered Red - AU-IDU power supply failed (low power)Green - AU-IDU power is OK ALARM Alarm indication Off - AU-IDU is OKRed - AU-IDU failure WLINK Wireless link status indication Off - No SU is associatedGreen - At least one SU is associatedWACT IDU transmission indication Off - No IDU transmissionGreen - IDU transmission OKSP Spare Not UsedIP IP activity indication Off - No downlink (AU to SU) IP activityGreen (blinking) - Downlink (AU to SU) IP activityODU1 - ODU4 PWR IDU to ODU Power Indication Off - No IDU to ODU power outputRed - IDU to ODU power output failedGreen - IDU to ODU power output OKODU1 - ODU4 ALRM IDU-ODU communication statusOff - IDU-ODU communication OKRed - IDU-ODU communication failureHOT SWAP IDU readiness for hot swap removalOff: Power to the module is not disconnected, the AU-IDU is not ready for removalBlue: Power to the module can be disconnected and the AU-IDU can be safely removedFor instructions on using the HOT SWAP handles refer to Section 2.2.9.
72 CommissioningChapter 3 - CommissioningTable 3-4: NPU LEDsName Description FunctionalityPWR Power indication Off - NPU is not powered Red - NPU power failureGreen - NPU power is okALRM NPU Alarm indication Off - NPU is OKRed - NPU failureBST ALRM Base Station chassis alarm indicationOff - All Base Station modules are OKRed - Failure in one (or more) Base Station modules EXT ALRM External alarm indication Off - No alarm received via the AL IN connectorRed - Alarm received via the AL IN connector MASTER Master/Slave (primary/secondary) operation indicationOff - Secondary NPU (backup) Green - Primary NPUGPS/SYNC GPS/IF clock synchronization functionality indicationOff - GPS/IF clock synchronization is disabledGreen - GPS/IF clock synchronization is enabledHOT SWAP NPU readiness for hot-swap removalOff: Power to the module is not disconnected, the NPU is not ready for removalBlue: Power to the module can be disconnected and the NPU can be safely removedFor instructions on using the HOT SWAP handles refer to Section 2.2.9.
Operation VerificationBreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 73Table 3-5: PIU LEDsLED Status DescriptionPWR MASTEROff Off Chassis is not connected to powerRed Off Power is not connected or power input is out of range or PIU card is damaged. Chassis is powered by the redundant PIURed Green Power input is out of range or PIU card damaged. Chassis is powered by the PIUGreen Off Power to PIU is OK. PIU is in redundant mode and the chassis is powered from the other PIUGreen Green Power to PIU is OK. The chassis is powered from the PIUHOT SWAP Off: Power from the module to the chassis is not disconnected, the PIU is not ready for removalBlue: Power from the module to the chassis can be disconnected and the PIU can be safely removedFor instructions on using the HOT SWAP handles refer to Section 2.2.9.Table 3-6: PSU LEDsLED Status DescriptionPWR ALRMOff Off No power or fatal damageOff Red Power input is out of range or PSU is damaged or PSU is inhibited by NPUGreen Off Power is OK and PSU operates properly.Table 3-7: AVU LEDsLED Status DescriptionPWR ALRMOff Off No 5V power inputRed Red 12V power failedGreen Red One or more fans have failedGreen Off AVU operates properly
74 CommissioningChapter 3 - Commissioning3.2.3 ODU Power Feeder LEDsTo verify the correct operation of the ODU Power Feeder, examine the LED indicators located on the front panel of the unit. The following table lists the LEDs of the ODU Power Feeder and their associated indications.3.2.4 GPS Adapter LEDsTo verify the correct operation of the GPS Adapter, examine the LED indicators located on the front panel of the unit. The following table lists the LEDs of the GPS Adapter and their associated indications.Table 3-8: ODU Power Feeder LEDsName Description FunctionalityPWR Input power indication Off - ODU Power Feeder is not poweredGreen - ODU Power Feeder power is OKODU PWR 1 - 4 Output power indications Off - AU-ODU-HP is not connectedRed - Power output problem (short or overload)Green - AU-ODU-HP is connected and poweredTable 3-9: GPS Adapter LEDsName Description FunctionalityPWR Input power indication Off - Power input failure Green - 12 VDC power supply from NPU is OK1PPS 1PPS signal indication Blinking Green - 1PPS signal from GPS Receiver is detectedRed - 11PPS signal is not detectedActive GPS - ODU ODU GPS selection indication Green - indicates that the selected GPS Receiver: is ODU (Outdoor)Off - ODU GPS Receiver is not selectedActive GPS - IDU IDU GPS selection indication Green - indicates that the selected GPS Receiver: is IDU (Indoor)Off - IDU GPS Receiver is not selected
Operation VerificationBreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 753.2.5 Verifying the Ethernet ConnectionAfter connecting the unit to an Ethernet outlet, verify that the Ethernet Integrity Indicator, which is the yellow LED embedded in the DATA port connector, is on. This indicates that the unit is connected to an Ethernet segment. The Ethernet Activity Indicator, which is the green embedded LED, should blink whenever the unit receives or transmits traffic on the DATA port.Active GPS - INT INT GPS selection indication Green - indicates that the selected GPS Receiver: is INT (Internal). Internal is not supported in current release.Off - INT GPS Receiver is not selectedINT CLOCK Internal clock source indication Green - Internal 16MHz clock is ok (not supported in current release)Red - Internal clock is not available or clock failureTable 3-9: GPS Adapter LEDsName Description Functionality
4Chapter 4 - Operation and AdministrationIn This Chapter:“BreezeMAX System Management” on page 78“The Monitor Program” on page 80“The NPU's Main Menu” on page 84“Base Station Menu” on page 86“NPU Menu” on page 107“Radio Cluster Menu” on page 124“ODU Menu” on page 127“AU Menu” on page 132“SU Menu” on page 150“Services Menu” on page 173“NPU Parameters Summary” on page 216
78 OperationChapter 4 - Operation and Administration4.1 BreezeMAX System ManagementAll BreezeMAX system components associated with a Base Station are managed via the Base Station's NPU module. The other system components (AUs and SUs) are not accessed directly: each configuration change or status enquiry is sent to the NPU that communicates with other system components.The following management options are available:SNMP based management using AlvariSTAR (or another network management system customized to support management of BreezeMAX).Using Telnet to access the embedded Monitor application.Accessing the embedded Monitor application locally via the MON port.Two management access methods are available to support management using SNMP and/or Telnet:Out-Of-Band (OOB) management via the dedicated MGMT port.In-Band (IB) management via the DATA port.Typically, BreezeMAX systems will be managed using AlvariSTAR or another SNMP based network management system.NOTEThe SU can also be managed directly from its Ethernet port using the Installer Monitor program or the built-in Web Server. These options are available to support the installation process and enable special tests and performance monitoring at the SU's site.NOTEIt is not possible to manage the Base Station via the wireless link (from the SU’s side).NOTETo enable remote management of devices behind the SU, including Voice and Networking Gateways, IP connecctivity with the managed device is needed. This is possible only via the Data port.
BreezeMAX System ManagementBreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 79This chapter describes how to manage the system using the Monitor application. For information on managing the system using AlvariSTAR refer to the Applicable AlvariSTAR documentation.NOTETo enable remote management (using SNMP and/or Telnet), the parameters of the applicable port (MGMT and/or DATA) must first be configured via the MON port. For details on the applicable parameters refer to Section 4.5.3.1 (Management Port) and Section 4.5.3.2 (Data Port).
80 OperationChapter 4 - Operation and Administration4.2 The Monitor Program4.2.1 Accessing the Monitor Program1Use the Monitor cable to connect the MON connector of the NPU to the COM port of your ASCII ANSI terminal or PC. The COM port connector on the Monitor cable is a 9 pin D type plug.2Run a terminal emulation program, such as HyperTerminal™.3Set the communication parameters as shown in the following table:4The password prompt is displayed. Enter the password and press the Enter key to get to the Main menu.To access the Monitor program via the MON connector:Table 4-1: COM Port ConfigurationParameter ValueBaud Rate 9600Data Bits 8Stop Bits 1Parity NoneFlow Control Xon/XoffPort Connected COM portNOTEThere are 3 access levels, as described in Section 4.2.2. The default password for each of the access levels is: Access Level Default PasswordAdministrator adminInstaller installerMonitor monitor
The Monitor ProgramBreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 811The PC used for accessing the Monitor program should be configured according to the parameters configured for the applicable port (MGMT or DATA port). 2If you connect directly to the MGMT or DATA port, use a crossed Ethernet cable.3Run the Telnet program connecting to the IP address of the connected port. 4The Enter the password message is displayed. Enter the password and press the Enter key to get to the Main menu.4.2.2 Using the Monitor ProgramThis section describes the Monitor program structure and navigation rules.There are three access levels to the Monitor program. The available actions depend on the access level (password) used for accessing the program:Administrator: Read/Write permissions for all parameters. The default password is admin.Installer: Read-only permission for the Services menu, Read/Write permissions for all other options excluding the Change Password option. The default password is installer.Monitor: Read-only permissions for all parameters. The default password is monitor.To access the Monitor program using Telnet:NOTEFollowing three unsuccessful login attempts (using incorrect passwords), the monitor program is blocked for 10 minutes.If you forgot the Installer or Monitor password, the Administrator can login (with the Administrator password) and define a new password for Installer and/or Monitor access level.If you forgot the Administrator password, type "help" to receive a challenge string consisting of 24 characters. Contact Alvarion's Customer Service and provide the challenge string (after user identification) to receive a temporary password. You can use this password only once to enter the program. The password must be changed during the session to a different "permanent" password. The administrator should be notified of this new password. Five consecutive errors in entering the temporary password will invalidate it. In this case, repeat this procedure to receive a new challenge string for a new temporary password.
82 OperationChapter 4 - Operation and AdministrationEach menu or submenu specifies the unit type (BreezeMAX/NPU), the IP address of the port used for accessing the Monitor program (when using the MON port, there is no IP address), the running SW version and a description of the menu.Each menu or submenu displays a list of numbered options. To access an option, enter the number of the required option at the > prompt and press the Enter key.At any point in the program, you can use the Esc key to return to the previous menu (one level up) without applying any change.The first selectable item in most menus is the Show option, enabling to view the current configuration of the applicable parameters. For some menus some additional status information is displayed.For certain parameters, an updated value is applied only after reset or after entering a specific command. In these parameters, the configured value may differ from the actual value. If the configured value differs from the actual value both values will be displayed, where the first one is the configured value and the second is the actual value. For example: "Bandwidth (MHz): 1.75, 3.5" means that the configured bandwidth, to be applied after the next reset, is 1.75 MHz, and the current actual bandwidth is 3.5 MHz.For certain parameters the actual values may not be available (such as when pre-configuring an AU that is not yet installed). For these parameters a value of NA (Not Available) will be displayed.The Update/Add options will display all applicable parameters line by line, allowing to conveniently edit all of them. The current value is displayed for each parameter. To keep the current value - press Enter. To change it - enter a new value and press Enter.Press the Tab key for context sensitive help text (where applicable).If an erroneous value was entered - the reason of the error or help text will be displayed, and the parameter entry text will be displayed again.Many menus include a Select By option, enabling to get a sub-menu for a selected entity according to the selection criteria.If the Monitor program is not used for 10 minutes, the session will be automatically terminated.
The Monitor ProgramBreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 83Select the Exit option in the Main menu to exit the program and terminate the session.
84 OperationChapter 4 - Operation and Administration4.3 The NPU's Main MenuThe Main menu of the NPU Monitor program includes the following options:1 - Base Station2 - NPU3 - Radio Cluster4 - ODU5 - AU6 - SU7 - ServicesX - Exit4.3.1 Base Station Menu The Base Station menu enables to view general base station status information, to configure general base station parameters, and to view active alarms or traps log. For details refer to Section 4.4. 4.3.2 NPU Menu The NPU menu enables configuring the NPU's DATA and MGMT ports, defining authorized managers, managing the NPU's SW versions and viewing current status and configurations. For details refer to Section 4.5.4.3.3 Radio Cluster MenuThe Radio Cluster menu enables viewing the details of existing Radio Clusters, defining new Radio Clusters, updating the parameters of an existing Radio Cluster and deleting a Radio Cluster from the database.For details refer to Section 4.6.4.3.4 ODU Menu The ODU menu enables viewing the status and configuration details of existing ODUs, configuring the parameters of new ODUs including pre-configuration of ODUs that are not yet installed, updating the parameters of existing ODUs and deleting ODUs from the database.For details refer to Section 4.7.
The NPU's Main MenuBreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 854.3.5 AU MenuThe AU menu enables configuring the parameters of selected AUs, including pre-configuration of AUs that are not yet installed. It also enables managing AUs SW versions and viewing current status, configurations and performance information. For details refer to Section 4.8.4.3.6 SU MenuThe SU menu enables viewing summary information of all relevant SUs, configuring the parameters of a selected SU and defining new SUs. It also enables managing a selected SU's SW versions and viewing its current status, configuration and performance information.For details refer to Section 4.9.4.3.7 Services MenuThe Service menu enables viewing, updating and adding service profiles and subscribers, and allocating services to subscribers. It also enables viewing and updating filtering rules and the MAC Address Deny List.For details refer to Section 4.10.4.3.8 ExitSelect the Exit option (X) to exit the Monitor program and terminate the Telnet session.
86 OperationChapter 4 - Operation and Administration4.4 Base Station MenuThe Base Station menu includes the following options:ShowConfigurationAlarms and TrapsRADIUSLicensesChainGPS Info4.4.1 ShowSelect this option to view the current value/selected option of configurable parameters. Refer to Section 4.4.2 for more details on these parameters. In addition, some general status information is displayed, as follows:Configurable Parameters:Device NameDevice LocationATPC StatusOptimal Uplink RSSI (dBm)Operator IDCell IDStatus Information:Slots status, displaying for each slot (1-9) the following:¾Installed module type (or "Not Installed" for an empty slot)
Base Station MenuBreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 87¾Operational status (OK/Fault) of an installed moduleOperational status (OK/Fault) of the AVU modulePIU slots status, displaying for each PIU slot:¾Mode: Master, Redundant or Not Installed¾Operational status (OK/Fault) of an installed modulePSU slots table, displaying the status of each slot: Not installed, OK or Fault.Licenses StatusCPEs License Bank statusBase Station License StatusFor details refer to Section 4.4.5. 4.4.2 ConfigurationSelect this option to view or configure the general Base Station parameters:4.4.2.1 Device NameThe Device Name parameter provides identification information for the Base Station equipment.The device name consists of up to 255 printable characters.The default Device Name is a null string (empty).Figure 4-1: Base Station Chassis Slot Assignment
88 OperationChapter 4 - Operation and Administration4.4.2.2 Device LocationThe Device Location parameter provides location information for the Base Station equipment.The location name consists of up to 255 printable characters.The default Device Location is a null string (empty).4.4.2.3 ATPC ParametersBreezeMAX employs an Automatic Transmit Power Control (ATPC) algorithm to dynamically adapt the transmit power of each SU so that it is received by the AU-ODU at an optimal level. The algorithm is managed by the AU and optimal values are calculated separately for each SU based on the actual level at which it is received by the AU-ODU. MAP messages transmitted to the SUs include information on the estimated up/down power level change required to achieve optimal transmit power level.The ATPC menu enables viewing/updating the following parameters for all AUs:4.4.2.3.1 ATPC Enable/DisableThe ATPC Enable/Disable parameter controls whether the ATPC algorithm will be used to determine current optimal transmit level for each SU served by the Base Station.The default is Enable.4.4.2.3.2 Optimal Uplink RSSIThe Optimal Uplink RSSI sets the target level at which all transmissions should be received by the AU-ODUs for optimal performance. The range is -103 to -60 (dBm).The default is -69 dBm.4.4.2.4 Cell ParametersThe Cell parameters provide a unique identifier for the Base Station, and they are common to all AUs in the Base Station. Updated Cell parameters are applied for each AU after resetting the AU (or after resetting the NPU, which causes reset of all AUs). The Cell menu enables viewing/updating the following parameters:NOTEThe ATPC algorithm should always be enabled. The option to disable it is available to support certain tests. After each reset, the Base Station boots with the ATPC enabled, disregarding its status before the device was reset.
Base Station MenuBreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 894.4.2.4.1 Operator IDA unique identifier of the network. The same Operator ID must be defined for all Base Stations/Micro Base Stations in the network, and it should not be used by any Base Station/Micro Base Station belonging to another network in the same area.The Operator ID consists of 3 groups of up to three digits each, where the range for each group is 0 to 255.The default Operator ID is 186.190.0.Changes in the value configured for the Operator ID are applied only after reset.4.4.2.4.2 Cell IDA unique identifier of Base Station. The same Cell ID should not be used by any other Base Station/Micro Base Station belonging to the network.The Cell ID consists of 2 groups of up to three digits each, where the range for each group is 0 to 255.The default Cell ID is 0.250.Changes in the value configured for the Cell ID are applied only after reset.4.4.2.5 DuplexThe Duplex parameters define the operation mode of the system. These parameters are applied after reset. The Duplex menu enables viewing/updating the following parameters:4.4.2.5.1 Duplex ModeThe operation mode of the system: TDD or FDD.The default is TDD. In the current release only TDD mode is supported, and the Duplex Mode should not be changed.A change in the configured Duplex Mode is applied only after reset. NOTEIn systems that support only a single mode of operation, any attempt to change the Duplex Mode to a mode that is not supported will be rejected. If there is a mismatch between the configured value and the mode supported by the AUs, a suitable error message and trap will be sent and the system will not become operational until proper configuration is completed.
90 OperationChapter 4 - Operation and Administration4.4.2.5.2 DL-UL RatioApplicable only when the Duplex Mode is set to TDD. Defines the ratio of transmit (Down Link) time to receive (Up Link) time, in percents.The available values are:1: 65-352: 60-403: 55-454: 50-505: 45-556: 40-607: 35-65The default is 65-35 (%).A change in the configured DL-UL Ratio is applied only after reset. 4.4.2.6 ClockThe Clock parameters define the source for the main clocks in the system. These parameters are applied after reset. The Clocks menu enables viewing/updating the following parameters:4.4.2.6.1 External 1PPS ClockThe 1PPS (Pulse Per Second) clock is used to determine the air-frame start time. Assuming that all systems use the same air-frame size and DL/UL Ratio, then, when the 1PPS clock is received from a GPS system, this mechanism ensures inter-site and intra-site synchronization among all sectors, preventing cross interference and saturation problems. When using the internal 1PPS clock (derived from the selected 16 MHz clock source), only intra-site synchronization among sectors can be achieved.The available options are Enable (use external 1PPS clock source) and Disable (use internal 1PPS clock source derived from the selected 16 MHz clock).The default is Enable.CAUTIONThe DL-UL Ratio of all Base Stations in the same coverage area (neighboring cells) must be set to the same value to ensure optimal performance and avoid uplink saturation.
Base Station MenuBreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 914.4.2.6.2 External 16 MHz ClockThe 16 MHz clock source is used for generation of all main clocking signals in the system, including the internal 1PPS clock. Using an external, accurate 16 MHz clock source will enable better hold-over of the 1PPS clock upon temporary loss (or reduced reliability when receiving less than 4 satellites) of the external 1PPS clock. This will allow a longer time of continued operation before appearance of interferences due to clock drifts among Base Stations.The available options are Enable (use external 16 MHz clock source) and Disable (use internal 16 MHz clock source).The default is Disable In the current release, external 16 MHz clock from the GPS Adapter is not available.4.4.3 Alarms and TrapsThe Alarms and Traps menu enables viewing the active alarms or the traps log, filtering the displayed traps and enabling/disabling traps. The available options are:Show Active AlarmsTraps Display FilterShow Traps LogTrap Configuration4.4.3.1 Show Active AlarmsSelect to view the currently active alarms. For more details on active alarms refer to the Traps and Alarms document.4.4.3.2 Traps Display FilterSelect to view/update the filtering criteria for the Traps Log display. The configurable filtering criteria are:4.4.3.2.1 Minimum SeverityThe Minimum Severity parameter enables defining the minimum severity filter. Traps whose severity is below the defined severity will not be displayed. The options are Critical, Major, Minor, Warning and Info.
92 OperationChapter 4 - Operation and AdministrationThe default is Info severity, which means that all the traps in the log will be displayed.4.4.3.2.2 DaysThe Days parameter enables defining the period for which traps will be displayed. The available options are from 1 to 31 days. Only traps that occurred within the last N days, where N is the value selected for this parameter, will be displayed.The default is 31 days.4.4.3.3 Show Traps LogSelect to view the traps log. The traps will be displayed based on the filtering criteria defined by the Minimum Severity and Days parameters in the Traps Display Filtering option, up to a maximum of the last 1000 traps. For more details refer to the Traps and Alarms document.4.4.3.4 Trap ConfigurationThe Trap Configuration menu enables viewing current parameters of all traps and updating the parameters of a selected trap. It also enables viewing traps with modified parameters (different from the default) and restoring the configuration of all modified traps to their default values.The available options are:Show Trap StatusAdmin StatusSeveritySuppression Interval4.4.3.4.1 Show Traps StatusSelect this option to view a list of all traps and their parameters. For each trap, the following details are displayed:Trap IDNameAdmin Status (the default Admin Status for all traps is Enabled)
Base Station MenuBreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 93Default Severity Current SeveritySuppression Interval (in seconds. The default Suppression Interval is 0, which means no suppression).4.4.3.4.2 Admin StatusThe Admin Status menu enables viewing a list of all traps with Admin Status Disabled, updating the Admin Status of a selected trap and restoring the Admin Status of all traps to the default Enabled status. The Admin Status menu includes the following options:Show Disabled Traps List: Displays all traps with Admin Status Disabled (the default Admin Status for all traps is Enabled).Update: Enables modifying the Admin Status of a selected trap.Restore Defaults: Enables restoring the Admin Status of all traps to Enable. 4.4.3.4.3 SeverityThe Severity menu enables viewing a list of all traps with Severity that differs from the default severity, updating the Severity of a selected trap and restoring the Severities of all traps to the default severities. The Severity menu includes the following options:Show Traps with Modified Severity: Displays all traps with Severity that differs from the default severity.Update: Enables modifying the Severity of a selected trap.Restore Defaults: Enables restoring the Severities of all traps to the default severities.4.4.3.4.4 Suppression IntervalThe Suppression Interval is the minimum time between consecutive transmissions of the same trap. This parameter can be used to prevent excessive retransmissions of the same trap. The Suppression Interval menu enables viewing a list of all traps with Suppression Interval that differs from the default suppression interval, updating the Suppression Interval of a selected trap and
94 OperationChapter 4 - Operation and Administrationrestoring the Suppression Intervals of all traps to the default value of 0 (no suppression). The Severity menu includes the following options:Show Traps with Modified Suppression Interval: Displays all traps with Suppression Interval that differs from the default suppression interval, which is 0 (no suppression).Update: Enables modifying the Suppression Interval of a selected trap. The available range is from 0 to 86,400 (seconds). 0 means no suppression.Restore Defaults: Enables restoring the Suppression Intervals of all traps to the default value (0).4.4.4 RADIUSManaging a large number of users creates the need for significant administrative support together with careful attention to security, authorization and accounting. The use of RADIUS (Remote Authentication Dial In User Service) enables operators to manage a single database of users, supporting authentication (verifying user name and password) as well as configuration information detailing the type of service to deliver to the user and the traffic that the user transmitted and received, for billing proposes.RADIUS is a protocol for carrying authentication, authorization, and configuration information between a Network Access Server (NAS), which desires to authenticate its links, and a shared Authentication server. A Network Access Server operates as a client of RADIUS. The client is responsible for passing user information to designated RADIUS server(s(, and then acting on the response. RADIUS servers are responsible for receiving user connection requests, authenticating the user, and then returning all configuration information necessary for the client to deliver service to the user. In BreezeMAX systems, a RADIUS NAS is implemented in each Base Station. Transactions between the client and RADIUS server are authenticated using Password Authentication Protocol (PAP) through encryption based on RSA Message Digest Algorithm MD5 and a Shared Secret, which is never sent over the network. The Access-Request is submitted to the RADIUS server via the network. If no response is returned within a length of time, the request is re-sent a number of times. Once the RADIUS server receives the request, it validates the sending client. A request from a client for which the RADIUS server does not have a shared
Base Station MenuBreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 95secret must be silently discarded. If the client is valid, the RADIUS server consults a database of users to find the user whose User Name matches the request. The user entry in the database contains the User Password that must be verified.A RADIUS server can be used for authentication purposes only, for accounting purposes only, or for both authentication and accounting purposes. Up to two servers of each type can be defined. Each server of each type (Authentication/accounting) can be defined as either Primary or Secondary. Only one server of each type can be defined as Primary. However, both servers of the same type can be defined as Secondary. If two servers of a certain type are defined, then upon first trial of an authentication/accounting transaction the NPU will attempt to communicate with the Primary server of the relevant type, or with the first Secondary server if no server is defined as Primary (provided the server’s Operation Status is Up). If it cannot communicate with this server, it will attempt communicating with the other server. Upon succeeding to communicate with a certain server, this server is defined as Active (and the other one as Standby). As long as the NPU succeeds to communicate with an Active Authentication/Accounting server, it will continue using it for authentication/accounting transactions. The RADIUS menu includes three sub-menus:General Parameters AuthenticationAccounting4.4.4.1 General ParametersThe General Parameters menu enables viewing and modifying parameters that affect the communication with all RADIUS servers. These parameters include:Shared SecretRetry Interval (sec)Maximum Number of RetriesKeep Alive Timeout (sec)
96 OperationChapter 4 - Operation and Administration4.4.4.1.1 Shared SecretShared Secret is the key used for encrypting the User name and Password transmitted to the RADIUS server(s). For security and control reasons, the Shared Secret option is available only for users with Administration access rights, using the Administrator Password to access the program. The Shared Secret cannot be changed using SNMP. For the same security reasons, the Shared Secret is displayed as a series of asterisks, and when defining it for the first time or updating it, the user is prompted to re-enter the new Shared Secret for confirmation.Valid Shared Secret: Up to 16 printable characters, case sensitive.The default Shared Secret is null (Shared Secret must be defined).4.4.4.1.2 Retry Interval (sec)The Retry Interval parameter defines the time in seconds to wait before retransmitting a RADIUS message if no response is received. The range is 1-5 (seconds).The default value is 5 (seconds).4.4.4.1.3 Maximum Number of RetriesThe Maximum Number of Retries parameter defines the maximum number of retransmission attempts, before a decision is taken to revert to another server if configured, or give up. The range is 0-5 (retries).The default value is 3 (retries).4.4.4.1.4 Keep Alive Timeout (sec)The NPU maintains a keep alive mechanism with all defined servers. The Keep Alive Timeout defines the time in seconds to wait before reaching a decision that a certain server is no longer available.The range is 60-180 (seconds).The default value is 60 (seconds).NOTEFor security reasons, the Shared Secret does not change after performing the Set Factory Defaults operation. For the same reason, the Shared Secret is not included in backup configuration files.
Base Station MenuBreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 974.4.4.2 AuthenticationThe Authentication menu enables viewing the status and parameters of defined Authentication servers, adding a new server (up to a maximum of two), or deleting a server from the database. The parameters of an existing server cannot be updated: to modify the parameters of a server, it must first be deleted and then defined again through the Add Server option.The Authentication menu includes the following options:Show AllAdd ServerSelect Server4.4.4.2.1 Show AllSelect this option to view the current status and parameters of all defined Authentication servers. For each defined Authentication server the following details are displayed:IP AddressUDP PortServer Status: Primary or SecondaryOperation Status: Up or Down (according to the keep alive mechanism)Activity Status: Active or Standby (indicates whether this is the server currently in use for authentication purposes) 4.4.4.2.2 Add ServerSelect this option to define a new Authentication server. Up to two Authentication servers can be defined. You will be prompted to configure the following parameters:4.4.4.2.2.1 IP AddressThe IP address of the Authentication server.The default is null (IP address must be defined)
98 OperationChapter 4 - Operation and Administration4.4.4.2.2.2 UDP PortSpecifies the UDP port number used by the RADIUS server for authentication transactions.Valid values: 1 to 65535. The default value is 1812 (RFC 2865 requirement).4.4.4.2.2.3 Server StatusDefines whether this server is Primary or Secondary. Each Authentication server can be defined as either Primary or Secondary. Only one Authentication server can be defined as Primary. However, both servers can be defined as Secondary. 4.4.4.2.3 Select ServerThis option enables selecting an existing Authentication for viewing its status and parameters, deleting it from the database or viewing its Statistics counters. The selection is based on the server's IP address.The available options are:Show: Displays current status and parameters. For information on displayed details refer to Section 4.4.4.2.1), Delete: To delete the server from the databaseStatistics: To display or reset the Statistics Counters for this server. The Statistics Counters display traffic information according to the standard RFC 2618 "RADIUS Authentication Client MIB”, as follows:Round Trip Time: The time interval (in hundredths of a second) between the most recent Access-Reply/Access-Challenge and the Access-Request that matched it from this server.Access Requests: The number of RADIUS Access-Request packets sent to this server. This does not include retransmissions.Access Retransmissions: The number of RADIUS Access-Request packets retransmitted to this server.Access Accepts: The number of RADIUS Access-Accept packets (valid or invalid) received from this server.Access Rejects: The number of RADIUS Access-Reject packets (valid or invalid) received from this server.
Base Station MenuBreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 99Access Challenges: The number of RADIUS Access-Challenge packets (valid or invalid) received from this server.Malformed Access Responses: The number of malformed RADIUS Access-Response (Access-Accept, Access-Challenge or Access-Reject) packets received from this server. Malformed packets include packets with an invalid length. Bad authenticators or Signature attributes or unknown types are not included.Bad Authenticators: The number of RADIUS Access-Response packets containing invalid authenticators or Signature attributes received from this server.Pending Requests: The number of RADIUS Access-Request packets destined for this server that have not yet timed out or received a response. This counter is incremented when an Access-Request is sent and decremented due to receipt of an Access-Accept, Access-Reject or Access-Challenge, a timeout or retransmission.Timeouts: The number of authentication timeouts to this server. After a timeout the client may retry to the same server, send to a different server, or give up. A retry to the same server is counted as a retransmit as well as a timeout. A send to a different server is counted as a Request as well as a timeout.Unknown Types: The number of RADIUS packets of unknown type which were received from this server on the authentication port.Packets Dropped: The number of RADIUS packets of which were received from this server on the authentication port and dropped for any reason.4.4.4.3 AccountingThe Accounting menu enables viewing the status and parameters of defined Accounting servers, adding a new server (up to a maximum of two), or deleting a server from the database. The parameters of an existing server cannot be updated: to modify the parameters of a server, it must first be deleted and then defined again through the Add Server option.The Accounting menu includes the following options:Show AllAdd ServerSelect Server
100 OperationChapter 4 - Operation and Administration4.4.4.3.1 Show AllSelect this option to view the current status and parameters of all defined Accounting servers. For each defined Accounting server the following details are displayed:IP AddressUDP PortServer Status: Primary or SecondaryOperation Status: Up or Down (according to the keep alive mechanism)Activity Status: Active or Standby (indicates whether this is the server currently in use for accounting purposes) 4.4.4.3.2 Add ServerSelect this option to define a new Accounting server. Up to two Accounting servers can be defined. You will be prompted to configure the following parameters:4.4.4.3.2.1 IP AddressThe IP address of the Accounting server.The default is null (IP address must be defined)4.4.4.3.2.2 UDP PortSpecifies the UDP port number used by the RADIUS server for accounting transactions.Valid values: 1 to 65535. The default value is 1813 (RFC 2866 requirement).4.4.4.3.2.3 Server StatusDefines whether this server is Primary or Secondary. Each Accounting server can be defined as either Primary or Secondary. Only one Accounting server can be defined as Primary. However, both servers can be defined as Secondary. 4.4.4.3.3 Select ServerThis option enables selecting an existing Accounting for viewing its status and parameters, deleting it from the database or viewing its Statistics counters. The selection is based on the server's IP address.The available options are:
Base Station MenuBreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 101Show: Displays current status and parameters. For information on displayed details refer to Section 4.4.4.3.1), Delete: To delete the server from the database.Statistics: To display or reset the Statistics Counters for this server. The Statistics Counters display traffic information according to the standard RFC 2620 "RADIUS Accounting Client MIB”, as follows:Round Trip Time: The time interval (in hundredths of a second) between the most recent Accounting-Response and the Accounting-Request that matched it from this server.Requests: The number of RADIUS Accounting-Request packets sent to this server. This does not include retransmissions.Retransmissions: The number of RADIUS Accounting-Request packets retransmitted to this server. Retransmissions include retries where the Identifier and Acct-Delay have been updated, as well as those in which they remain the same.Response: The number of RADIUS packets received on the accounting port from this server.Malformed Responses: The number of malformed RADIUS Accounting-Response packets received from this server. Malformed packets include packets with an invalid length. Bad authenticators or unknown types are not included.Bad Authenticators: The number of RADIUS Accounting-Response packets containing invalid authenticators received from this server.Pending Requests: The number of RADIUS Accounting-Request packets sent to this server that have not yet timed out or received a response. This counter is incremented when an Accounting-Request is sent and decremented due to receipt of an Accounting-Response, a timeout or retransmission.Timeouts: The number of accounting timeouts to this server. After a timeout the client may retry the same server, send to a different server, or give up. A retry to the same server is counted as a retransmit as well as a timeout. A send to a different server is counted as an Accounting- Request as well as a timeout.Unknown Types: The number of RADIUS packets of unknown type which were received from this server on the accounting port.
102 OperationChapter 4 - Operation and AdministrationPackets Dropped: The number of RADIUS packets of which were received from this server on the accounting port and dropped for any reason.4.4.5 LicensesThe License feature enables managing the license(s) granted to CPEs with limited capabilities (“L model” CPEs) as well as the general Base Station licenses. In an “L model” CPE, the overall throughput (the aggregate downlink and uplink MIR in all services allocated to subscribers behind the CPE) is limited to 2 Mbps. The Network Service Provider may purchase from Alvarion a bank of CPE unlimited bandwidth licenses, and allocate licenses to selected L model CPEs on a need basis (refer to Section 4.9.7.3.9 for details on assigning a license to a selected CPE). Rather than granting licenses only to specific L model CPEs, the Network Service Provider may also purchase a Base Station unlimited bandwidth license to override the bandwidth limitations of all L model CPEs served by the Base Station.The various licenses (CPEs Unlimited Bandwidth Licenses Bank, Base Station Unlimited Bandwidth License for all CPEs) are supplied as files to be loaded to the Base Station using TFTP. A license file can be loaded only to the Base Station specified in the applicable order.The Licenses menu enables viewing the current status of CPEs and Base Station Licenses. The available options are:Show CPEs License Bank StatusShow Base Station LicensesShow Temporary Grace LicensesShow Grace Licenses4.4.5.1 Show CPEs License Bank StatusSelect this option to view the current status of the CPEs Licenses Bank (if available). The displayed information includes:License ID: The relevant license type. In the current version only a BW (Band-Width) license type is available.License Value: The specific details of the relevant licenses. In the current version all BW licenses are Unlimited.
Base Station MenuBreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 103License Count: The number of currently available licenses (balance). Each time a license is granted to a specific CPE, the License Count is decremented by one.4.4.5.2 Show Base Station LicensesSelect this option to view the current Base Station Licenses (if applicable). The displayed information includes the License ID and License Value for each applicable license. Currently, the applicable license that may be available is Unlimited Bandwidth for all CPEs (License ID = BW, License Value = Unlimited).4.4.5.3 Show Temporary Grace Licenses and Show Grace LicensesThe aggregate uplink and downlink MIR in all the services allocated to an L model CPE should not exceed 2 Mbps. If the aggregate MIR in the services assigned to such a CPE exceeds this limit, the Network Service Provider has a 30 days grace period. During the grace period the assigned services are provided to the CPE. At any time during the 30 days grace period the Network Service Operator can load to the CPE the required permanent license for unlimited bandwidth. If a license was not loaded during this grace period, the following will happen:During the first 3 days, defined as a temporary grace period, the Network Service Provider may change the services assigned to the CPE so that the aggregate MIR is no longer above 2 Mbps. The CPE will be removed from the list of Temporary Grace Licenses and will return to its previous status.After expiry of the 3 days temporary grace period, the CPE is moved to the Grace Licenses list. After expiry of the full 30 days grace period, the CPE is moved to a list of “Grace Period Expired” CPEs (even if during the grace period the services assigned to them were changed so that the aggregate MIR is no longer above 2 Mbps). A CPE that was moved to the Grace Period Expired list will remain in this list for 3 months. A CPE that is included in this list cannot be cannot be granted another grace period. Any attempt to assign to it a service that will bring the aggregate MIR to a value above 2 Mbps will be rejected.The Show Temporary Grace Licenses option displays a table that includes the MAC addresses of CPEs that are currently included in the Temporary Grace License list. For each CPE the displayed list includes also the License ID (only BW license is applicable in the current version) and the expiry date of the temporary grace period.The Show Grace Licenses option displays a table that includes the MAC addresses of CPEs that are currently included in the Grace License list. For each CPE the
104 OperationChapter 4 - Operation and Administrationdisplayed list includes also the License ID (only BW license is applicable in the current version) and the expiry date of the temporary grace period.4.4.6 ChainFuture versions of BreezeMAX will enable chaining of co-located Base Stations to fully support intra-site synchronization. When two or more Base Stations are chained, all clocks and additional parameters required to ensure fully synchronized operation of all sectors are sent from the Master Base Station to other Base Stations. The Chain menu includes parameters that must be shared by all Base Stations belonging to the same chain, where most of them should be configured only in the Master Base Station (they will be read-only in other chained Base Stations). In the current release chaining is not supported yet and all Base Stations are configured as Master Base Stations. The Chain menu includes the following:4.4.6.1 Chain NumberIn future releases, when chaining will be fully supported, the Chain Number will be used as a unique identifier of a chain. All Base Stations belonging to the same chain should be configured with the same Chain Number. The Chain Number can be used by a central management system to guarantee that certain limitations are met: in each chain, one, and only one Base Station should be defined as Master. Only one Base Station can be defined as Redundant (backup to the Master).The range is from 1 to 1500.The default is 0, indicating that a Chain Number is not configured yet. A valid Chain Number must be configured, and this number must be unique in the system to properly support future implementation of chaining.4.4.6.2 GPS SupportedThis is a read-only parameter indicating whether the use of GPS is supported by the Base Station (through the Redundant CPLD in the NPU). The options are Supported or Not Supported.4.4.6.3 GPS ProtocolThe GPS Protocol defines the communication protocol with the GPS receiver. The available options are None, Trimble (for Outdoor GPS Receiver) and Symmetricom (for Indoor GPS Receiver).The default is Trimble.
Base Station MenuBreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 1054.4.6.4 Time Zone Offset From UTCThis is the offset of the local time from UTC (Coordinated Universal Time). The range is from -12:00 up to +13:00 in 30 minutes resolution. The format must be either -XX:YY or +XX:YY where YY is either 00 or 30.The default is +02:00.4.4.6.5 Stop Tx After Hold Over TimeoutUpon losing the 1PPS clock from the GPS, or if the received clock is not considered accurate enough because the number of received satellites dropped below the minimum (four satellites), the local 1PPS clock will be generated using the available 16 MHz clock. After a certain time (defined by the Hold Over Passed Timeout parameters described below), it is assumed that due to clock drifts there might be interferences among sectors belonging to the Base Sectors and sectors belonging to neighboring Base Stations). If the Stop Tx After Hold Over Timeout parameter is set to Enable, the Base Station will stop transmitting after this timeout, to prevent interferences to the sectors belonging to other Base Stations. If it is set to Disable, transmissions will continue indefinitely, at the expense of potential interferences to sectors belonging to other Base Stations.The default is Disable (Hold Over indefinitely).4.4.6.6 Hold Over Passed Timeout (Min)This parameter defines the Hold Over timeout, after which there might be interferences to other sectors. When the Stop Tx After Hold Over Timeout is enabled, transmissions will stop after this timeout. When the Stop Tx After Hold Over Timeout is disabled, this timeout is used to generate a trap indicating that there might be interferences to neighboring sectors.The range is from 0 to 2880 (minutes).The default is 30 (minutes).4.4.7 GPS InfoThe GPS Info menu displays read-only information received from the GPS receiver (when available). The displayed details include:Number Of Received Satellites: The number of satellites received by the GPS receiver. For proper operation at least four satellites should be received.Longitude: The longitude as calculated by the GPS receiver. The format is <xx Deg yy.yyy Min, A>, where xx is the longitude in degrees, yy.yyy is in
106 OperationChapter 4 - Operation and Administrationminutes (decimal format), and A is either N (North) or S (South). For example, 42 Deg 06.512 Min, N.Latitude: The latitude as calculated by the GPS receiver. The format is xx Deg yy.yyy Min, B, where xx is the latitude in degrees, yy.yyy is in minutes (decimal format), and B is either E (East) or W (West). For example, 024 Deg 25.290 Min, E.Altitude: The altitude in meters as calculated by the GPS receiver. For example: 00048,MCalculated Local Date and Time: The local date and time (using 24 hours clock) as calculated by the GPS receiver, in the format hh;mm;ss dd;mm;yyyy. For example: 13:04:23, 12/07/2006Navigation Processor SW Version: The number and date of the Navigation Processor SW Version in the format 0xYY 0xZZ dd/mm/yyyy, where XX and YY are the Major and Minor SW Version Numbers in hexadecimal digits, respectively. For example: 0x1A 0x1F 11/3/2005 means that the Major SW Version Number is 1A (hex), the Minor SW Version Number is 1F (hex), and the SW Version release date is 11 March 2005.Signal Processor SW Version: The number and date of the Signal Processor SW Version in the format 0xYY 0xZZ dd/mm/yyyy, where XX and YY are the Major and Minor SW Version Numbers in hexadecimal digits, respectively. For example: 0x18 0x2B 11/3/2005 means that the Major SW Version Number is 18 (hex), the Minor SW Version Number is 2B (hex), and the SW Version release date is 11 March 2005.
NPU MenuBreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 1074.5 NPU MenuThe NPU menu includes the following options:Show Unit ControlConfigurationPerformance MonitoringFollowing is a detailed description of these options.4.5.1 ShowSelect this option to view the current value/selected option of configurable parameters. Refer to Section 4.5.3 for more details on these parameters. In addition, some general status information is shown, as follows:General Status Information:Serial NumberHW VersionHW Configuration DescriptionRedundant CPLD Version (the Redundant CPLD is necessary to enable GPS support)Temperature (Celsius)Cumulative Power On Time (hours): The cumulative power-on time of the NPU since first power-up.Management Port Parameters and Status:Management Port MAC AddressManagement Port IP AddressManagement Port Subnet MaskManagement Port Gateway
108 OperationChapter 4 - Operation and AdministrationManagement Port Dest SubnetManagement Port Dest Subnet MaskManagement Port Status (Up/Down)Management Port Management Traffic (Enabled/Disabled)Data Port Parameters and Status:Data Port MAC AddressData Port IP AddressData Port Subnet MaskData Port GatewayData Port Management VLANData Port SpeedData Port Status (Up/Down)Data Port Management Traffic (Enabled/Disabled)Authorized Managers (per manager) details:IP AddressSend TrapsRead CommunityWrite CommunityVoice:DRAP TTL RetriesBridge Parameters:Bridge Aging TimeSW Files and Versions:Main SW FileMain SW Version
NPU MenuBreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 109Shadow SW FileShadow SW Version Running From: The currently running version (Main or Shadow)Boot SW VersionFrequency Bands File Version4.5.2 Unit ControlThe Unit Control menu of the NPU enables changing the access Passwords and the Monitor Inactivity Timeout, resetting the NPU, reverting the Base Station and the NPU to the factory default configuration, managing the SW versions of the module and creating backup files.The Unit Control menu includes the following options:Change PasswordResetSet Factory DefaultsSW Versions ControlCreate BackupMonitor Inactivity Timeout4.5.2.1 Change PasswordFor security and control reasons, the Change Password option is available only for users with Administration access rights, using the Administrator Password to access the program. The Change Password option enables defining the passwords for each of the three different access levels: Administrator, Installer and Monitor. After changing the password for a selected access level, you will be prompted to re-enter the new password for confirmation.Valid passwords: Up to 16 printable characters, case sensitive.NOTEFor security reasons, the passwords do not change after performing the Set Factory Defaults operation. For the same reason, the passwords are not included in backup configuration files.
110 OperationChapter 4 - Operation and AdministrationThe default passwords are:4.5.2.2 Reset UnitSelect this option to reset the NPU. To avoid unintentional reset, you will be prompted to confirm the reset request. Changes to some of the configurable parameters are applied only after reset.Refer to Section 4.11 for information on which parameters are changeable in run time and which changes are applied only after reset.4.5.2.3 Set Factory DefaultsSelect this option to set the Base Station and NPU parameters (excluding the access Passwords) to their factory default values. The parameters will revert to their default values after the next reset.Refer to Section 4.11 for information on the factory default values of these parameters.4.5.2.4 SW Version ControlThe NPU can contain two SW versions:Main: Each time the NPU resets it will reboot using the version defined as Main.Shadow: Normally the Shadow version is the backup version. Each time a new SW File is downloaded to the NPU, it will be stored as a Shadow version, replacing the previous Shadow Version.The typical process of upgrading to a new SW version includes the following steps:Table 4-2: Default PasswordsAccess Level Default PasswordAdministrator adminInstaller installerMonitor monitorCAUTIONSetting the parameters of the NPU to their default values will disable remote management of the Base Station since this affects the IP and Ethernet parameters and will delete all Authorized Managers.
NPU MenuBreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 1111Download the new SW File to the NPU. It will be stored as the Shadow version.2Reset and run the module from its Shadow version. Note that at this stage, after reset the unit will reboot from its previous Main version.3If you want to continue using the new version, swap the Shadow and Main versions. The new version is now defined as Main, and will be used each time the module reboots. The previous version is defined now as Shadow.Each SW version includes two identifiers:SW File, which is the name of the downloaded SW file. This name does not necessarily include clear identification of the SW version number.SW Version, which provides unambiguous identification of the SW version.The SW Version Control submenu includes the following options:Show versionsRun from ShadowSet as Main4.5.2.4.1 Show VersionsSelect this option to view the current available versions and the running version:Main SW FileMain SW VersionShadow SW FileShadow SW VersionRunning From: Main or ShadowBoot SW VersionFrequency Bands File Version
112 OperationChapter 4 - Operation and Administration4.5.2.4.2 Run from ShadowSelect the Run from Shadow option to reset the NPU and run the Shadow version after power up. To avoid unintentional actions you will be prompted to confirm the request.4.5.2.4.3 Set as MainWhen the NPU is running the Shadow version (after selecting Reset and Run from Shadow), it will boot from the Main version after the next reset. Select the Set as Main option if you want to swap versions so that the running version will become the Main version and will be the version to be used after reset. To avoid unintentional actions you will be prompted to confirm the request.4.5.2.5 Create BackupThe Create Backup option enables creating backup files of the Base Station configuration. The backup file contains copies of all the applicable configuration files and databases in the system.The following backup file types can be created:Full: The entire Base Station configuration (excluding Passwords and basic IP parameters of the MGMT and DATA ports - IP Address, Subnet Mask and Default Gateway).Profiles: All the profiles associated with services (Service Profiles, Forwarding Rules, Priority Classifiers, QoS Profiles).Profiles and Services: All the profiles and configurations associated with service (General Service parameters, Subscribers, Services, Service Profiles, Forwarding Rules, Priority Classifiers, QoS Profiles).Filtering: All the configurations of Filtering Rules, Interface Filtering and MAC Address Deny List.Traps: The configuration parameters for all traps.Upon selecting the backup type option, you will be requested to confirm the request. After confirmation, a message is displayed indicating that the backup file creation is in process. Upon successful completion of the process, a completion message will be displayed. If a backup file of the same type already exists in the NPU, you will be asked whether to overwrite the existing file. If there was an error in the process of creating a backup file, an error message will be displayed, specifying the reason.
NPU MenuBreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 113After the backup file has been created, it can be uploaded using a DOS based TFTP Client application to a target directory. To upload the file, use the command:tftp -i <Port IP address> get <file name> <destination address>. The default file name is:Full: backup.res.Profiles: profiles.resProfiles and Services: profiles_srvcs.resFiltering: filtering.resTraps: traps_config.resThe file is encrypted and cannot be edited. However, it can be downloaded to other NPU(s) using a DOS based TFTP Client application with the command: tftp i <Port IP address> put <file name>. The target NPU will decrypt the backup file, extract all the configuration files and databases and will store them, replacing existing files/databases. The NPU should be reset to apply the downloaded configuration.4.5.2.6 Monitor Inactivity TimeoutThe Monitor Inactivity Timeout parameter determines the amount of inactive time following which the unit automatically exits the Monitor program. The time out duration can range from 0 to 60 minutes. 0 means no inactivity timeout.The default value is 10 minutes.To upload/download the Backup File:NOTETo avoid loss of connectivity behind a router, the basic IP parameters of the MGMT and DATA ports (IP Address, Subnet Mask, Default Gateway) are not changed when loading a Full backup file to the NPU. The values of these parameters configured in the target NPU before the loading process, are maintained.
114 OperationChapter 4 - Operation and Administration4.5.3 ConfigurationThe NPU Configuration menu enables viewing and updating parameters that define the functionality of the MGMT and DATA ports, the properties of authorized management stations and bridging functionality. It also enables configuring per Telnet session the types of messages that will be displayed upon occurrence of various events.The following are the guidelines for configuring these parameters:All IP parameters of both ports should be configured. Otherwise, default values shall be used.The Destination Subnet parameters of the MGMT port enable defining an additional subnet of stations that can manage the device when connected via a router to the MGMT port. If OOB management via a router connected to the MGMT port is used, the parameters should be configured to ensure different subnets for the Data port, the Management port and the Management Port Destination Subnet.Authorized Manager(s) must be configured properly to enable remote management using AlvariSTAR (or another SNMP based application). The Configuration menu includes the following options:Management PortData PortAuthorized ManagersBridgeVoiceDebug StreamNOTEIt is highly recommended to use the Management port for local management only. Typically the port should be down (disconnected).
NPU MenuBreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 1154.5.3.1 Management Port ParametersThese parameters define the IP parameters for the Management (MGMT) port connecting the base station to the backbone.The Ethernet interface of the Management port in the NPU operates using Auto Negotiation, enabling communication at either 10 Mbps or 100 Mbps, Full Duplex.4.5.3.1.1 Management Port IP AddressThe IP address of the Management port.The default is 10.0.0.1.4.5.3.1.2 Management Port Subnet MaskThe Subnet mask of the Management port.The default is 255.255.255.0.4.5.3.1.3 Management Port GatewayThe Gateway IP address of the Management port.The default is 0.0.0.0.4.5.3.1.4 Management Port Dest Subnet and Management Port Dest Subnet MaskThe Destination Subnet parameters define a Static Route, which is an IP subnet of stations that can manage the device when connected via a router to the Management port. The Static Route is applicable only when remote management is enabled for both the Management and Data ports (i.e., when both Management NOTEIt is highly recommended to use the Management port for local management only. Typically the port should be down (disconnected).CAUTIONDo not configure the IP Address of the Management port to 0.0.0.0, as this will cause loss of management connectivity via the DATA port.NOTEThe local subnet of the Management port (defined by the Management Port IP Address and Management Port Subnet Mask parameters), must differ from the local subnet of the Data port (defined by the Data Port IP Address and Data Port Subnet Mask parameters) and from the subnet that is used as the Static Route for remote management via the Management port (defined by the Management Port Dest Subnet and Management Port Dest Subnet Mask parameters).
116 OperationChapter 4 - Operation and AdministrationPort Management Traffic Enable/Disable and Data Port Management Traffic Enable/Disable parameters are set to Enable).The default is 0.0.0.0. for both parameters (meaning no Static Route).4.5.3.1.5 Management Port Management Traffic Enable/DisableThe Management Port Management Traffic Enable/Disable parameter allows enabling/disabling remote management traffic via a router connected to the Management port. This parameter does not affect management traffic via the local subnet defined by the Management Port IP Address and Management Port Subnet Mask.If remote management for the Management port is disabled, then the unit can be managed by any PC on any of the following subnets (provided the PC is defined as an Authorized Manager):AThe local subnet of the Management port (defined by the Management Port IP Address and Management Port Subnet Mask parameters).BThe local subnet of the Data port (defined by the Data Port IP Address and Data Port Subnet Mask parameters).CAny subnet reachable via the default Gateway of the Data port (if Data Port Gateway is defined).If remote management is enabled for both the Data Port and the Management port, then the unit can be managed by any PC on any of the following subnets (provided the PC is defined as an Authorized Manager):AThe local subnet of the Management port (defined by the Management Port IP Address and Management Port Subnet Mask parameters).BThe local subnet of the Data port (defined by the Data Port IP Address and Data Port Subnet Mask parameters).CAny subnet reachable via the default Gateway of the Data port (if Data Port Gateway is defined). NOTEThe Management Port Gateway, Destination Subnet and Destination Subnet Mask are grouped together. Exiting the configuration process (e.g. by pressing the Esc key) after configuring just the first one or two parameters in this group will discard the changes made.The subnet that is used as the Static Route for remote management via the Management port (defined by the Management Port Dest Subnet and Management Port Dest Subnet Mask parameters) must differ from the local subnet of the Management port (defined by the Management Port IP Address and Management Port Subnet Mask parameters) and from the local subnet of the Data port (defined by the Data Port IP Address and Data Port Subnet Mask parameters).
NPU MenuBreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 117DThe Static Route subnet (defined by the Management Port Dest Subnet and Management Port Dest Subnet Mask parameters) reachable via the Gateway of the Management port.4.5.3.2 Data Port ParametersThese parameters define the IP and Ethernet parameters for the Data (DATA) port connecting the base station to the backbone.4.5.3.2.1 Data Port IP AddressThe IP address of the Data port.The default is 1.1.1.3.4.5.3.2.2 Data Port Subnet MaskThe subnet mask of the Data port.The default is 255.255.255.0.4.5.3.2.3 Data Port GatewayThe IP address of the default Gateway for the Data port.The default is 0.0.0.0.4.5.3.2.4 Data Port Management VLANThis parameter defines the VLAN ID for management frames via the Data port. If a value from 0 to 4094 is configured for the Management VLAN ID, then the device will accept management frames only if their VLAN tag is the same as this value.Available values are 0-4094 or null (empty) for No VLAN.The default is null (No VLAN).NOTETo prevent the undesired situation where remote management traffic is unintentionally disabled in both the Management and Data ports, the Data Port Management Traffic Enable/Disable parameter will be automatically forced to Enabled upon disabling the Management Port Management Traffic, and vice versa.NOTEThe local subnet of the Data port (defined by the Data Port IP Address and Data Port Subnet Mask parameters), must differ from the local subnet of the Management port (defined by the Management Port IP Address and Management Port Subnet Mask parameters) and from the subnet that is used as the Static Route for remote management via the Management port (defined by the Management Port Dest Subnet and Management Port Dest Subnet Mask parameters).
118 OperationChapter 4 - Operation and Administration4.5.3.2.5 Data Port Speed The speed of the Data port's Ethernet interface that operates always in full duplex mode. Auto negotiation is not supported.The available options are 100 Mbps and 1 Gbps.The default speed is 100 Mbps.4.5.3.2.6 Data Port Management Traffic Enable/DisableThe Data Port Management Traffic Enable/Disable parameter allows enabling/disabling remote management traffic via a router connected to the DATA port. This parameter does not affect management traffic via the local subnet defined by the Data Port IP Address and Data Port Subnet Mask.If remote management for the Data port is disabled, then the unit can be managed by any PC on any of the following subnets (provided the PC is defined as an Authorized Manager):AThe local subnet of the Management port (defined by the Management Port IP Address and Management Port Subnet Mask parameters).BThe local subnet of the Data port (defined by the Data Port IP Address and Data Port Subnet Mask parameters).CAny subnet reachable via the Gateway of the Management port (if defined). Note that in this case the Static Route (if defined) is ignored, and the defined Gateway becomes the default Gateway, enabling remote management by any PC reachable via the Gateway.If remote management is enabled for both the Data Port and the Management port, then the unit can be managed by any PC on any of the following subnets (provided the PC is defined as an Authorized Manager):AThe local subnet of the Management port (defined by the Management Port IP Address and Management Port Subnet Mask parameters).BThe local subnet of the Data port (defined by the Data Port IP Address and Data Port Subnet Mask parameters).CAny subnet reachable via the default Gateway of the Data port (if Data Port Gateway is defined). DThe remote Static Route subnet (defined by the Management Port Dest Subnet and Management Port Dest Subnet Mask parameters) reachable via the Gateway of the Management port.
NPU MenuBreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 1194.5.3.3 Authorized ManagersThe Authorized Managers submenu enables defining the properties of management stations that are allowed to manage the Base Station using SNMP, including all its components and the SUs associated with it.The Authorized Manager submenu includes the following options:4.5.3.3.1 Show AllSelect this option to view the details of all currently defined authorized managers.4.5.3.3.2 SelectThis option enables selecting an existing authorized manager for viewing or updating its properties or for deleting it from the database. The selection is based on the authorized manager's IP address. Refer to the following Add section for details on the configurable parameters.4.5.3.3.3 AddSelect this option to add a new authorized manager. Up to 10 Authorized Manager can be defined. The following parameters can be configured:4.5.3.3.3.1 IP AddressThe IP address of the Authorized Manager.4.5.3.3.3.2 Send TrapsThe Send Traps parameters whether to enable or disable sending of traps to the Authorized Manager.4.5.3.3.3.3 Read CommunityThe SNMP Read Community to be used by the Authorized Manager. A null Read Community means that the read (get) operation can only be performed using the Write Community.Valid Community strings: Up to 23 printable characters, case sensitive.NOTETo prevent the undesired situation where remote management traffic is unintentionally disabled in both the Management and Data ports, the Management Port Management Traffic Enable/Disable parameter will be automatically forced to Enabled upon disabling the Data Port Management Traffic, and vice versa.NOTEIf no Authorized Manager is defined in the device, it can be managed using SNMP by any station, with the default Read and Write Communities. If at least one Authorized Manager is defined, the device can be managed only by a station whose parameters match a defined Authorized Manager.
120 OperationChapter 4 - Operation and Administration4.5.3.3.3.4 Write CommunityThe SNMP Write Community to be used by the Authorized Manager. A null Write Community means that the Authorized Manager has Read only access rights.Valid Community strings: Up to 23 printable characters, case sensitive.4.5.3.4 BridgeThe Bridge submenu enables configuring the Bridge Aging Time parameter, setting the aging time for all addresses in the Forwarding Data Base. The available values are from 1 to 1440 minutes, or 0 for no aging.The default is 10 minutes.4.5.3.5 VoiceThe Voice submenu enables configuring the DRAP TTL Retries parameter. This parameter sets the limit of TTL retries for gateways that support the DRAP protocol before concluding that the gateway is no longer active and removing it from the database. The TTL retry time (the maximum time between two consecutive Allocation Requests) is 255 seconds. The range is from 1 to 100.The default is 4.4.5.3.6 Debug StreamThe Debug Stream submenu enables configuring the types of messages that will be displayed during the Telnet session upon the occurrence of various events. These messages are typically used for investigating various problem situations, and many of them are meaningful only to Alvarion’s technicians. The DS Class Enable and DS Class Disable options can be used to enable or disable various classes of messages. The classes of messages that can be controlled include:ERR: Error messages that should not occur under regular conditions.SYS: Indication of important events and alarms.TRAP: Text messages displaying the information supplied by relevant traps.NOTEDuring SW download to a gateway, which may take up to almost 15 minutes under worst conditions, the DRAP protocol is not active. If the gateway is removed from the database before SW download is completed, the download process will fail. During SW download, the DRAP TTL Retries parameter should be set to its default value of 4 (equivalent to 17 minutes).
NPU MenuBreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 121The default for all classes is Disable.4.5.4 Performance MonitoringThe Performance Monitoring option enables to view and reset the NPU Ethernet Ports counters. The Performance Monitoring submenu includes the following options: Data PortManagement PortAll counters4.5.4.1 Data Port CountersThe Data Port option enables viewing or resetting the Data (DATA) port counters. The information displayed for each counter is the accumulated number since the last time the counters were reset. The counters are reset each time the NPU is reset, or upon activating the Reset Counters option.The Data Port counters include:Data Port Rx CountersTotal Packets Received: The total number of packets received on the interface. Packets with errors are not counted. Management Packets Forwarded: The total number of management packets (packets whose destination is the NPU, and broadcasts) received on the Data port and forwarded to the NPU's internal management. Packets Forwarded to Slot 1: The total number of packets received from the Data port and forwarded by the NPU to AU Slot 1.Packets Forwarded to Slot 2: The total number of packets received from the Data port and forwarded by the NPU to AU Slot 2.Packets Forwarded to Slot 3: The total number of packets received from the Data port and forwarded by the NPU to AU Slot 3.NOTEEnabling the display of selected classes is applicable only for the current Telnet session. These parameters affect only the session and are not stored in the device. Upon starting a new session, or after reseting the unit, all classes are disabled.
122 OperationChapter 4 - Operation and AdministrationPackets Forwarded to Slot 4: The total number of packets received from the Data port and forwarded by the NPU to AU Slot 4.Packets Forwarded to Slot 7: The total number of packets received from the Data port and forwarded by the NPU to AU Slot 7.Packets Forwarded to Slot 8: The total number of packets received from the Data port and forwarded by the NPU to AU Slot 8.Packets Forwarded to Slot 9: The total number of packets received from the Data port and forwarded by the NPU to AU Slot 9.Packets Discarded on Rx: Packets received from the Data port that were discarded due to switching and classification failures.Data Port Tx CountersTotal Packet Transmitted: The total number of packets transmitted to the interface. Packets with errors are not counted. Management Packets Submitted: The total number of management packets submitted by the NPU.Packets Submitted from Slot 1: The total number of packets received by the NPU from the AU in Slot 1 and submitted to the Data port.Packets Submitted from Slot 2: The total number of packets received by the NPU from the AU in Slot 2 and submitted to the Data port.Packets Submitted from Slot 3: The total number of packets received by the NPU from the AU in Slot 3 and submitted to the Data port.Packets Submitted from Slot 4: The total number of packets received by the NPU from the AU in Slot 4 and submitted to the Data port.Packets Submitted from Slot 7: The total number of packets received by the NPU from the AU in Slot 7 and submitted to the Data port.Packets Submitted from Slot 8: The total number of packets received by the NPU from the AU in Slot 8 and submitted to the Data port.Packets Submitted from Slot 9: The total number of packets received by the NPU from the AU in Slot 9 and submitted to the Data port.Packets Discarded on Tx: Always 0. Currently packets are not discarded on Tx.
NPU MenuBreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 1234.5.4.2 Management Port CountersThe Management Port option enables viewing or resetting the Management (MGMT) port counters. The information displayed for each counter is the accumulated number since the last time the counters were reset. The counters are reset each time the NPU is reset, or upon activating the Reset Counters option.The Management Port counters include:Packets ReceivedPackets Discarded on RxPackets TransmittedPackets Discarded on Tx4.5.4.3 All CountersThe All Counters option enables viewing or resetting both the Data (DATA) port and Management (MGMT) port counters.
124 OperationChapter 4 - Operation and Administration4.6 Radio Cluster MenuRadio Cluster is a logical entity used to describe and support management of the Base Station's elements associated with specific geographical sectors. A Radio Cluster represents one or several ODUs that serve (through their directional antennas) the same geographical sector. Up to a maximum of six Radio Clusters can be defined per Base Station, representing a cell coverage using 6 x 60° antennas.The Radio Cluster(s) must be defined prior to defining the relevant ODU(s), AU(s) and AU Channel(s).The Radio Cluster menu includes the following options:Show SummarySelectAdd4.6.1 Show SummarySelect this option to view the current status of all defined Radio Clusters.For each defined Radio Cluster, the display includes the following information:ID: Radio Cluster ID (1-6)Name: The string that is used as the descriptive name of the Radio Cluster.Location: The string that is used as the descriptive location of the Radio Cluster.Sector Heading: The direction (angle from the north) of the geographical sector.Sector Beam Width: The beam width of the antenna(s) used in the geographical sector.
Radio Cluster MenuBreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 1254.6.2 SelectUse this option and select an already defined Radio Cluster to open the Radio Cluster # menu that will enable managing and configuring the selected Radio Cluster.The selected Radio Cluster # menu includes the following options:Show: Select this option to view the current values defined for the selected Radio Cluster's parameters.Update: Select this option to update one or more of the selected Radio Cluster's parameters. For details on the configurable parameters Refer to Section 4.6.4. Delete: Select this option to delete the selected Radio Cluster from the database.4.6.3 AddSelect this option to define a new Radio Cluster.For details on the configurable parameters refer to Section 4.6.4.4.6.4 Radio Cluster Parameters4.6.4.1 Radio Cluster IDA number used to identify the Radio Cluster. The Radio Cluster ID is configurable only when adding a new Radio Cluster.The available values range from 1 to 6.4.6.4.2 NameA string of up to 32 printable characters used as the descriptive name of the Radio Cluster. This is an optional descriptive parameter.The default is an empty string.4.6.4.3 LocationA string of up to 255 printable characters used to describe the location of the Radio Cluster. This is an optional descriptive parameter.
126 OperationChapter 4 - Operation and Administration4.6.4.4 Sector HeadingThe direction of the geographical sector, defined in degrees from the north. This is an optional descriptive parameter.The values range is from 0 to 359 (degrees from north).The default value is 0 (degrees from north).4.6.4.5 Sector Beam WidthThe beam width, in degrees, of the antenna(s) used in the geographical sector. This is an optional descriptive parameter.The values range is from 0 to 359 (degrees).The default value is 90 (degrees).
ODU MenuBreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 1274.7 ODU MenuThe ODU(s) must be defined prior to defining the relevant AU(s) and AU Channel(s).The ODU menu includes the following options:Show SummarySelectAdd4.7.1 Show SummarySelect this option to view the current status of all defined ODUs. For each defined ODU, the display includes the following information:ID: ODU ID (1-24)Associated Radio Cluster: The ID (1-6) defined for the associated Radio Cluster. Tx Power: The defined Tx Power in dBm units.ODU Configured Band: The radio band configured for the ODU.Admin Status: Enabled or Disabled.For details on the parameters refer to Section 4.7.4.Upon first power-up of the Base Station, 7 ODUs are defined automatically, with ODU IDs from 1 to 7. The parameters of these automatically created ODUs are:Associated Radio Cluster: NATx Power: 28 dBmODU Configured Band: Not DefinedAdmin Status: Enabled
128 OperationChapter 4 - Operation and Administration4.7.2 SelectUse this option and select an already defined ODU to open the ODU # menu that will enable managing and configuring the selected ODU.The selected ODU # menu includes the following options:4.7.2.1 ShowSelect this option to view the current value/selected option of applicable parameters. In addition, some general status information is displayed, as follows:IDAssociated Radio ClusterTx PowerODU Configured BandAdmin StatusOper StatusHC08 VersionCPLD VersionSerial NumberTemperature (Celsius)HW RevisionHW Configuration DescriptionMax Tx Power: The maximum Tx Power supported by the ODU. This read-only parameter sets the upper limit for the Tx Power parameter.4.7.2.2 UpdateSelect this option to update one or more of the selected ODU's parameters.For details on the configurable parameters refer to Section 4.7.4.
ODU MenuBreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 1294.7.2.3 DeleteSelect this option to delete the selected ODU from the database.4.7.3 AddSelect this option to define a new ODU.For details on the configurable parameters refer to Section 4.7.4.4.7.4 ODU Parameters4.7.4.1 ODU IDA number used to identify the ODU. The ODU ID is configurable only when adding a new ODU.The available values range from 1 to 24.4.7.4.2 Associated Radio ClusterThe ID of the associated Radio Cluster.The available values range from 1 to 6. The value must be that of an already defined Radio Cluster.4.7.4.3 Configured ODU Frequency BandThe Configured ODU Frequency Band will be modified through the use of Frequency Bands Configuration file (see Section 4.7.5). The available values are the list numbers from the displayed list of available Frequency Bands.The Configured ODU Frequency Band can be updated only if the ODU is not associated with any AU Channel, or if the Admin Status of the associated AU Channel is Disabled.Compatibility between the Configured ODU Frequency Band and its actual band is verified by the AU upon trying to associate the ODU with a Channel. If the Configured ODU Frequency Band differs from the actual band supported by the ODU, a mismatch trap will be sent by the AU upon trying to associate it with a Channel and the association will be rejected.4.7.4.4 Tx PowerThe Tx Power parameter defines the power level of the transmitted signal at the antenna port of the ODU.
130 OperationChapter 4 - Operation and AdministrationThe range is from 13 to 50 dBm using a 0.25 dBm resolution. If the entered value is not compatible with the installed ODU, a trap will be issued. If the entered value is below the minimum supported by the ODU the actual power will be set to the minimum supported by the unit. If the entered value is above the maximum supported by the ODU, the power will be changed to the maximum value supported by the ODU .The default is 28 dBm.If the Diversity Mode is set to Fourth Order Diversity, the Tx Power of the ODUs associated with Channels 2-4 will be forced to the value configured for the ODU associated with Channel 1.If the Diversity Mode is set to Second Order Diversity, the Tx Power of the ODU associated with Channel 2 will be forced to the value configured for the ODU associated with Channel 1. Channels 3 and 4 are not used in Second Order Diversity Mode.4.7.4.5 Admin StatusThe transmit on/off status of the ODU.The default option is Disabled.4.7.5 Frequency Bands File and Frequency Bands GroupsThe Frequency Bands Configuration file defines the characteristics of each of the frequency bands supported by the system. These characteristics include:Lowest Downlink FrequencyHighest Downlink FrequencyStep (resolution)Duplex Separation: the difference between downlink (Tx) and uplink (Rx) frequencies. In systems operating in TDD mode the Duplex Separation is 0.Group ID: In certain cases, an AU can be connected to ODUs using different Frequency Bands. The Group ID defines the Frequency Bands Group, which includes all the Frequency Bands that can be used by the same AU. An AU cannot be associated with two or more ODUs that use Frequency Bands belonging to different Groups.
ODU MenuBreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 131In the current release, the following Frequency Bands are supported:Note that the Frequency Bands File includes additional Frequency Bands for systems that support FDD Duplex Mode and are not applicable to the current release.This mechanism allows adding new frequency bands without modifying the software by simply loading a new Frequency Bands File when the supporting hardware becomes available. The file will be either a part of the NPU's software or loaded later to the NPU, using an updated file obtained from Alvarion. The version of the current file and information on the supported bands is available in the NPU's Show menu.Table 4-3: Frequency Bands Frequency Band (ID) Group (ID) Downlink Frequency Range Resolution Duplex Separation2.3 (12) 2.3GHz (5) 2300-2360 MHz 125 KHz 02.5A1 (13) 2.5GHz (6) 2496-2602 MHz 125 KHz 02.5A2 (14) 2.5GHz (6) 2590-2690 MHz 125 KHz 03.4a TDD (15) 3.5GHz TDD (7) 3399.5-3455 MHz 125 KHz 03.4b TDD (16) 3.5GHz TDD (7) 3445-3500 MHz 125 KHz 03.5a TDD (17) 3.5GHz TDD (7) 3500-3555 MHz 125 KHz 03.5b TDD (17) 3.5GHz TDD (7) 3545-3600 MHz 125 KHz 0
132 OperationChapter 4 - Operation and Administration4.8 AU MenuThe AU menu includes the following options:Show SummarySW Files in NPUSelectFollowing is a detailed description of these options.4.8.1 Show SummarySelect this option to view the current status of all AUs. For each applicable slot (1-4, 7-9), the display includes the following information:AU Slot IDStatus: Installed/Not InstalledFault StatusConfigured SW File Name: The name of the AU SW File that should be used to upgrade an AU after being installed as well as after each reset. Should be either None (an empty string) or one of the AU SW Files available in the NPU. This is the SW File defined in the SW Versions Control of the AU (see Section 4.8.5.2.3). Configured SW Version: The SW Version of the Configured SW File described above.Configured Operation: The operation to be performed with the Configured SW File when the AU is installed, as well as after each reset: None (do not load), Load (load to Shadow), Run from Shadow or Set as Main. This is the Action defined in SW Versions Control menu of the AU (see Section 4.8.5.2.3).SW Download Status: The status of the last SW download operation (or None).Configured SU SW File Name: The name of the SU software file that should be used to upgrade an SU upon network entry for all SUs in this sector. (Not
AU MenuBreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 133applicable to any SU whose Configured SW File Name is other than None). Should be either one of the SU SW Files available in the NPU or an empty string for None. Configured SU SW Version: The SW Version of the Configured SU SW File described above.Configured SU Operation: The operation to be performed with the Configured SU SW File after network entry: None (do not load), Load (load to Shadow), Run from Shadow or Set as Main.Maximum Number of Voice Calls: The maximum number of voice calls that can be supported by the AU.Active Voice Calls: The number of currently active voice calls handled by the AU.AU IDU Type: The type of the AU-IDU module. The options are:Two ChannelsFour ChannelsTwo Channels -HPFour Channels-HPThe HP suffix indicates the AU-IDU is capable of supporting higher currents of -54 VDC power supply from the PIU (via the IF cable) to the ODU.In the current release all AU-IDUs are Four Channels-HP.Operation Mode: The air protocol used by the AU. The defined operation modes are Standard (used in first generation BreezeMAX systems) and Advanced Si (used in the WiMAX ready systems supporting Self Install SUs).In the current release only Advanced Si Operation Mode is applicable.For more details on SW File/Version and Operation refer to Section 4.8.5.2.3.4.8.2 Upgrading AU’s SWTo facilitate efficient upgrade of AU’s SW, two upgrade levels are available:
134 OperationChapter 4 - Operation and AdministrationAU level, for upgrading a single AU, described in Section 4.8.5.2.3.2 Base Station level, for upgrading all AUs in the Base Station, as described in the following section.4.8.3 SW Files in NPUUp to four AU SW files can be stored in the NPU. Any of the available files can be loaded by the NPU to a selected AU. When four AU files are stored in the NPU, a new file cannot be added until at least one of the existing files is deleted.A default SW File Name and Default Action can be defined. These are the SW File and associated Action that will be used for a new AU after being installed, as well as after each reset. This feature simplifies the upgrade process, by defining the SW File and Action for all AUs. Two different pairs of Default SW File Name and Default Action may be defined, to optionally support AUs using either Standard Operation Mode or Advanced Si (Advanced - Self Install) Operation Mode. These Default SW File Name and Default Action are applicable to all AUs in the Base Station using the specified Operation Mode. However, they are not applicable for any AU whose Configured SW File Name (see Section 4.8.1) is other than None. This menu enables viewing the current AU SW files stored in the NPU and deleting selected file(s). It also enables defining the Default SW File Name and Default Action for each Operation Mode, and deleting the Configured SW Files in all AUs. 4.8.3.1 Show FilesSelect this option to display the AU SW files currently stored in the NPU, the Default SW Files and Default Actions. For each available SW file, the file name and the version are shown.4.8.3.2 Default SW File (Standard)Select this option to define the Name of the SW File to be used for upgrading an AU using Standard Operation Mode after installation as well as after each reset, and the Action to be taken with this file. Not applicable for any AU whose Configured SW File Name is other than None (see “SW File” on page 139).The Default SW File (Standard) parameters are:NOTEThe Default SW File (Standard) option is not applicable to this release that does not support products operating in Standard Operation Mode.
AU MenuBreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 1354.8.3.2.1 NameThe Name of the SW File to be used for upgrading an AU using Standard Operation Mode after installation as well as after each reset. Should be one of the AU SW Files currently stored in the NPU, or None (null).4.8.3.2.2 ActionThe operation to be performed with the Default SW File (Standard) when an AU using Standard Operation Mode is installed, as well as after each reset: None (do not load), Load (load to Shadow), Run from Shadow or Set as Main. Refer to Section 4.8.5.2.3.2.2 for more details on these Actions.4.8.3.3 Default SW File (Advanced Si)Select this option to define the Name of the SW File to be used for upgrading an AU using Advanced Si Operation Mode after installation as well as after each reset, and the Action to be taken with this file. Not applicable for any AU whose Configured SW File Name is other than None (see “SW File” on page 139) The Default SW File (Advanced Si) parameters are:4.8.3.3.1 NameThe Name of the SW File to be used for upgrading an AU using Advanced Si Operation Mode after installation as well as after each reset. Should be one of the AU SW Files currently stored in the NPU, or None (null).4.8.3.3.2 ActionThe operation to be performed with the Default SW File (Advanced Si) when an AU using Advanced Si Operation Mode is installed, as well as after each reset: None (do not load), Load (load to Shadow), Run from Shadow or Set as Main. Refer to Section 4.8.5.2.3.2.2 for more details on these Actions.4.8.3.4 Delete a FileSelect this option and enter the name of an existing AU SW file to delete it from the NPU's memory.4.8.3.5 Clear All Configured AU SW FilesSelect this option to clear (delete) the AU Configured SW File in all AUs.4.8.4 SelectUse this option and select a slot to access the AU Slot # menu that will enable managing and configuring the AU in the selected slot, or pre-configuring the AU that will be installed in the slot at a later time.The available AU slot IDs are 1-4, 7-9.
136 OperationChapter 4 - Operation and Administration4.8.5 AU Slot # MenuThe AU Slot # menu enables managing and configuring the AU in the selected slot, or pre-configuring the AU that will be installed in the slot at a later time. The AU Slot # menu includes the following options:Show Unit ControlConfigurationPerformance Monitoring4.8.5.1 Show Select this option to view the current value/selected option of applicable parameters. In addition, some general status information is shown, as follows:General Status and Operation Parameters:IDU Serial NumberIDU IF Card HW RevisionIDU IF Card HW ConfigurationIDU Boot VersionIDU Main Card HW RevisionIDU Main Card HW ConfigurationIDU Temperature (Celsius)IDU TypeCumulative Power On Time (hours)Operation Mode (Standard or Advanced Si)Diversity ModeSW Files and Versions:Configured SW File Name Configured SW Version
AU MenuBreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 137Configured OperationConfigured SU SW File Name Configured SU SW VersionConfigured SU OperationMain SW File NameMain SW VersionShadow SW File NameShadow SW VersionRunning From (Main or Shadow)MAC Parameters:Base Station ID (Operator ID, Cell ID, Sector ID)Operator ID (as defined in the Base Station-Cell menu)Cell ID (as defined in the Base Station-Cell menu)Sector IDARQ Enable/DisableMaximum Cell Radius (km)Multirate Parameters:Multirate Enable/DisableUplink Basic RateDownlink Basic RateATPC Parameters (as defined in the Base Station-Cell menu):ATPC Enable/DisableOptimal Uplink RSSI (dBm)Voice Parameters:Maximum Number of Voice Calls
138 OperationChapter 4 - Operation and AdministrationActive Voice Calls4.8.5.2 Unit ControlThe AU Unit Control menu enables resetting the AU and managing the SW versions of the module.The Unit Control menu includes the following options:ResetSet Factory DefaultsSW Version Control4.8.5.2.1 Reset UnitSelect this option to reset the unit. To avoid unintentional reset, you will be prompted to confirm the reset request. Changes to some of the configurable parameters are applied only after reset. Refer to Section 4.11 for information on which parameters are changeable in run time and which changes are applied only after reset. 4.8.5.2.2 Set Factory DefaultsSelect this option to set the AU parameters to their factory default values. Refer to Section 4.11 for information on the factory default values of these parameters. The parameters will revert to their default values after the next reset.4.8.5.2.3 SW Versions ControlThe AU can contain two SW versions:Main: Each time the AU resets it will reboot using the version defined as Main.Shadow: Normally, the Shadow version is the backup version. Each time a new SW File is downloaded to the AU, it will be stored as a Shadow version, replacing the previous Shadow Version.The process of upgrading to a new SW version is controlled by the NPU, and is performed using one of the AU SW files installed in the NPU. If the specified AU SW file does not exist in the AU, it will be downloaded to the AU and the requested operation will be executed, as described below. If it already exists in the AU, then actual loading is not necessary. The following options are available in the SW Version Control menu:
AU MenuBreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 1394.8.5.2.3.1 Show VersionsSelect this option to view the following information:Versions in AU:Main SW File NameMain SW VersionShadow SW File NameShadow SW VersionRunning From: Main or ShadowAvailable Versions in NPU: The available AU SW file names and the SW version of each file.4.8.5.2.3.2 SW File Select this option to define the Name of the SW File to be used for upgrading the AU after installation as well as after each reset, and the Action to be taken with this file:4.8.5.2.3.2.1NameThe Name of the SW File to be used for upgrading the AU after installation as well as after each reset. Should be one of the AU SW Files currently stored in the NPU, or None (null).4.8.5.2.3.2.2ActionThe operation to be performed with the SW File when the AU is installed, as well as after each reset: None (do not load), Load (load to Shadow), Run from Shadow or Set as Main:None: Select None to cancel a pending request for another operation (an operation will be executed only after the next reset).Download: Select this option to download the specified SW File to the Shadow memory of the AU. If the file already exists in the AU, no action will take place.Run from Shadow: Select this option to download the specified SW File from the NPU to the Shadow memory of the AU, reset the AU and reboot using the Shadow version. Note that because the process is controlled by the NPU, the AU will continue running from the Shadow version after reset.
140 OperationChapter 4 - Operation and AdministrationIf the specified file already exists as the Shadow version (meaning that previously a Download operation was executed for this SW File), the only actual operation to take place will be to reset and run from Shadow. If the specified file already exists as the Main version, no action will take place.Set as Main: Select this option to download the SW File from the NPU to the Shadow memory of the AU, reset the AU and reboot using the Shadow version, and then swap the Main and Shadow SW Version, so that the running version (which was previously the Shadow version) will become the Main version, to be used after next reset.If the specified file already exists as the running version and it is defined as the Shadow version (meaning that previously a Download and Run from Shadow operation was executed for this SW File), the only actual operation to take place will be to swap the Main and Shadow versions. If it is already defined as the Main version, no action will take place.4.8.5.2.3.3 SU SW File Select this option to define the Name of the SW File to be used for upgrading the SUs served by this AU after network entry, and the Action to be taken with this file. Not applicable for any Permanent SU whose Configured SW File Name is other than None (see Section 4.9.7.2.4.2) The SU SW File parameters are:4.8.5.2.3.3.1NameThe Name of the SW File to be used for upgrading the SUs served by this AU. Should be one of the AU SW Files currently stored in the NPU, or None (null).4.8.5.2.3.3.2ActionThe operation to be performed with the SU SW File: None (do not load), Load (load to Shadow), Run from Shadow or Set as Main. Refer to Section 4.9.7.2.4.2.2 for more details on these Actions.4.8.5.2.3.4 Clear All Configured SU SW Files for this AUSelect this option to clear (delete) the SU Configured SW File in all Permanent SUs served by this AU.4.8.5.3 ConfigurationThe AU Configuration menu enables viewing and updating the AU's parameters. It is important to note that changes to some parameters take effect only after reset. For these parameters, the applicable Show menus display the Current as well as the Configured value.
AU MenuBreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 141The Configuration menu includes the following options:MACPhyMulti ChannelMultirateVoice Parameters4.8.5.3.1 MAC ParametersThe MAC menu enables viewing/updating the following parameters:4.8.5.3.1.1 ID ParametersThe Operator ID, Cell ID and Sector ID constitute together the Base Station ID, which is the unique identifier of the AU. An SU can be authenticated by the AU only if its defined parameters match the Base Station ID configured for the AU.The Operator ID and Cell ID are defined for the Base Station (see Section 4.4.2.4) and are used by all AUs in the Base Station. In the AU's MAC Parameters menu they are available only in the Show option.The Sector ID parameter consists of three digits in the range of 0 to 255.The default Sector ID is 206. Changes in Sector ID are applied only after reset.4.8.5.3.1.2 ARQ Enable/DisableThe ARQ Enable/Disable parameter controls whether to use an ARQ algorithm for detecting errors and requesting retransmissions of applicable unicast messages (applicable only for Best Effort and Non Real Time services). The default is Disable.4.8.5.3.1.3 Maximum Cell RadiusThe Maximum Cell Radius is used to adapt various timing parameters of the MAC to the time it takes a message to reach its destination. This time delay is dependent upon the distance between the originating and receiving units. The timing parameters should be adapted to the largest expected delay, which is determined from the distance from the AU of the farthest SU served by it.
142 OperationChapter 4 - Operation and AdministrationThe basic time element (symbol) used by a system operating in TDD mode is 68 microseconds for a bandwidth of 3.5 MHz and 50 microseconds for a bandwidth of 5 MHz. This symbol size is translated to a round trip delay of approximately 20 km for 3.5 MHz bandwidth and 15 km for 5 MHz bandwidth, or a cell radius of 10 km or 7.5 km, respectively. The values range for the Maximum Cell Distance is from 10 to 50 km for a bandwidth of 3.5 MHz, and 7 to 45 km for a bandwidth of 5 MHz (representing a maximum delay of 6 symbols). The default is 20 km.4.8.5.3.2 Phy ParametersThe Phy menu enables viewing/updating the Bandwidth parameter:4.8.5.3.2.1 BandwidthThe frequency bandwidth used by the radio. A change in the Bandwidth parameter will take effect only after resetting the AU.The Admin Status of all Channels belonging to the same AU must be disabled to enable a configuration change in the Bandwidth parameter.The available options are:1 - 1.75 MHz2 - 3.5 MHz3 - 5.0 MHz4 - 7 MHzNOTEFor Non-Line-Of-Sight (NLOS) links using refractions, the cell distance should be higher than the line-of-sight distance. Typically a 10% margin is a good estimate for the increase in distance due to the NLOS operation.NOTEAn SU located at a distance larger than the Maximum Cell Radius will be rejected during the network entry process.NOTEThe actual value that the system will use is a multiple of the the one-way delay for a single basic time element: N*10 km for a bandwidth of 3.5 MHz or N*7.5 km for a bandwidth of 5 MHz, where N is a an integer from 1 to 6. The value configured for the Maximum Cell Radius will be up-rounded to the nearest applicable value.
AU MenuBreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 1435 - 10 MHzThe current Bandwidth values applicable for systems operating in TDD Mode are 3.5 MHz and 5 MHz. The AU will reject any selection of a Bandwidth not supported by it.The default is 3.5 MHz.4.8.5.3.3 Multi Channel ParametersEach AU can include up to 4 Channels with Channels IDs from 1 to 4, corresponding to up to 4 ODU connectors. Each ODU connector (channel) can be connected to an ODU. The Multi Channel menu includes the following options:Show SummaryDiversity ModeSelectFollowing is a description of these options:4.8.5.3.3.1 Show SummarySelect this option to view the following information for each Channel:Channel (1-4)Associated ODUDownlink (Tx) Frequency (MHz)Uplink (Rx) Frequency (MHz): Applicable only to Channels associated with a defined ODU. Computed using the rules defined in the Frequency Bands Configuration File.Admin Status (Enabled/Disabled)Tx Power: Applicable only to Channels associated with a defined ODU. The Tx Power in dBm configured in the ODU.Associated Radio Cluster: Applicable only to Channels associated with a defined ODU. The Associated Radio Cluster defined in the ODU.Upon first power-up of the Base Station, the channels are defined automatically, as follows:
144 OperationChapter 4 - Operation and AdministrationAssociated ODU: Channel 1 of all AUs is automatically associated with an ODU:For all other Channels (2-4) the Associated ODU is NA.Downlink (Tx) Frequency (MHz): 3551.750Admin Status: Enabled for Channel 1, Disabled for all other Channels (2-4).4.8.5.3.3.2 Diversity ModeThe Diversity Mode of the AU. For details on diversity modes refer to “Base Station Radio Configurations” on page 7.The available options are:1 - No Diversity2 - Second Order Diversity3 - Fourth Order DiversityThe default is No Diversity.4.8.5.3.3.3 SelectUse this option to select a Channel ID (1-4) to open the Channel # menu for viewing or updating the Channel's parameters. The configurable Channel parameters are:Associated ODU: An ODU ID (1-24) of an already defined ODU.Downlink (Tx) Frequency (MHz): The Tx frequency in MHz, which must be in accordance with the selected Bandwidth (see Section 4.8.5.3.2.1) and the rules Table 4-4: Automatic Association of Channel 1 Upon First Power-UpAU Slot ID ODU IDAU Slot 1 1AU Slot 2 2AU Slot 3 3AU Slot 4 4AU Slot 7 5AU Slot 8 6AU Slot 9 7
AU MenuBreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 145defined in the Frequency Bands File for the frequency band selected as the Configured ODU Frequency Band of the associated ODU (see Section 4.7.4.3). The help text (displayed upon clicking the Tab key) reflects the limitations imposed by these rules.In addition, the following rules must be followed in No Diversity mode if more than one channel is used:1After configuring the Downlink Frequency f1 for one of the AU's Channels, the Downlink Frequencies for other Channels of the same AU should be configured using increments of +/- 0.875 MHz from the defined frequency: f1 +/-(N*0.875).2The Downlink Frequencies of all Channels of the same AU should belong to the same Frequency Bands Group (see Section 4.7.5).Admin Status: The Admin Status must be disabled to enable changes in the Configured ODU Frequency Band of an associated ODU. If the Configured ODU Frequency Band differs from the actual band supported by the ODU, a mismatch trap will be sent by the AU upon trying to associate it with a Channel and the association will be rejected. The Admin Status of all Channels belonging to the same AU must be disabled to enable a configuration change in the Bandwidth parameter.If the Diversity Mode is set to Fourth Order Diversity, the Downlink (Tx) Frequency and Admin Status of Channels 2-4 are not configurable: they are set automatically to the same values configured for Channel 1. The Tx Power of the ODUs associated with Channels 2-4 will be forced to the value configured for the ODU associated with Channel 1.If the Diversity Mode is set to Second Order Diversity, the Downlink (Tx) Frequency and Admin Status of Channel 2 are not configurable: they are set automatically to the same values configured for Channel 1. The Tx Power of the ODU associated with Channel 2 will be forced to the value configured for the ODU associated with Channel 1. Channels 3 and 4 are not used in Second Order Diversity Mode.The Show menu includes also the following read-only parameters:Tx Power: As configured in the Associated ODU.Associated Radio Cluster: As configured in the Associated ODU.
146 OperationChapter 4 - Operation and AdministrationUplink (Rx) Frequency: Computed from the configured Downlink (Tx) Frequency according to the Duplex Separation of the applicable Frequency Band. In TDD systems the Uplink (Tx) Frequency is the same as the Downlink (Tx) Frequency. Frequency Band: The Configured ODU Frequency Band. If there is a mismatch between the Configured ODU Frequency Band and its actual band, both values will be displayed.Operational Status4.8.5.3.4 Multirate ParametersBreezeMAX employs a multirate algorithm to dynamically adapt the modulation scheme and Forward Error Correction (FEC) coding to actual link conditions. The algorithm is managed by the AU taking into account also information received from the served SUs. Optimal values are calculated separately for the uplink and downlink for each SU. MAP messages transmitted to the SUs include information on the uplink rate that should be used by each SU for its next transmission.The Basic Rate is the minimum rate to be used by the Multirate algorithm. This is also the rate to be used for downlink broadcasts and multicasts. Broadcasts and multicasts messages are not acknowledged, so that the ARQ mechanism cannot be used and there is no way to guarantee that all intended recipients will receive them properly. In addition, multicasts and broadcasts are sent to multiple recipients with different link qualities. Therefore, it is preferable to use a relatively low rate for these transmissions, thus reducing the probability of errors and increasing the likelihood that all intended recipients will receive them properly.In the uplink, this is the rate to be used by SUs for non-scheduled transmissions, such as during the contention period.The Basic Rate is also the initial rate to be used by the algorithm for each new SU that joins the cell when the Multirate algorithm is enabled.When the Multirate algorithm is disabled, communication with connected SUs will continue using the last uplink and downlink rates selected by the Multirate algorithm. The Set Rates option in the SU (see Section 4.9.7.3.4.2), which becomes available only when the Multirate algorithm is disabled in the AU, enables setting the Uplink Current Rate and the Downlink Current Rate to any of the values listed in Table 4-5.The multirate algorithm chooses dynamically between 8 rates. These are also the rates that can be configured for the Basic Rate parameters.
AU MenuBreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 147The Multirate menu enables viewing/updating the following parameters:4.8.5.3.4.1 Multirate Enable/DisableThe Multirate Enable/Disable parameter controls whether the multirate algorithm should be used to determine current optimal rates in both the uplinks and the downlinks. The default is Enable.4.8.5.3.4.2 Uplink Basic RateThe Basic Rate for all uplinks.The default rate is the lowest rate BPSK 1/2 (rate 1).4.8.5.3.4.3 Downlink Basic RateThe Basic Rate for all downlinks.The default rate is the lowest rate BPSK 1/2 (rate 1).4.8.5.3.5 Voice ParametersThe Voice Parameters option includes a single parameter, Maximum Number of Voice Calls:4.8.5.3.5.1 Maximum Number of Voice CallsThis parameter sets the upper limit of simultaneous voice calls that will be supported by the AU.Table 4-5: Rates (Modulation Schemes and Coding)No. Rate1 BPSK 1/22 BPSK 3/4 3 QPSK 1/2 4 QPSK 3/4 5 QAM16 1/2 6 QAM16 3/4 7QAM64 2/38 QAM64 3/4 NOTEThe multirate algorithm should always be enabled. The option to disable it is available to enable using a fixed rate to support certain tests. After each reset, the AU boots with the multirate enabled, disregarding its status before the device was reset.
148 OperationChapter 4 - Operation and AdministrationThe range is from 0 to 300 Voice Calls.The default is 50.4.8.6 Performance MonitoringThe AU Performance menu includes the following options:Ports CountersBurst Error Rate Counters4.8.6.1 Ports CountersThe Ports Counters option enables viewing or resetting the Back-Panel and Wireless ports counters. The information displayed for each counter is the accumulated number since the last time the counters were reset. The counters are reset each time the AU is reset, or upon activating the Reset option.The counters describe the traffic at the Back-Panel and Wireless ports, as follows: Back-Panel Port CountersData Bytes Received: The total number of data bytes received from the Back-panel (NPU). Management frames and frames with errors are not included.Data Bytes Discarded on Rx: The number of bytes in packets discarded due to communication errors between the AU and the NPU.Data Bytes Transmitted: The total number of data bytes transmitted to the Back-Panel (NPU). Management frames and frames with errors are not included.Data Bytes Discarded on Tx: This count is always 0 (No discards).Wireless Port CountersData Bytes Received: The total number of data bytes received from the Wireless link. MAC management frames and frames with errors are not included.NOTEThe Back-Panel port of the AU is the internal Ethernet port between the AU and the NPU.
AU MenuBreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 149Data Bytes Discarded on Rx: The number of bytes in packets received from the Wireless link and discarded due to MAC protocol receive errors, such as duplicate sequence number, wrong sequence number etc. (not CRC errors).Data Bytes Transmitted: The total number of data bytes transmitted to the Wireless link. MAC Management frames and frames with errors are not included.Data Bytes Discarded on Tx: The number of bytes in packets discarded due to congestion in the wireless medium.ARQ Enabled Bytes Transmitted: The number of bytes transmitted over BE and NRT connections. Applicable only if the ARQ mechanism is enabled. Bytes Retransmitted: The number of unacknowledged bytes that were retransmitted. Retransmissions are applicable only to BE and NRT connections provided the ARQ mechanism is enabled. Retransmission Rate (%): Retransmission Rate in percents is defined as: 100*(Bytes Retransmitted)/(ARQ Enabled Bytes Transmitted).4.8.6.2 Burst Error Rate CountersThe Burst Error rate Counters option enables selecting a specific SU by its MAC address for viewing or resetting the Burst Error Rate counters for the applicable downlink. The information displayed for each rate in the uplink is the accumulated number since the last time the counters were reset. The downlink counters can be viewed in the applicable SU menu. For each rate the displayed information (for the uplink) includes:Total BurstError BurstsError RateThe counters are reset each time the AU is reset, or upon activating the Reset option.
150 OperationChapter 4 - Operation and Administration4.9 SU MenuThe SU menu includes the following options:Show SummaryShow Summary by AUSW Files in NPUSelect by NameSelect by MAC AddressAddFollowing is a detailed description of these options.4.9.1 Show SummarySelect this option to view summary information and main details for all connected and pre-configured SUs. For each SU, the following information is displayed:MAC AddressSU NameSU Type: BMAX CPE, PRO CPE, PRO-L CPE, Si CPE. SU Status (Permanent or Temporary)SUID (an ID allocated to each SU by the connected AU)Registration Status (In Service, Out Of Service)Configured SW File Name: The SW File configured in the NPU (together with the Configured Operation). Configured SW Version: The SW Version of the SW File configured in the NPU.
SU MenuBreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 151Configured Operation: The operation to be performed with the Configured SW File when the SU is connected, as well as after each reset: Null (do not load), Load (load to Shadow), Run from Shadow or Set as Main.SW Download Status: The status of the last SW download operation (or None).SU IDU Type: Basic or IDU-NG-4D1WNumber of Gateways: The number of Alvarion Gateways connected to the SU (including IDU-NG-4D1W, if exists).Service Fault Status: OK or reason for denying services to the SU. The reason can be:1Loop problem. A loop was detected on the Ethernet side of the SU. An rbNetworkingError Trap will be sent, and services to this SU will be denied until resetting the SU from the network (NPU) side (provided the problem no longer exists). The problem is detectable through periodical (every 5 seconds) transmissions to the Ethernet link of SNAP packets with "AA AA 03" in the header, and the destination MAC address is 00:10:E7:00:00:01. If the SU receives this packet from the Ethernet, it means that there is a loop and the SU will send an appropriate message to the NPU.2Duplicate SU Name: The SU Name is already in use by another SU. An rbSuDuplicateName Trap will be sent and services to the SU will be denied until another unique name is configured for the SU (see also Section 4.9.7.3.1.1).Summary InformationTotal Number of SUs: The total number of SUs in the database (including connected and pre-configured SUs)Total Connected SUsSUs Connected to AU Slot N, where N=1-4, 7-9.NOTEAnother loop avoidance mechanism that is transparent to the operator is performed by the NPU: The NPU scans packets received from the network (DATA port) and verifies that the SRC MAC in the received packet does not match any of the addresses in the NPU's bridging table. If there is a match it means that the source MAC address of the message received from the network side is identical to a MAC address of a device behind one of the SUs served by the Base Station. In case of a match, the NPU discards all packets designated to the device with this MAC address, until it's aging time expires.
152 OperationChapter 4 - Operation and Administration4.9.2 Show Summary by AUSelect this option to view the total number of SUs connected to a specific AU as well as main details on these SUs, as described in Section 4.9.1. You will be prompted to select the required AU Slot ID.4.9.3 Upgrading SU’s SWTo facilitate efficient upgrade of SU’s SW, tree upgrade levels are available:SU level, for upgrading a single SU, described in Section 4.9.7.2.4.2.AU level, for upgrading all SUs served by a specific AU, as described in Section 4.8.5.2.3.3Base Station level, for upgrading all SUs in the Base Station, as described in the following section.4.9.4 SW Files in NPUUp to four SU SW files can be stored in the NPU. Any of the available files can be loaded by the NPU to a selected SU. When four SU files are stored in the NPU, a new file cannot be added until at least one of the existing files is deleted. Default SW File Names and Default Actions can be defined. These are the SW File and associated Action that will be used for an SU after network entry. This feature simplifies the upgrade process, by defining the SW File and Action for all SUs served by the Base Station. Two different pairs of Default SW File Name and Default Action may be defined, to optionally support SUs using either (Standard Operation Mode or Advanced Si (Advanced - Self Install) Operation Mode. These Default SW File Names and Default Actions are applicable to all SUs in the Base Station using the specified Operation Mode. However, they are not applicable to any SU served by an AU in which the SU SW File (see Section 4.8.5.2.3.3) is other than None (null). They are also not applicable to any Permanent SU whose Configured SW File Name (see Section 4.9.7.2.4.2) is other than None (null).This menu enables viewing the current SU SW files stored in the NPU and deleting selected file(s). It also enables defining the Default SW File Name and Default Action for each Operation Mode. NOTEAn SU that is defined as Temporary will be deleted from the database when it is disconnected.I
SU MenuBreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 1534.9.4.1 Show FilesSelect this option to display the SU SW files currently stored in the NPU. For each available SW file, the file name and the version number are displayed.In addition, the Default SU SW File Name and Default Action for each Operation Mode are also displayed.4.9.4.2 Default SW File (Standard)Select this option to define the Name of the SW File to be used for upgrading an SU using Standard Operation Mode after network entry, and the Action to be taken with this file. Not applicable to any SU served by an AU in which the SU SW File (see Section 4.8.5.2.3.3) is other than None (null). They are also not applicable to any Permanent SU whose Configured SW File Name (see Section 4.9.7.2.4.2) is other than None (null).The Default SW File (Standard) parameters are:4.9.4.2.1 NameThe Name of the SW File to be used for upgrading an SU using Standard Operation Mode after network entry. Should be one of the SU SW Files currently stored in the NPU, or None (null).4.9.4.2.2 ActionThe operation to be performed with the Default SW File (Standard) after network entry of an SU using Standard Operation Mode: None (do not load), Load (load to Shadow), Run from Shadow or Set as Main. Refer to Section 4.9.7.2.4.2.2 for more details on these Actions.4.9.4.3 Default SW File (Advanced Si)Select this option to define the Name of the SW File to be used for upgrading an SU using Advanced Si Operation Mode after network entry, and the Action to be taken with this file. Not applicable to any SU served by an AU in which the SU SW File (see Section 4.8.5.2.3.3) is other than None (null). They are also not applicable to any Permanent SU whose Configured SW File Name (see Section 4.9.7.2.4.2) is other than None (null). The Default SW File (AD-Si) parameters are:NOTEThe Default SW File (Standard) option is not applicable to this release that does not support products operating in Standard Operation Mode.
154 OperationChapter 4 - Operation and Administration4.9.4.3.1 NameThe Name of the SW File to be used for upgrading an SU using Advanced Si Operation Mode after network entry. Should be one of the SU SW Files currently stored in the NPU, or None (null).4.9.4.4 Delete a FileSelect this option and enter the name of an existing SU SW file to delete it from the NPU Flash memory.4.9.5 Select by NameUse this option to select an SU by name to access the SU # menu that will enable managing and configuring the selected SU, viewing its performance information or deleting it from the database.4.9.6 Select by MAC AddressUse this option to select an SU by its MAC address to access the SU # menu that will enable managing and configuring the selected SU, viewing its performance information or deleting it from the database.4.9.7 SU # MenuThe SU # menu enables managing and configuring the selected SU. The SU # menu includes the following options:Show Unit ControlConfigurationPerformance MonitoringShow MAC Addresses Behind SUDelete4.9.7.1 ShowSelect this option to view the current value/selected option of applicable parameters. In addition, some general status information is displayed, as follows:Equipment and Registration Parameters:
SU MenuBreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 155MAC AddressSU MAC Control Number (a number computed from the MAC Address that can be used for verification purposes)SU Name (User Name)SU Type: BMAX CPE, PRO CPE, PRO-L CPE, Si CPE.Operation Mode: Standard for first generation BreezeMAX system, or Advanced Si (Advanced Self Install) for WiMAX-ready systems supporting Self Install SU. In the current release only Advanced Si is applicable. Organization NameAddressCountry SU Status (Permanent or Temporary)Connected AU Slot IDSUID SU IDU TypeNumber of GatewaysService Fault StatusGeneral HW ParametersSerial Number Cumulative Power On Time (hours)RF Card HW RevisionBoot VersionMain Card HW RevisionMain Card HW ConfigurationSW Versions information:Main SW File NameMain SW Version
156 OperationChapter 4 - Operation and AdministrationShadow SW File NameShadow SW VersionRunning From (Main or Shadow)Configured SW File Name Configured SW VersionConfigured OperationMAC ParametersBase Station IDBase Station MaskPhy ParametersBandwidth (MHz)Uplink (Tx) Frequency (MHz)ATPC Parameters and Current Link Quality IndicatorsATPC SupportUplink RSSI (dBm)Uplink SNR (dB)Uplink Current RateDownlink RSSI (dBm)Downlink SNR (dB)Downlink Current Rate TX Power (dBm)Estimated Distance from BS (m). The accuracy is from several hundreds of meters for line-of-sight links to 1500 meters for non-line-of-sight links. Bridging ParametersEnable/Disable Limit on Number of Supported DevicesMaximum Number of Supported Devices
SU MenuBreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 157Bridge Aging Time (minutes)Si CPE ParametersAntenna Selection: The antenna configured locally in the Si CPE¾Internal Antenna (1 - 6)¾External (7) ¾Automatic (8) Interface Type (Ethernet or USB. Smart Card Status (Installed/Not Installed/Fault)Frequency Scanning ParametersStart Rx FrequencyEnd Rx FrequencyScanning Main StepIntermediate Step MaskBest BST/AU ParametersBest BST/AU SupportBest BST/AU IDBest BST/AU ID MaskSelected BST/AU IDSelected Downlink (Rx) FrequencyBest BST/AU Table: includes details of all applicable BST/AUs: BST/AU ID, Downlink (Rx) Frequency, SNR (dB), Rx Antenna Number.4.9.7.2 Unit ControlThe SU Unit Control menu enables defining the SU's status, resetting the SU and managing the SW versions of the unit.The Unit Control menu includes the following options:Status
158 OperationChapter 4 - Operation and AdministrationResetSet Factory DefaultsSW Version Control4.9.7.2.1 SU StatusThe SU Status parameter enables defining the status of the SU, which determines the services it can receive.The available options are:1 - Permanent2 - Temporary4.9.7.2.2 Reset UnitSelect this option to reset the unit. To avoid unintentional reset, you will be prompted to confirm the reset request. Changes to some of the configurable parameters are applied only after reset. Refer to Section 4.11 for information on which parameters are changeable in run time and which changes are applied only after reset.4.9.7.2.3 Set Factory DefaultsSelect this option to set the SU parameters to their factory default values. Refer to Section 4.11 for information on the factory default values of these parameters. The parameters will revert to their default values after the next reset.4.9.7.2.4 SW Versions Control (only for Permanent SUs)The SU can contain two SW versions:Main: Each time the SU resets it will reboot using the version defined as Main.Shadow: Normally the Shadow version is the backup version. Each time a new SW File is downloaded to the SU, it will be stored as a Shadow version, replacing the previous Shadow Version.The process of upgrading to a new SW version is controlled by the NPU, and is performed using one of the SU SW files installed in the NPU. If the specified SU SW file does not exist in the SU, it will be downloaded to the SU and the requested NOTEAn SU that is defined as Temporary will be deleted from the database when it is disconnected.
SU MenuBreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 159operation will be executed, as described below. If it already exists in the SU, then actual loading is not necessary. The following options are available in the SW Version Control menu:Show SW VersionsSW File4.9.7.2.4.1 Show SW VersionsSelect this option to view the following information:SW Versions in SU:Main SW File NameMain SW VersionShadow SW File NameShadow SW VersionRunning From: Main or ShadowAvailable Versions in NPU: The available SU SW file names and the SW Version of each file.4.9.7.2.4.2 SW File Select this option to define the Name of the SW File to be used for upgrading the SU after network, and the Action to be taken with this file:4.9.7.2.4.2.1NameThe Name of the SW File to be used for upgrading the SU after network entry. Should be one of the SU SW Files currently stored in the NPU, or None (null).4.9.7.2.4.2.2ActionThe operation to be performed with the SW File after network entry of the SU: None (do not load), Load (load to Shadow), Run from Shadow or Set as Main:None: Select None to cancel a pending request for another operation (an operations will be executed only after the next reset).Download: Select this option to download a specified SW file from the NPU to the Shadow memory of the SU.
160 OperationChapter 4 - Operation and AdministrationIf the specified file already exists in the SU, no action will take place.Run from Shadow: Select this option to download a specified SW file from the NPU to the Shadow memory of the SU, reset the SU and reboot using the Shadow version. Note that because the process is controlled by the NPU, the SU will continue running from the Shadow version after reset.If the specified file already exists as the Shadow version (meaning that previously a Download operation was executed for this file name), the only actual operation to take place will be to reset and run from Shadow. If the specified file is the current Main version, no action will take place.Set as Main: Select this option to download a specified SW file from the NPU to the Shadow memory of the SU, reset the SU and reboot using the Shadow version, and then swap the Main and Shadow SW Version, so that the running version (which was previously the Shadow version) will become the Main version, to be used after next reset.If the specified file already exists as the running version and it is defined as the Shadow version (meaning that previously a Download and Run from Shadow operation was executed for this file name), the only actual operation to take place will be to swap the Main and Shadow versions. If it is already defined as the Main version, no action will take place.4.9.7.3 ConfigurationThe SU Configuration menu enables viewing and updating the SU's parameters. The Configuration menu includes the following options:RegistrationMACPhyMultirate and ATPCVoice/Networking GatewaysEthernet PortInstaller Password
SU MenuBreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 161Bridging ParametersLicenseBest BST/AUFrequency Scanning4.9.7.3.1 Registration ParametersThe SU Registration Parameters option in the NPU Monitor enables viewing the SU's Registration parameters. Registration parameters can be configured only locally at the SU (via the Ethernet port).4.9.7.3.1.1 SU NameThe SU Name can only be configured locally in the SU (User Name). The default SU Name given to a new SU during the definition process (see Section 4.9.8) is SU@<SU's MAC Address>. An SU that is added to the database is added as Permanent. When an SU that exists in the database as a Permanent SU is registered, it receives services based on its MAC address, and the default SU Name is replaced by the name configured in the SU (User Name).A Base Station cannot serve two SUs with the same User Name. Upon identifying an SU with an SU Name (User Name) that is identical to that of a previously registered SU, the new SU will be registered (to enable management), but will not receive any services. Its name in the NPU database will be changed to SU@<SU's MAC Address>. The system administrator will be informed of the problem through the Fault Status parameter in any of the relevant Show menus (Fault Status 2) and through a trap message (rbSuDuplicateName trap). If the administrator decides that the SU is legitimate and should receive services, a new User Name must be configured in the SU. The SU will receive services only after configuring it with a User Name that is unique in the Base Station’s database.4.9.7.3.1.2 Organization NameThe Organization Name configured in the SU.4.9.7.3.1.3 AddressThe Address configured in the SU.4.9.7.3.1.4 CountryThe Country name configured in the SU.4.9.7.3.2 MAC ParametersThe SU MAC menu enables viewing/updating the following parameters:
162 OperationChapter 4 - Operation and Administration4.9.7.3.2.1 Base Station IDThe Base Station ID is the identifier of the AU/μBST to which the SU can connect. An SU can be authenticated by an AU/μBST only if the Base Station ID and Base Station ID Mask configured in the SU match the Base Station ID configured for the AU/μBST. When the Best BST/AU Support is disabled, the SU will start searching for available AUs in the range defined by the Base Station ID and Base Station ID Mask, and will try to connect to the first found AU whose Base Station ID is in the defined range.Refer to Section 4.9.7.3.10 for details on the AU selection process When the Best BST/AU Support is enabled.A change in the Base Station ID and Base Station ID Mask will take effect only after resetting the SU.The Base Station ID consists of six groups of up to three digits each, where the range for each group is 0 to 255. The first three groups define the Operator ID, the next two groups define the Cell ID and the sixth group defines the Sector (AU) ID.A change in the Base Station ID is applied only after reset.4.9.7.3.2.2 Base Station ID MaskThe Base Station ID Mask, together with the Base station ID define the AU(s)/μBST(s) that can synchronize with the SU.The Base Station ID Mask consists of 6 groups of up to 3 digits each, where the range of each group is 0 to 255. The first 3 groups form the mask for the Operator ID. The next 2 groups form the mask for the Cell ID, and the last group forms the mask for the Sector ID.A change in the Base Station ID Mask is applied only after reset.4.9.7.3.3 Phy ParametersThe SU Phy menu enables viewing/updating the following parameters:4.9.7.3.3.1 Bandwidth (MHz)The frequency bandwidth used by the radio. A change in the Bandwidth parameter will take effect only after resetting the SU.The available options are:1 - 1.75 MHz2 - 3.5 MHz3 - 5 MHz
SU MenuBreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 1634 - 7 MHz5 - 10 MHzA trial to configure a bandwidth that is not supported by the SU will be rejected.4.9.7.3.3.2 Uplink (Tx) Frequency (MHz)This parameter is not applicable to the current release. In future versions that will support both Standard and Advanced Si Operation Modes it will enable pre-configuring the Uplink Frequency to be used after switching to Standard mode.The Uplink (Tx) Frequency is the frequency used in the uplink (from SU to AU). A change in the Uplink Frequency parameter will take effect only after resetting the SU.The available values depend on the Bandwidth and on the available Frequency Bands in the Frequency Bands Group supported by the AU (see Section 4.7.5). 4.9.7.3.4 Multirate and ATPC ParametersThe Multirate and ATPC mechanism are controlled by the AU (except to the option to temporarily control them locally at the SU for testing purposes). The Show Multirate and ATPC Status and Parameters option enables viewing the current status of the applicable parameters. The Set Rates option can be used to set uplink and downlink rates per SU only when Multirate is disabled.4.9.7.3.4.1 ShowThe Show option enables viewing the current status of the following parameters:Uplink RSSI (dBm)Uplink SNR (dB)Uplink Rate Downlink RSSI (dBm)Downlink SNR (dB)Downlink Rate ATPC SupportTx Power (dBm)
164 OperationChapter 4 - Operation and Administration4.9.7.3.4.2 Set RatesThe Set Rates option is available only when the Multirate algorithm is disabled in the AU (see Section 4.8.5.3.4), allowing to set the Uplink Current Rate and the Downlink Current Rate to any of the available values.The defaults are the last rates used by the Multirate algorithm before it was disabled. For SUs that join the cell when the Multirate algorithm is disabled, the defaults are the applicable Basic Rates.For the available Rate values, see Table 4-5.4.9.7.3.5 Voice/Networking GatewaysThe Voice/Networking Gateways option enables viewing details on the Voice/Networking Gateways connected to the SU. This is applicable only for Alvarion's Gateways supporting the DRAP protocol. For each Gateway, the following details are provided:Gateway Type IP AddressVLAN IDNumber Of Active Calls (applicable only for Voice Gateways)The following gateways are currently available from Alvarion:IDU-NG-4D1W: A Networking Gateway that serves also as an SU IDU, supporting 4 data ports and 1 Wireless LAN port.VG-1D1V: A stand-alone (external) Voice Gateway, supporting 1 data port and 1 POTS port.VG-1D2V: A stand-alone (external) Voice Gateway, supporting 1 data port and 2 POTS ports.4.9.7.3.6 Ethernet PortThe Ethernet Port menu enables configuration of the Ethernet port operation mode (speed and duplex).4.9.7.3.6.1 ShowThe Show option enables viewing the configured and actual operation modes:
SU MenuBreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 165Current Mode: The current operation mode used by the SU.Configured Mode: The operation mode to be used by the SU after the next reset.Detected Mode: The actual operation mode. When the Current Mode is Auto Negotiation, the Detected Mode displays actual speed/duplex parameters used by the SU as a result of the auto negotiation process.4.9.7.3.6.2 UpdateSelect the Update option to configure the Ethernet Port Configuration parameter. The available options are 10 Half, 10 Full, 100 Half, 100 Full and Auto Negotiation.The default is Auto Negotiation.4.9.7.3.7 Installer PasswordThe Installer Password option enables viewing the current Installer Password and configuring a new password. The Installer Password is used for accessing the SU's Monitor (Installer) program locally, using Telnet via the SU's Ethernet port.The Installer Password consists of a string of up to 20 printable characters, case sensitive.4.9.7.3.8 Bridging ParametersThe Bridging Parameters menu enables setting a limit on the maximum number of Ethernet devices behind the SU and configuring the aging time for devices in the SU's bridging table. The Bridging parameters are:4.9.7.3.8.1 Enable/Disable Limit on Number of Supported DevicesIf the Enable/Disable Limit on Number of Supported Devices parameter is set to Disable, the maximum number of supported devices is 512.The default is Disable.4.9.7.3.8.2 Maximum Number of Supported DevicesThis parameter is applicable only when the Enable/Disable Limit on Number of Supported Devices parameter is set to Enable.The available range is from 1 to 512 devices.The default is 512.4.9.7.3.8.3 Bridge Aging TimeThe Bridge Aging Time sets the aging time for all addresses in the SU's Forwarding Data Base.
166 OperationChapter 4 - Operation and AdministrationThe available values are from 1 to 1440 minutes.The default is 3 minutes.4.9.7.3.9 LicenseThe License menu is applicable only to L model CPE. It enables viewing the details of installed licenses and loading a new license (if a required license is available in the CPE Licenses Bank).4.9.7.3.10 Best BST/AUAn SU that can communicate with more than one AU may become associated with the first AU it "finds", not necessarily the best choice in terms of quality of communication. Changes in Base Station deployment and subscriber density can accumulate to create substantial changes in SU performance. The quest for load sharing together with the desire to create best throughput conditions for the SU created the need for the Best AU feature, to enable an SU to connect to the best AU in its neighborhood.When the Best BST/AU feature is enabled, the SU scans all AUs in a predefined range, in all frequencies (according to the frequencies defined in the Frequency Scanning menu as described in Section 4.9.7.3.11) and in all available antennas (according to the local definition in the SU, as indicated by the Antenna Selection parameter in the Show menu of the SU). Each of the AUs with which the SU can communicate (perform initial phase of network entry) is given a quality mark based on the quality of the signal at which it is received by the SU. At the end of the scanning period, the SU reaches a Best AU decision according to the information gathered. The AU with the highest quality mark is selected as the Best AU, and the SU will immediately try to associate with it at the relevant frequency. The range used for scanning is defined by the Base Station ID parameters of the SU. The initial range can be limited by defining a preferred range of AUs, and selecting the best AU in the preferred range. If no AU is found in the preferred range, the SU will scan the entire range.The Best BST/AU Parameters menu includes the following options:4.9.7.3.10.1 ShowThe Show option enables viewing the following:Best BST/AU SupportPreferred BST/AU IDPreferred BST/AU ID Mask
SU MenuBreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 167Selected BST/AU ID Selected Downlink (Rx) FrequencyBest BST/AU Table, displaying for each AU with which the SU can communicate (including the selected AU) the following parameters:BST/AU IDDownlink (Rx) FrequencySNR (dB)Rx Antenna4.9.7.3.10.2 UpdateThe Update option enables configuration of the following parameters (changes in Best BST/AU parameters take effect only after reset):4.9.7.3.10.2.1Best BST/AU SupportThe Best BST/AU Support parameter allows enabling of disabling the Best BST/AU feature in the SU.If the Best BST/AU Support feature is disabled, the SU will start scanning and select the first found AU.4.9.7.3.10.2.2Preferred BST/AU ID and Preferred BST/AU ID MaskThese two parameters define the initial range for scanning in order to find the best AU. The SU will select the best AU within this range. If no AU is found within this range, the SU will continue searching in the entire range defined by the Base Station ID and Base Station ID Mask parameters.The Preferred BST/AU ID and Preferred BST/AU ID Mask consist of 6 groups of up to 3 digits each, where the range of each group is 0 to 255. The first 3 groups form the base address/mask for the Operator ID. The next 2 groups form the base address/mask for the Cell ID, and the last group forms the base address/mask for the Sector ID.4.9.7.3.11 Frequency ScanningThe Frequency Scanning menu enables viewing and updating the set of frequencies to be used during the scanning process. The Frequency Scanning parameters are Start Rx Frequency, End Rx Frequency, Scanning Main Step and Intermediate Step Mask. The set of frequencies to be scanned is defined as follows:
168 OperationChapter 4 - Operation and AdministrationThe “main” frequencies are defined by the Start Frequency and Main Step, using the formula F(N) =Start Frequency + N*Main Step (F(0) = Start Frequency, F(1) = Start Frequency + Main Step,...). End Frequency is the upper limit.The Intermediate Step Mask can be used to define additional frequencies using a finer resolution. The Intermediate Step Mask includes up to 8 entries that include numbers from 1 to 8 (or none). The intermediate steps are defined as follows:For example, the Scan step Mask 1,2,5 means that the scanned frequencies are: Start Frequency, Start Frequency + 125 KHz, Start Frequency + 500 KHz, Start Frequency +N*Main Step, Start Frequency +N*Main Step + 125 KHz, Start Frequency +N*Main Step + 500 KHz (N=1, 2,...). End Frequency is the upper limit for the scanned frequencies).The Frequency Scanning menu includes the following options:4.9.7.3.11.1 ShowThe Show option enables viewing the following:Start Rx FrequencyTable 4-6: Intermediate Step MaskNumber included in Mask Effect on scanned frequencies setNone Only Start Frequency + N*Main Step [F(1), F(2)....F(N)]1 Start Frequency, Start Frequency + N*Main Step [F(0)F(1), F(2)....F(N)]2 Start Frequency + N*Main Step + 125 KHz (Start + 125 KHz is scanned only if 1 is included in mask)3 Start Frequency + N*Main Step + 250 KHz (Start + 250 KHz is scanned only if 1 is included in mask)4 Start Frequency + N*Main Step + 375 KHz (Start + 375 KHz is scanned only if 1 is included in mask)5 Start Frequency + N*Main Step + 500 KHz (Start + 500 KHz is scanned only if 1 is included in mask)6 Start Frequency + N*Main Step + 625 KHz (Start + 625 KHz is scanned only if 1 is included in mask)7 Start Frequency + N*Main Step + 750 KHz (Start + 750 KHz is scanned only if 1 is included in mask)8 For a bandwidth of 3.5 MHz: Start Frequency + N*Main Step + 875 KHz (Start + 875 KHz is scanned only if 1 is included in mask)For a bandwidth of 5 MHz: Start Frequency + N*Main Step + 1250 KHz (Start + 1250 KHz is scanned only if 1 is included in mask)
SU MenuBreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 169End Rx FrequencyScanning Main StepIntermediate Step Mask (Configured) Intermediate Step Mask (Actual)Discrete Frequencies (or “No discrete frequency configured”): The discrete frequencies (if any) configured in the SU, to be used in the scanning process in addition to the frequencies defined by the Frequency Scanning parameters. Discrete Frequencies are configurable only locally at the SU.4.9.7.3.11.2 UpdateThe Update menu enables configuration of the following parameters (changes in Frequency Scanning parameters take effect only after reset):4.9.7.3.11.2.1Start Rx Frequency (MHz)The lowest frequency in the range of frequencies to be scanned.The available values depend on the frequency range defined by the Frequency Bands belonging to the applicable Frequency Bands Group (see Section 4.7.5)4.9.7.3.11.2.2End Rx Frequency (MHz)The highest frequency in the range of frequencies to be scanned.The available values depend on the frequency range defined by the Frequency Bands belonging to the applicable Frequency Bands Group (see Section 4.7.5)4.9.7.3.11.2.3Scanning Main Step (KHz)The Main Scanning Step, that together with the Scan Step Mask define the frequencies to be scanned between the Start and End Rx Frequencies. For a Bandwidth of 3.5 MHz, the range is from 125 KHz to 1750 KHz, in steps of 125 KHz.For a Bandwidth of 5 MHz, the range is from 125 KHz to 5000 KHz, in steps of 125 KHz. 4.9.7.3.11.2.4Scan Step MaskThe Scan Step Mask includes up to 8 entries of numbers between 1 to 8, that defined the intermediate scanning steps as described above.
170 OperationChapter 4 - Operation and AdministrationThe highest step defined by the Scan Step Mask must be higher than the Scanning Main Step.4.9.7.4 Performance MonitoringThe Performance Monitoring sub-menu provides the following options:Ports CountersBurst Error Rate Counters4.9.7.4.1 SU Ports CountersThe SU Ports Counters menu enables viewing or resetting the Ethernet and Wireless ports counters. The information displayed for each counter is the accumulated number since the last time the counters were reset. The counters are reset each time the SU is reset, or upon activating the Reset Counters option.The displayed counters include:Ethernet Port CountersData Bytes Received: The total number of data bytes received from the Ethernet link. Management frames and frames with errors are not included.Data Bytes Discarded on Rx: The number of bytes discarded when a packet received from the Ethernet port is not forwarded to the Wireless port due to bridging or classification considerations.Data Bytes Transmitted: The total number of data bytes transmitted to the Ethernet link. Management frames and frames with errors are not included.Data Bytes Discarded on Tx: The number of bytes discarded when a packet received from the Wireless port is not forwarded to the Ethernet port due to bridging or VLAN considerations.Wireless Port CountersData Bytes Received: The total number of data bytes received from the Wireless link. Management frames and frames with errors are not included.Data Bytes Discarded on Rx: The number of bytes in packets received from the Wireless link and discarded due to MAC protocol receive errors,
SU MenuBreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 171such as duplicate sequence number, wrong sequence number etc. (not CRC errors).Data Bytes Transmitted: The total number of data bytes transmitted to the Wireless link. MAC Management frames and frames with errors are not included.Data Bytes Discarded on Tx: The number of bytes in packets discarded due to congestion in the wireless medium.ARQ Enabled Bytes Transmitted: The number of bytes transmitted over BE and NRT connections. Applicable only if the ARQ mechanism in the AU is enabled.Bytes Retransmitted: The number of unacknowledged bytes that were retransmitted. Retransmissions are applicable only to BE and NRT connections, provided the ARQ mechanism in the AU is enabled.Retransmission Rate (%): Retransmission Rate in percents is defined as: 100*(Bytes Retransmitted)/(ARQ Enabled Bytes Transmitted).4.9.7.4.2 Burst Error Rate CountersIn the downlink, each burst uses a single rate and may include data intended for several SUs. In the uplink, each burst is from a different SU (also using a single rate).The Burst Error rate Counters option enables viewing or resetting the Burst Error Rate counters. The information displayed for each rate in uplink and downlink is the accumulated number since the last time the counters were reset. For each direction (uplink/downlink) the displayed information includes the following statistics for each rate:Total BurstError BurstsError RateThe counters are reset each time the SU is reset, or upon activating the Reset option.
172 OperationChapter 4 - Operation and Administration4.9.7.5 Show MAC Addresses Behind SUSelect this option to view a list of the MAC Addresses of the devices behind the SU. If VLAN behind the SU is used, the VLAN ID used by each device is displayed next to its MAC Address.4.9.7.6 DeleteThis option enables deleting the selected SU from the database.4.9.8 Add New SUSelect the Add New SU option to add a new SU to the database. The Add New SU sub-menu includes the following parameters:SU MAC AddressSW File Name: The SW File to be used by the SU. Should be either a File Name known to exist in the SU or an SU SW File Name in the NPU.Operation: The action to be performed with the specified SW File after the SU connects to the AU (None, Download, Run from Shadow or Set as Main).A new SU that attempts to communicate with the base station when the base station operates in Advanced Mode will be registered only if its MAC address exists in the database.4.9.9 Clear All Configured SU SW FilesSelect this SU to clear (delete) the Configured SW File in all Permanent SUs served by the Base Station.
Services MenuBreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 1734.10 Services Menu4.10.1 Introduction to Services4.10.1.1 Services, Subscribers and Service ProfilesA Service is a virtual connection between a Subscriber's application and the Network Resource. The Network Resource could be Internet, Content Provider, Corporate Network, etc.The Services are implemented as IEEE 802.16 connections within the wireless domain. Each Service can include up to 4 uplink and 4 downlink connections. Implementation within the provider's backbone domain depends on the specific backbone network.A Subscriber is an entity that may be associated with any number of devices connected to any number of SUs. Each Service associates a certain Service Profile with Subscriber's device(s) behind a specific SU.The Service Profile's properties depend on the Service Type. All data Services have the following properties:VLAN ID based Classification: Each Service can be associated with up to 16 VLAN IDs, enabling creation of VLANs within the wireless domain and differentiation of services to different end-users behind the same SU based on VLAN ID classification.Quality of Service (QoS) and Priority based Classification: Up to 4 uplink and 4 downlink QoS profiles can be assigned to each Service. The data will be mapped onto these connections by either IEEE 802.1p or DSCP priority tags. This will lead to creation of the corresponding number of Uplink and Downlink connections supporting differentiated services to up to 4 applications based on either IEEE 802.1p or DSCP prioritization schemes. In cases where prioritization is not used, a single pair of uplink/downlink connections is created.Forwarding Rules: A Forwarding Rule is assigned to each Service, defining various features that define the handling of certain message types in the NOTEThe Subscriber entity is not applicable when Services are provisioned using a RADIUS server.
174 OperationChapter 4 - Operation and Administrationwireless domain. These may include Unicast and Multicast Forwarding rules, QoS Profile for Multicasts and Unknown Address Forwarding Policy. The available features depend on the Service Type. The data may be switched only between the Services that share the same Forwarding Rule. In all other respects the service functions as a standard Bridge.Aggregation: Several Services in the Wireless Domain may be aggregated into a single Virtual Private Link (VPL) in the backbone domain.Priority Marking: Ethernet frames transmitted to the backbone may be marked with a configurable priority (DSCP or IEEE 802.1p), enabling the upstream network to handle the traffic accordingly.Auto-configuration: The Ethernet Addresses of the Subscribers' PCs are automatically learnt just as in a standard Bridge. For each Ethernet Address it also learns the VLAN behind the SU it belongs to.Currently, the following Service types are supported:L2 (layer 2) Data ServicePPPoE Data ServiceVoice Service4.10.1.2 Service Types4.10.1.2.1 L2 ServiceL2 (Layer 2) service transports Layer 2 (Ethernet) frames between the subscriber's site and the Network Resource located behind the provider's backbone and/or between the subscriber's sites. It is assumed that the backbone either supports encapsulation of the Layer 2 frames (e.g. over ATM) or routes the frames according to the applicable Layer 3 protocol, which could be different from IP. The Network Resource is assumed to be a corporate network.4.10.1.2.2 PPPoE ServicePPPoE (Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet) Access service provides connectivity between a PPPoE enabled devices at the subscriber's site and a PPPoE aware NOTEAn L2 Service supports also DRAP-based Voice Service, as described in the next page.
Services MenuBreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 175Access Concentrator behind the Base Station. The frames are forwarded only between the Subscribers' PCs and the PPPoE Access Concentrator. Frames that are not PPPoE Ethertype are discarded. In the uplink, frames are never relayed but only forwarded to the Access Concentrator. In the downlink, broadcasts are allowed only in cases of unknown addresses.4.10.1.2.3 Voice ServiceThe Voice over IP (VoIP) service provides telephony services through an external Voice Gateway connected to the Subscriber Unit's data port. The VoIP service is designed for Alvarion's Voice Gateways, using the proprietary DRAP signaling protocol to identify VoIP sessions and to verify optimal handling of these sessions. Upon provisioning of such a service, the system automatically handles Signaling and RTP connections establishment, including QoS issues.DRAP (Dynamic Resources Allocation Protocol) is a protocol between the Gateway (installed behind the Subscriber Unit) and the base station. The protocol provides an auto-discovery mechanism for the Gateway, so that no specific configuration is needed and the Gateway can automatically locate and register with the base station. The protocol uses a few simple messages enabling a Voice Gateway to request resources when calls are made, and the base station to dynamically allocate them.Using the DRAP solution has the following advantages:Maintain telephony toll quality over the wireless network - dynamically allocate Continuous Grant (CG) connections for active calls, maintaining the QoS and low jitter needed for toll-quality voice services.Allocate CG bandwidth only for the duration of the call - the air resources are allocated and released according to the DRAP messages, which are based on the VoIP signaling. This dynamic allocation ensures efficient use of the air resources.Prevent callers from placing calls if a sector is overloaded - the operator can control and limit the maximum number of concurrent calls per wireless sector and per end user voice gateway. Thus, the operator has complete control of its network and the resources in it.NOTEThe DRAP-based Voice Service is also available when an L2 Service is provisioned.
176 OperationChapter 4 - Operation and AdministrationAutomatic support of Codec changing in a VoIP call - the DRAP messages update the BreezeMAX equipment on any Codec change or subsequent bandwidth allocation change during the call, hence the exact required bandwidth is always provided. This is essential in fax transmissions where the call might begin with one Codec and switch to another to accommodate the fax transmission.VoIP stack is always in synch with the wireless transport - as the DRAP is integrated into the VoIP stack all calls are terminated according to the VoIP standard. Even if no resources are available, the voice gateway receives an appropriate message from the BreezeMAX system and sends the required signaling message according to the VoIP standard used.4.10.1.3 Supporting Generic (3rd Party) VoIP ServicesWhen using VoIP devices that do not support the DRAP protocol, the required service can be provided through a Data (L2) service with a CG QoS (see Section 4.10.4.7) that is defined in accordance with the estimated bandwidth required for the service. The required bandwidth depends on several parameters, such as codec type, sample rate and T.38 Fax Relay support. The service parameters depend also on the marking features of the VoIP equipment (the ability to use either DSCP or 802.1p to distinguish between RTP, RTCP and VoIP Signaling, and Data traffic). The system includes several pre-configured Service Profiles for commonly used VoIP applications.For details on the pre-configured profiles, refer to Section 4.10.8. For details on defining Service Profiles for generic VoIP devices, refer to Appendix B.4.10.1.4 Global and Local ProfilesGlobal Profiles (Service Profiles and their components - Forwarding Rules, Priority Classifiers and QoS Profiles) are centrally managed profiles that are distributed to Base Stations as XML files via TFTP. Global profiles can be changed only by loading a new XML file; they cannot be created, modified or deleted by either the Monitor program or SNMP. This concept provides fully centralized control over these profiles, and ensures that the same profiles with identical content exist in all Base Stations (assuming that distribution is performed properly).Local Profiles are intended primarily for special cases when there is a need to define a Service Profile in one or several Base Stations using either the Monitor Program or SNMP. There is no way to guarantee that Local profiles with the same name in two or more Base Stations will have identical content. Local profiles can be added, modified or deleted using either the Monitor program or SNMP.
Services MenuBreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 177Changes in Global profiles (add, update or delete) are applied by loading a new XML file. A newly loaded XML file replaces completely all the Global profiles in the database.4.10.1.5 Authentication and Service ProvisioningThe Authentication and Service Provisioning process is affected by the Base Station’s Service Mode (Advanced or Quick) and by specific SU Status (Permanent or Temporary). A Permanent SU (an SU that is defined as such in the database) is provisioned with the “permanent” Service(s) defined for it in the database (if any). The Services are provisioned based on the SU’s MAC Address. A Temporary SU (not defined as Permanent in the database) will be authenticated and provisioned with the Service(s) defined for it by the RADIUS Authentication server. The authentication and service provisioning are based on the SU Name (User Name) and User Password. The SU will be added to the database as a Temporary SU.If rejected by the RADIUS Authentication server (or RADIUS Authentication server is not available), then the service provisioning depends on Service Mode:In Advanced Service Mode, the SU will be rejected (no services).In Quick Service Mode, the SU will be able to use default services based on the Default Service Profile(s), provided it uses the “quick” User Password “quickynikinyoky”. It is possible to define up to two Default Service Profiles: one for PPPoE services and one for L2 or Voice services (note that L2 service can support also Voice services). The SU will be added to the database as a Temporary SU. The quickynikinyoky User Password will be sent by the SU in the following cases:Aquickynikinyoky is the User Password configured in the SUBA new SU with a null User Name and User Password: The SU will send its MAC Address as User Name with User Password quickynikinyoky. In this case, the NOTEIf a Global Service Profile component (Forwarding Rule, Priority Classifier, QoS Profile) is in use by a Local Service Profile (or component), it will not be affected (deleted or updated) by loading a new XML file.This is an undesired situation, as it may lead to a situation where there is no full synchronization of the Global profiles database among all Base Stations. To avoid this situation, do not use Global components (Forwarding Rule, Priority Classifier, QoS Profile) in Local Service Profiles.
178 OperationChapter 4 - Operation and AdministrationSU may receive specific services from the RADIUS Authentication server based on these credentials. CNull (blank) User Password (non-null User Name)Quick Mode is the recommended Service Mode. RADIUS Authorization and Accounting servers (may be implemented in the same server) are required for proper service provisioning. A Base Station will reject an SU if its name (User Name) is identical to that of another SU that is already served by the Base Station However, several SUs connected to different Base Stations may be authenticated and provisioned with services even if they use the same User Name and User Password. The maximum number of duplicate SUs using the same User Name and User Password that may be authenticated by the Authentication server (Duplicate Sessions) is configured in the RADIUS Accounting server. The service provisioning information sent by the RADIUS Authentication server to the Base Station includes for each service (up to a maximum of 5 services) the name of the Service Profile and VLAN parameters. In addition, the authentication message includes also the Session Timeout and Termination Action. If the Termination Action is Default, the Session (services to the SU) will be terminated. If the Termination Action is RADIUS-request, the Base Station will try to re-authenticate the user. If the service configuration in the Authentication server has been changed, the services provisioned to the SU (if re-authenticated) will be updated accordingly.4.10.1.6 Using VLANs and VPLsVLANs can be used for creating within the BreezeMAX network virtual groups of multiple end-users (stations) belonging to the same organization (Subscriber). They may also be used to differentiate between different end-users (stations) connected to the same SU.In the backbone, VPL ID (Virtual Private Link ID) is used. VPL is a virtual connection between two points on the network, such as a base station and a service provider or corporate network, identified by the VPL ID, with functionality that is similar to VLAN ID (VLAN on the backbone network). Typically, it is used to separate between different traffic types (e.g. Data and Voice), or traffic to/from different ISPs or different corporate networks.If the VPL ID is None (No VPL ID) and VLAN Transparency Mode is Off, frames arriving from the infrastructure side with a VLAN ID tag will be discarded. Tagged frames arriving from the wireless domain will be forwarded without a VLAN tag, unless 802.1p Priority Marking is used. If 802.1p Priority Marking is used, tagged frames will be forwarded with VPL ID = 0 and the defined Priority Marking Value.
Services MenuBreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 179If the VPL ID is other than None (applicable only if VLAN Transparency Mode is Off), all untagged frames forwarded to the network will be tagged with the VPL ID. The VLAN ID in tagged frames arriving from the wireless network will be replaced by the VPL ID.The guidelines that should be followed when defining VPL ID are:Several Service Profiles may share the same VPL ID. However, the following rules must be met:Any number of L2 and/or VoIP Service Profiles may share the same VPL ID, provided they all use the same Forwarding Rule.Any number of PPPoE Service Profiles may share the same VPL ID, provided they all use the same Forwarding Rule.Any number of L2, VoIP and PPPoE Service Profiles may share the same VPL ID, provided that all L2/Voice Service Profiles use the same Forwarding Rule A, and all PPPoE Service Profiles use the same Forwarding Rule B, where A and B are different.The VLAN Transparency Mode defines the method of transferring packets to the operator's upstream network. When set to On, data packets sent from the Base Station to the backbone will be transferred transparently. The VPL ID parameter is not applicable to Service Profiles with VLAN Transparency Mode On.For tagged packets, the VPL ID will be their VLAN tag.For untagged packets, the VPL ID will be None.For packets received from the network, the forwarding decision will be according to the packet's VPL ID. If the VPL ID is unknown (either None or not included in the list of VPL IDs defined for any of the existing, non-transparent Service Profiles), the system will assume this is a transparent VLAN packet (if at least one transparent Service is defined) and transfer it with the original VLAN tag (or untagged if there is no VLAN tag).For transparent services, VLAN Classification Mode can be set to On to enable downlink classification based on both the MAC Address and VLAN ID, to support applications with multiple VLAN IDs per a single MAC address. All Services assigned to the same SU must be configured with the same VLAN Classification Mode (Either On or Off). If VLAN Classification Mode is On, only a single VLAN ID can be defined for the Service. This means that the allowed combinations are:
180 OperationChapter 4 - Operation and AdministrationHybrid VLAN Mode is Off and the VLAN List includes a single VLAN ID.Hybrid VLAN Mode is On and the VLAN List is empty.For transparent services it is also possible to configure an Access VLAN to be used with untagged packets received on the Ethernet port of the SU. This parameter is applicable only for a transparent service with Hybrid Mode set to On, or a transparent service with Hybrid Mode set to Off and an empty VLAN list.A maximum of one Access VLAN can be defined per SU.Hybrid VLAN Mode of operation enables classification of both tagged and untagged packets or untagged packets only, according to the following rules:The guidelines that should be followed when defining VLAN IDs and related parameters are:A specific VLAN ID behind a certain SU can be associated only with a single Service of a certain Service Type. It is not possible to define two Services of the same Service Type for the same SU and VLAN ID. However, the same SU and VLAN ID can be associated with two Services of different Service Types, excluding the combination of L2 Service and Voice Service.For each Service Type, a maximum of one Service that enables forwarding of untagged packets can be assigned to an SU. Forwarding of untagged packets is supported when either Hybrid VLAN Mode is On, or Hybrid VLAN Mode is Off and the VLAN List is empty. It is not possible to define for the same SU two Services of the same Service Type that enable forwarding of untagged packets. However, the same SU and untagged packets can be associated with two Services of different Service Types, excluding the combination of L2 Service and Voice Service.Table 4-7: Hybrid VLAN ModeHybrid VLAN Mode VLAN List Forwarded PacketsOff Exists Only packets tagged with a VLAN ID that exists in the VLAN List. VLAN List can include up to 16 entries.Empty All (both untagged and tagged with any VLAN ID)On Exists Untagged packets, and packets tagged with a VLAN ID that exists in the VLAN List. VLAN List can include up to 15 entries.Empty Only untagged frames.
Services MenuBreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 181The maximum total number of VLAN IDs behind the same SU is 16 (15 when there is a Service with Hybrid VLAN Mode On is assigned to the SU).The combination of VLAN Transparency Service On, Hybrid VLAN Mode Off and an empty VLAN List means that all packets are forwarded. This combination should be used only if the Service Provider can ensure that there will not be conflicts between VLAN IDs used by devices behind the SU and existing VPL IDs.To avoid conflicts, a transparent Service Profile cannot be assigned to a Service if the Service's VLAN ID list includes a VLAN ID that is equal to any of the already assigned VPL IDs.The combination VLAN Transparency Mode On, Hybrid VLAN Mode On and an empty VLAN List means that only untagged frames should be forwarded. Such a Service cannot be assigned if there is an assigned non-transparent Service with VPL ID = None.4.10.2 Introduction to Filtering FeaturesThe Filtering features allow a network operator to control the traffic in the system by forwarding or discarding packets according to a set of rules based on multiple allow/deny criteria. This provides both improved network security and better utilization of the wireless medium.The filtering is done at the base station, controlling the traffic between the network and the wireless link. The filtering features enable:Filtering packets arriving from the network interface (From Network Filtering), using a set of either Layer 2 or Layer 3/Layer 4 Filtering Rules.Filtering packets arriving from the wireless link (From Wireless Filtering), using a set of either Layer 2 or Layer 3/Layer 4 Filtering Rules.Discarding packets to/from specific MAC addresses (MAC Address Deny List). This is applicable to MAC Addresses behind SUs.The following figure describes the filtering functionality.
182 OperationChapter 4 - Operation and Administration The filtering definition process includes the following steps:1Defining list(s) of Filtering Rules. Each Filtering Rule defines a combination of values for certain packet fields. Filtering Rules can be of 2 types: Layer 2 Filtering Rules (using fields of the Ethernet frame) and Layer 3/Layer 4 Filtering Rules (using fields of the IP and/or UDP/TCP headers). 2Associating each Interface (From Network, From Wireless Link) with a set of either Layer 2 or Layer 3/Layer 4 filters from the relevant Filtering Rules lists, and defining the action to be taken upon receiving a packet that matches any of the selected Filtering Rules: Allow (forward) or Deny (discard).4.10.3 Common Operations in Services MenuExcept for the General submenu, all submenus available in the Services menu enable viewing, editing, deleting and adding applicable entities, such as Subscribers, Services, Service Profiles, etc.Some or all of the following options are available in all submenus of the Services menu:4.10.3.1 Show AllSelect this option to see the current details of all entities in the applicable submenu (Subscribers, Services, etc.).4.10.3.2 Show byThis option enables selecting an entity by a specific identifier such as Name or MAC Address. Select this option and enter the appropriate parameter's value to access the menu for a selected entity. This will enable you to choose from the following options:Figure 4-2: Filtering Functionality
Services MenuBreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 183Show: Select this option to view the details of the selected entity.Update: Select this option to edit the details of the selected entity.Delete: Select this option to remove the selected entity from the database.4.10.3.3 Show ListSelect this option to view all defined entities in the applicable submenu sorted by the entity type ID (Subscriber ID, Service ID, etc.). The entity ID is an identifier attached automatically to each new entity. You can select a specific entity by its ID. This will open the Selected Entity menu with the Show, Update and Delete options described above.4.10.3.4 SelectSelect this option to select an entity by its Name. This will open the Selected Entity menu with the Show, Update and Delete options described above.4.10.3.5 AddSelect this option to add a new entity to the database.4.10.4 The Services MenuThe Services menu includes the following options:GeneralSubscribersServicesService ProfileForwarding RulesPriority ClassifiersQoS ProfilesFiltering RulesInterface Filtering
184 OperationChapter 4 - Operation and AdministrationMAC Addresses Deny ListXML File Parsing Errors4.10.4.1 GeneralThe General menu includes general service parameters. It includes the following options:4.10.4.1.1 ShowSelect this option to view the current values/options of the General parameters.4.10.4.1.2 UpdateSelect this option to update any of the General parameters. The General parameters are:4.10.4.1.2.1 Service ModeThe Service Mode of the Base Station.The available options are:1 - Advanced2 - QuickThe default Service Mode is Quick (2).For more information on Service Modes refer to Section 4.10.1.5.4.10.4.1.2.2 Default L2/Voice Service ProfileThe default L2 or Voice Service Profile to be used by temporary SUs in Quick Mode.Available profiles - any of the L2 or Voice Service Profiles existing in the database. 4.10.4.1.2.3 Default PPPoE Service ProfileThe default PPPoE Service Profile to be used by temporary SUs in Quick Mode.Available profiles - any of the PPPoE Service Profiles existing in the database.4.10.4.2 SubscribersThe Subscribers menu enables defining new Subscribers, viewing or editing details of previously defined Subscribers and removing Subscribers from the database.The Subscriber entity is applicable only to Permanent Services (services that are defined in the NPU’s database and are provisioned to Permanent SUs).
Services MenuBreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 185The Subscribers database in the NPU can hold up to 1024 Subscribers. The configurable Subscriber's parameters are:4.10.4.2.1 Subscriber NameThis is the name of the subscriber, which must be unique for the entire network. A Subscriber Name consists of up to 32 printable characters.4.10.4.2.2 First NameAn optional parameter for information purposes. A First Name consists of up to 50 printable characters.4.10.4.2.3 Last NameAn optional parameter for information purposes. A Last Name consists of up to 50 printable characters.4.10.4.2.4 DescriptionAn optional parameter for information purposes. A Description consists of up to 50 printable characters.4.10.4.2.5 Admin StatusThe administrative status of the Subscriber can be either Enabled or Disabled. Select Disabled to disable all services to the Subscriber.4.10.4.3 ServicesThere are two types of Services:A “permanent” Service is defined locally in the database of the Base Station and it defines a Service to be provisioned to a Permanent SU. A “temporary” Service includes all the attributes of a Service provisioned to a Temporary SU that are received from a RADIUS server. A “temporary” Service is managed by the RADIUS server and cannot be updated or deleted locally using either the Monitor program or SNMP. The Services menu enables viewing all Services, defining new permanent Services, editing details of previously defined permanent Services and removing permanent Services from the database.
186 OperationChapter 4 - Operation and AdministrationThe Services database in the NPU (Base Station) can hold up to 4095 Services. The Services menu also enables viewing and resetting the Service counters.4.10.4.3.1 Service ParametersThe Service's parameters are:4.10.4.3.1.1 NameA Service Name consists of up to 32 printable characters.A “temporary” Service (received from a RADIUS server) is given a default name of <SU MAC Address>#<Number>.4.10.4.3.1.2 Subscriber NameThe Subscriber to which the Service is allocated.The Subscriber Name must be that of a Subscriber that exists in the database.The Subscriber Name is not applicable to a “temporary” Service (received from a RADIUS server).4.10.4.3.1.3 Service Profile NameThe Service Profile to be used in the Service.The Service Profile Name must be that of a Service that exists in the database.4.10.4.3.1.4 SU MAC AddressThe MAC Address of the SU associated with the Service.The SU MAC Address must be that of a Permanent SU that exists in the database.The MAC Address can be changed (in Update option) only if the Admin status of the Service is set to Disabled.4.10.4.3.1.5 VLAN ListA list of VLAN IDs listing the VLAN IDs behind the SU associated with the applicable Subscriber.NOTEThe proper process of removing a Service is:1. Disable the Service (set the Admin Status to Disable)2. Delete the Service.If the Service is not disabled prior to being the deleted, VLAN ID included in the VLAN List of the deleted Service may still be used by other Services to the same SU that use the same Forwarding Rule as the deleted Service.
Services MenuBreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 187The list includes VLAN IDs, each one in the range of 0 to 4094, separated by commas. Select null (empty string) for No VLAN. The VLAN List is not displayed in Show menus if the list is empty.When Hybrid VLAN Mode is Off, the VLAN List can include up to 16 VLAN IDs. When Hybrid VLAN Mode is On, the VLAN List can include up to 15 VLAN IDs (the 16th entry is reserved for No VLAN).The maximum total number of VLAN IDs behind a single SU is 16. (15 when there is a Service with Hybrid VLAN Mode On is assigned to the SU).Refer to Section 4.10.1.6 for guidelines regarding VLAN ID configuration.4.10.4.3.1.6 Hybrid VLAN ModeHybrid VLAN Mode of operation enables classification of both tagged and untagged packets or untagged packets only, according to the following rules:Note that for each Service Type, a maximum of one Service that enables forwarding of untagged packets can be assigned to an SU. Forwarding of untagged packets is supported when either Hybrid VLAN Mode is On, or Hybrid VLAN Mode is Off and the VLAN List is empty. It is not possible to define for the same SU two Services of the same Service Type that enable forwarding of untagged packets. However, the same SU and untagged packets can be associated with two Services of different Service Types, excluding the combination of L2 Service and Voice Service.4.10.4.3.1.7 VLAN Classification ModeThe VLAN Classification feature enables using VLAN ID (in addition to destination MAC address) for classification of transparent service downlink traffic before transmission to the destination MAC address. The VLAN Classification feature supports applications where multiple VLANs are associated with a single MAC address, allowing to assign different services to different VLANs.Table 4-8: Hybrid VLAN ModeHybrid VLAN Mode VLAN List Forwarded PacketsOff Exists Only packets tagged with a VLAN ID that exists in the VLAN List. VLAN List can include up to 16 entries.Empty All (both untagged and tagged with any VLAN ID)On Exists Untagged packets, and packets tagged with a VLAN ID that exists in the VLAN List. VLAN List can include up to 15 entries.Empty Only untagged frames.
188 OperationChapter 4 - Operation and AdministrationVLAN Classification Mode can be set to On only if the following conditions are met:The VLAN Transparency Mode of the applicable Service Profile is set to On.A single VLAN ID is defined for the Service. This means that the allowed combinations are:Hybrid VLAN Mode is Off and the VLAN List includes a single VLAN ID.Hybrid VLAN Mode is On and the VLAN List is empty.All Services assigned to the same SU must be configured with the same VLAN Classification Mode (Either On or Off).4.10.4.3.1.8 Access VLANThe Access VLAN parameter enables defining a VLAN ID to be used with untagged packets received on the Ethernet port of the SU. This parameter is applicable only for a transparent service (VLAN Transparency Mode is On) with Hybrid Mode set to On, or a transparent service with Hybrid Mode set to Off and an empty VLAN list.A tag with the defined Access VLAN will be added by the NPU to untagged packets in the uplink. The tag will be removed by the NPU from packets in the downlink. For a multicast connection, the NPU will send in addition to the VLAN list the single Access VLAN. The SU will be responsible to remove the Access VLAN if it is received on a multicast connection.A maximum of one Access VLAN can be defined per SU.The range is from 1 to 4094 or null for no Access VLAN.4.10.4.3.1.9 Admin StatusThe administrative status of the Service can be either Enabled or Disabled. Select Disabled to disable the Service.4.10.4.3.1.10Operation StatusA read-only display of the operational status that is available in the Show menus only. Up means that the Service is currently in use.4.10.4.3.2 PerformanceThe Performance sub-menu enables viewing and resetting the connections' counters of the Service. For each connection in each direction the following information is displayed:Connection ID and direction
Services MenuBreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 189Connection Type: BE, NRT, RT or CG.QoS Profile Parameters: The values of the relevant QoS Profile's parameters.Bytes Submitted: The number of bytes submitted by upper layers to this connection.Bytes Transmitted: The number of bytes transmitted to the wireless port through this connection, including retransmissions.Bytes Retransmitted: The number of bytes retransmitted to the wireless port through this connection.Bytes Dropped: The number of bytes dropped from this connection due to congestion in the wireless link. (identical to Bytes Discarded).Bytes Discarded: The number of bytes discarded from this connection due to congestion in the wireless link. (identical to Bytes Dropped).Packets Submitted: The number of packets submitted by upper layers to this connection.Packets Transmitted: The number of packets transmitted to the wireless port through this connection, excluding retransmissions.Packets Dropped: The number of packets dropped from this connection due to congestion in the wireless link. (identical to Packets Discarded).Packets Discarded: The number of packets discarded from this connection due to congestion in the wireless link. (identical to Packets Dropped).Average Delay: The average packet delay in milliseconds, measured for this connection over the last 15 seconds. The value is updated every 15 seconds.Delay Variance: The variance (the standard deviation squared) of the packet delay, in milliseconds squared, measured for this connection over the last 15 seconds. The value is updated every 15 seconds.Maximum Delay: The maximum packet delay in milliseconds, measured for this connection over the last 15 seconds. The value is updated every 15 seconds.
190 OperationChapter 4 - Operation and AdministrationData Loss Indicator (%): The percentage of dropped packets, out of the total demand, measured for this connection over the last 15 seconds. The value is updated every 15 seconds.DLI (%) = 100 * (Packets Dropped) / (Packets Submitted)CIR Utilization (%): The CIR utilization measured for an RT or NRT connection over the last 15 seconds. Not applicable for BE and CG connections.k = 100 x (the minimum between bytes transferred and CIR)/CIR is calculated for each 1 second interval. CIR Utilization equals the average of k over the last 15 seconds, and may vary from 0 to 100. The value is updated every 15 seconds.EIR Utilization (%): Excess Information Rate utilization measured for a BE or NRT connection over the last 15 seconds. Not applicable for RT and CG connections. k=100 x (bytes transferred-CIR)/(MIR-CIR) is calculated for each 1 second interval. In BE CIR = 0. The EIR Utilization equals the average of k over the last 15 seconds, and may range from 0 to 100. The value is updated every 15 seconds.Average Throughput (bits/s): The average throughput, in bits/second, measured for this connection over the last 15 seconds. The value is updated every 15 seconds.4.10.4.4 Service ProfilesEach Service Profile defines the properties of the defined service. Each Service Profile is associated with specific Forwarding Rule and Priority Classifier (Priority Classifiers are not applicable to Voice Service Profiles). The Service Profile menu enables viewing all Local and Global Service Profiles in the database, defining new Service Profiles (that will be added to the database as a Local Service Profile), editing details of previously defined Local Service Profiles and removing Local Service Profiles from the database.The Service Profiles database can hold up to 1024 Service Profiles.The Service Profile's parameters are:4.10.4.4.1 Service Profile NameA Service Profile Name consists of up to 32 printable characters.
Services MenuBreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 1914.10.4.4.2 Service TypeThe Service Type of the Service Profile. The Service Type parameter is configurable only when defining a new Service Profile (Add). It is not changeable.The currently available Service Type options are:1 - L2 2 - PPPoE 3 - VoiceFor more details refer to Section 4.10.1.2.4.10.4.4.3 VLAN Transparency ModeThe VLAN Transparency Mode defines the method of transferring packets to the operator's upstream network.When set to On, data packets sent from the Base Station to the backbone will be transferred transparently. The VPL ID parameter is not applicable to Service Profiles with VLAN Transparency Mode On.Also the Forwarding Rule selection parameter is not applicable to transparent Service Profiles. All transparent Service Profiles share a single pre-configured Forwarding Rule, and a pre-configured QoS Profile for multicasts. For details on these profiles refer to Table 4-21 and Table 4-22. The pre-configured Transparent Forwarding Rule can be modified but not deleted.For tagged packets, the VPL ID will be their VLAN tag.For untagged packets, the VPL ID will be None.For packets received from the network, the forwarding decision will be according to the packet's VPL ID. If the VPL ID is unknown (either None or not included in the list of VPL IDs defined for any of the existing, non-transparent Service Profiles), the system will assume this is a transparent VLAN packet (if at least one transparent Service is defined) and transfer it with the original VLAN tag (or untagged if there is no VLAN tag).NOTEThe combination of VLAN Transparency Service On, Hybrid VLAN Mode Off and an empty VLAN List means that all packets are forwarded. This combination should be used only if the Service Provider can ensure that there will not be conflicts between VLAN IDs used by devices behind the SU and existing VPL IDs.
192 OperationChapter 4 - Operation and AdministrationWhen set to Off, data packets sent from the Base Station to the backbone will be transferred with a VLAN tag according to the VPL ID. The VLAN ID in tagged frames arriving from the wireless network will be replaced by the VPL ID. For packets received from the network, the forwarding decision will be according to the Forwarding Rule defined in the Service Profile with a matching VPL ID.To avoid conflicts, a transparent Service Profile cannot be assigned to a Service if the Service's VLAN ID list includes a VLAN ID that is equal to any of the already assigned VPL IDs.4.10.4.4.4 VPL IDA Virtual Private Link ID to be used in the backbone behind the Base Station. The VPL ID parameter is applicable only to Service Profiles with VLAN Transparency Mode Off.To avoid conflicts, it is not allowed to define a VPL ID that is identical to any of the VLAN IDs in the already assigned transparent Services (Services using a Service Profile with VLAN Transparency Mode On).Several Service Profiles may share the same VPL ID. However, the following rules must be met:Any number of L2 and/or VoIP Service Profiles may share the same VPL ID, provided they all use the same Forwarding Rule.Any number of PPPoE Service Profiles may share the same VPL ID, provided they all use the same Forwarding Rule.Any number of L2, VoIP and PPPoE Service Profiles may share the same VPL ID, provided that all L2/Voice Service Profiles use the same Forwarding Rule A, and all PPPoE Service Profiles use the same Forwarding Rule B, where A and B are different.Available values are in the range of 0 to 4094 or null (empty string) for No VPL ID. A value of 4095 is displayed for No VPL ID.4.10.4.4.5 Priority Marking ModeIn some cases, the network operator may want to use the BreezeMAX system for marking QoS classes, in order to provide network-wide QoS and enable the NOTEThe combination VLAN Transparency Mode On, Hybrid VLAN Mode On and an empty VLAN List means that only untagged frames should be forwarded. Such a Service cannot be assigned if there is an assigned non-transparent Service with VPL ID = None.
Services MenuBreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 193upstream network to handle the traffic accordingly. Within the BreezeMAX system, frames can be classified to QoS classes using Priority Classifiers, based on either a DSCP header or 802,1p tag. This applies only in cases where an external networking device marks the applicable fields. BreezeMAX also enables marking data transmitted to the backbone network with either DSCP or 802.1p values, where the marking is done per Service Profile. This marking overrides marking performed by external devices behind the SU. Typically, Priority Marking by the NPU will be used in the following cases:The external networking equipment behind the SU does not use priority marking.The service provider does not trust the priority marking defined by the user's equipment.The service provider uses a priority marking type (DSCP or 802.1p) that differs from the one used by the user's networking equipment.The system supports three marking modes:1Transparent Marking Mode (No Priority Marking): In this case, the system should forward the frames to the uplink network without any changes.If 802.1p classification is used at the SU, the frames will be transmitted to the operator's network according to the following rules:If VLAN Transparency Mode is Off, the frames will be forwarded with their original 802.1p value and the configured VPL ID. If no VPL ID is configured (VPL ID = Null), the 802.1p tags will not be forwarded.If VLAN Transparency Mode is On, the frames will be forwarded without any change (with the original 802.1p value and VLAN ID, if exists). For DSCP classification at the SU:If the VPL ID is configured (VLAN Transparency Mode Off), the NPU adds an 802.1Q header with the configured VPL ID and 802.1p=0.If VLAN Transparency Mode is On, The NPU adds a 802.1Q header with the original VLAN ID (if exists). Note that there may be a disparity between the DSCP values and the default 802.1p = 0 value.
194 OperationChapter 4 - Operation and Administration2802.1p Marking Mode: If VLAN Transparency Mode is Off, all frames are marked with the configured VPL ID and the 802.1p Marking Value. If no VPL ID is configured (VPL ID = None), the 802.1Q header will include a VLAN ID = 0. If VLAN Transparency Mode is On, all frames are marked with the original VLAN ID and the 802.1p Marking Value.If 802.1p classification is used at the SU, the original 802.1p tags are replaced by the configured 802.1p Marking Value.If DSCP classification is used at the SU, an 802.1Q header is added, with the configured VPL ID (if VLAN Transparency Mode is Off) or the original VLAN ID (if VLAN Transparency Mode is On), and the 802.1p Marking Value. The original DSCP bits are kept.3DSCP Marking Mode: All frames are marked with the configured DSCP Marking Values. If 802.1p classification is used at the SU, the frames will be transmitted to the operator's network according to the following rules:If VLAN Transparency Mode is Off, the frames will be forwarded with their original 802.1p value and the configured VPL ID. If no VPL ID is configured (VPL ID = Null), the 802.1p tags will not be forwarded.If VLAN Transparency Mode is On, the frames will be forwarded without any change (with the original 802.1p value and VLAN ID, if exists).If DSCP classification is used at the SU, the original DSCP bits will be replaced by the configured DSCP Marking Value.NOTEIf the Priority Marking Value is set to 0, untagged packets (without VLAN ID) will be forwarded without any change. This is applicable to transparent services and to to non-transparent services with no VPL ID.
Services MenuBreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 1954.10.4.4.6 Priority Marking ValueThe Priority Marking Value enables definition of the marking value for data frames transmitted to the backbone, according to the configured Priority Marking Mode:4.10.4.4.7 Forwarding RuleThe Forwarding Rule to be used by the Service Profile. The Forwarding Rule parameter is not applicable to transparent Service Profiles (VLAN Transparency Mode On), as all transparent Service Profiles share the same pre-defined Forwarding Rule.The Forwarding Rule must be one of the names that exist in the database after being defined using the Forwarding Rule menu. The Service Type defined in the selected Forwarding Rule must match the one defined for the Service Profile.4.10.4.4.8 Priority Classifier (L2 and PPPoE Service Type)The Priority Classifier to be used by the Service Profile. Not applicable for Voice Services.The Priority Classifier must be one of the names that exist in the database, after being defined using the Priority Classifier menu.4.10.4.4.9 Maximum Number of Voice Calls (L2 and Voice Service Type)The Maximum Number of Voice Calls parameter sets the upper limit on the number of simultaneous VoIP calls that can be supported by the Service using the Service Profile. This parameter is applicable only for L2 and Voice Service Profiles and calls made by devices that support DRAP.The available range is from 0 to 50 calls.NOTEPPPoE frames can be marked only with 802.1p. DSCP marking for PPPoE services is not supported.In L2 Services, many protocols may be carried over Ethernet. As BreezeMAX bridges all these protocols, there's no way to know what protocol type is encapsulated in Ethernet beforehand. Consequently, if DSCP Marking is configured for L2, the BreezeMAX system uses DSCP marking only for IP packets (e.g. Ethertype 0x0800). If 802.1p Marking is configured, it is used for all frames.Table 4-9: Priority Marking ValuesPriority Marking Mode Priority Marking Values RangeTransparent Not Applicable802.1p 0 - 7DSCP 0 - 63
196 OperationChapter 4 - Operation and Administration4.10.4.4.10 Service Profile ClassA read-only parameter (available only in Show menu) indicating whether the Service Profile is Local or Global. Global Service Profiles cannot be either updated or deleted.4.10.4.5 Forwarding RulesThe Forwarding Rule defines the features that affect forwarding and switching of data. Data in L2 and Voice services may be switched only between the Services that share the same Forwarding Rule. Data in PPPoE service can pass only between the subscriber and an Access Concentrator behind the Base Station. The Forwarding Rule menu enables viewing all Local and Global Forwarding Rules in the database, defining new Forwarding Rules (that will be added to the database as Local Forwarding Rules), editing details of previously defined Local Forwarding Rules and removing Local Forwarding Rules from the database.The Forwarding Rules database can hold up to 255 Forwarding Rules.The Forwarding Rule's parameters are:4.10.4.5.1 Forwarding Rule NameA Forwarding Rule Name consists of up to 32 printable characters.4.10.4.5.2 Service TypeThe Service Type for which the Forwarding Rule is defined. The Service Type parameter is configurable only when defining a new Service Profile (Add). It is not changeable.The currently available Service Type options are:1 - L2 2 - PPPoE3 - VoiceFor more details refer to Section 4.10.1.2.4.10.4.5.3 Unicast Relaying (L2 and Voice Service Type)The Unicast Relaying parameter determines whether the AU performs unicast relaying. When the Unicast Relaying parameter is enabled, unicast packets originating from devices on the wireless link can be transmitted back to the NOTETo properly support Call Waiting, the Maximum Number of Voice Calls should be configured to a value that is twice the number of actual voice sessions that can be supported simultaneously.
Services MenuBreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 197wireless link devices. If disabled, these packets are not sent to the wireless link even if they are intended for devices on the wireless link.4.10.4.5.4 Broadcast Relaying (L2 and Voice Service Type)The Broadcast Relaying parameter determines whether the AU performs broadcast relaying. When the Broadcast Relaying parameter is enabled, broadcast packets originating from devices on the wireless link are transmitted by the AU back to the wireless link devices, as well as to the backbone. If disabled, these packets are sent only to the backbone and are not sent back to the wireless link.4.10.4.5.5 Unknown Forwarding Policy (L2 and Voice Services Type)The Unknown Forwarding Policy parameter determines the mode of controlling the flow of information from the backbone to the wireless media. Select from the following options:1 - Reject: The AU will transmit unicast packets only to those addresses that the AU knows to exist on the wireless link side.2 - Forward: Enables the transmission of all packets, except unicast packets sent to addresses that the AU recognizes as being on its wired backbone side.4.10.4.5.6 Multicast VLAN ID The Multicast VLAN ID parameter is applicable only to Services assigned to SUs with SW version below 2.0. The Multicast VLAN ID is the VLAN ID to be attached to mulicast messages in order to enable full support of the VLAN feature by SUs with SW version below 2.0.In SUs with SW version below 2.0, it was necessary to use behind the SU a VLAN switch with binding capability to support multiple VLAN IDs. The VLAN switch was responsible for duplicating all the packets to the correct ports according to the multicast connection, this required switch pre-configuration. If a VLAN switch with binding capability was not used, only a single VLAN ID behind the SU could be supported, and this VLAN ID has to be identical to the multicast VLAN ID.In the current version, all packets received from the wireless port over a multicast connection are transmitted by the SU several times to the Ethernet port, each time with a different VLAN ID, taken from the VLAN ID list supplied by the NPU.Available values are in the range of 0 to 4094 or null (empty string) for No Multicast VLAN ID.Refer to Section 4.10.1.6 for guidelines regarding configuration of Multicast VLAN ID.
198 OperationChapter 4 - Operation and Administration4.10.4.5.7 Multicast QoS ProfileThe Multicast QoS Profile is the QoS Profile to be used for mulicast and broadcast messages.The QoS Profile must be one of the names that exist in the database after being defined using the QoS Profile menu.4.10.4.5.8 Forwarding Rule ClassA read-only parameter (available only in Show menu) indicating whether the Forwarding Rule is Local or Global. Global Forwarding Rules cannot be either updated or deleted.4.10.4.6 Priority Classifiers (L2 and PPPoE Service Type)The Priority Classifier defines the QoS Profiles to be allocated to users/sessions differentiated by DSCP or 802.1p priority classifiers. Priority Classifiers are not applicable to Voice Service Profiles.Each Priority Classifier can define up to 4 uplink and 4 downlink QoS profiles. The Priority Classifier menu enables viewing all Local and Global Priority Classifiers in the database, defining new Priority Classifiers (that will be added to the database as Local Priority Classifiers), editing details of previously defined Local Priority Classifiers and removing Local Priority Classifiers from the database.The Priority Classifiers database can hold up to 255 Priority Classifiers.The Priority Classifier's parameters are:4.10.4.6.1 Priority Classifier NameA Priority Classifier Name consists of up to 32 printable characters.4.10.4.6.2 Priority TypeThe prioritization mechanism used by the Priority Classifier.The available options are:1 - DSCP NOTEDSCP based Priority Classifiers are applicable only to IP or ARP traffic. It is not applicable to PPPoE and other Ethernet type traffic. If a Priority Classifier is not applicable for a certain traffic (e.g. DSCP based profile with PPPoE traffic or 802.1p based profile with traffic that do not use VLAN tags), no prioritization scheme will be in effect and quality of service will be determined by the first QoS Profile in the applicable lists.
Services MenuBreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 1992 - 802.1p4.10.4.6.3 Uplink Upper Priority LimitsThe Uplink Upper Priority Limits parameter enables to define up to four ranges, where each range may be assigned a different QoS Profile for uplink communication. The list includes up to 4 numbers separated by commas, where each number must be higher than its predecessor and the last number must be the highest available for the applicable priority type (7 for 802.1p, 63 for DSCP).Examples for acceptable lists:DSCP Priority: [10,30,50,63]; [21,42,63]; [20,63]; [63].802.1p Priority: [2,4,6,7]; [1,5,7]; [6,7]; [7].A ranges list of 21,42,63 means that packets with a priority from 0 to 21 will be transmitted using the first QoS Profile defined in the Uplink QoS Profiles list (see below), packets with a priority from 22 to 42 will be transmitted using the second QoS Profile defined in the Uplink QoS Profiles list and packets with a priority higher than 42 (43 63) will be transmitted using the third Uplink QoS Profile.A ranges list that includes a single entry (63 for DSCP and 7 for 802.1p) means that priority based classification is not used.4.10.4.6.4 Uplink QoS ProfilesThe Uplink QoS Profiles parameter enables to define up to four QoS Profiles, where each entry is the QoS Profile associated with the applicable entry in the Uplink Upper Priority Limits list. The list includes up to four QoS Profile Names, where each name must be one of the names that exist in the database after being defined using the QoS Profile menu. Each entry in the Uplink QoS Profiles list is associated with the applicable entry in the Uplink Priority Ranges list.4.10.4.6.5 Downlink Upper Priority LimitsThe DownLink Upper Priority Limits list functionality is the same as that of the Uplink Upper Priority Limits list, except that the ranges are defined for downlink communication.4.10.4.6.6 Downlink QoS ProfilesThe Downlink QoS Profiles list functionality is the same as that of the Uplink QoS Profiles list, except that the QoS Profiles are associated with the entries in the Downlink Upper Priority Limits list.4.10.4.6.7 Priority Classifier ClassA read-only parameter (available only in Show menu) indicating whether the Priority Classifier is Local or Global. Global Priority Classifiers cannot be either updated or deleted.
200 OperationChapter 4 - Operation and Administration4.10.4.7 QoS ProfilesThe QoS Profile defines the Quality of Service parameters that are applicable when the QoS Profile is used. Different QoS Profile Types are available to support different service requirements:Real-Time (RT) service is designed to meet the needs of Real Time Variable Bit Rate like services characterized by requirements for guaranteed rate and delay such as streaming video or audio. These services are dynamic in nature, but offer periodic dedicated requests opportunities to meet real-time requirements. Because the Subscriber Unit issues explicit requests, the protocol overhead and latency is increased, but capacity is granted only according to the real needs of the connection. QoS Profile parameters include Committed Information Rate (CIR) and Committed Time (CT).Non-Real-Time (NRT) service is very similar to the Real-Time polling service except that connections may utilize random access transmit opportunities for sending bandwidth requests. These Non Real Time Variable Bit Rate services, such as file transfer and Internet access with a minimum guaranteed rate, are characterized by requirement for a guaranteed rate, but can tolerate longer delays and are rather insensitive to jitter. QoS Profile parameters include Committed Information Rate (CIR), Committed Time (CT) and Maximum Information Rate (MIR) that limits the rate so that bandwidth intensive services will not expand to occupy the full bandwidth. Best Effort (BE) service is for services where neither throughput nor delay guarantees are provided. The Subscriber Unit sends requests for bandwidth in either random access slots or dedicated transmission opportunities. The occurrence of dedicated opportunities is subject to network load, and the Subscriber Unit cannot rely on their presence. Service parameters include Committed Time (CT) and Maximum Information Rate (MIR). Continuous Grant (CG) service is tailored for carrying constant bit rate (CBR) real-time services characterized by fixed size data packets on a periodic basis such as VoIP or E1/T1. The Base Station schedules regularly, in a preemptive manner, grants of the size defined at connection setup, without an explicit request from the Subscriber Unit. This eliminates the overhead and latency of bandwidth requests in order to meet the delay and jitter requirements of the underlying service. Service parameters include Packet Size (unsolicited grant size) and Sampling Rate (grant interval).
Services MenuBreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 201The priorities of allocating bandwidth to connections are in accordance with the QoS Type of the connections, in the following order:1CG 2RT3NRT4BEFor each of the RT, NRT and BE connection, there is a second level of priorities according to the Committed Time (CT), where connections with CT=Short gets the highest priority and connections with CT=Long gets the lowest priority.The QoS Profile menu enables viewing all Local and Global QoS Profiles in the database, defining new QoS Profiles (that will be added to the database as Local QoS Profiles), editing details of previously defined Local QoS Profiles and removing Local QoS Profiles from the database.The QoS Profiles database can hold up to 255 QoS Profiles.The available QoS Profile parameters depend on the QoS Type. The QoS Profile's parameters are:4.10.4.7.1 QoS Profile NameA QoS Profile Name consists of up to 32 printable characters.4.10.4.7.2 QoS TypeThe QoS Type that defines the QoS parameters that are applicable to the service. The available options are:1 - CG (Continuous Grant) 2 - RT (Real Time)3 - NRT (Non real time)4 - BE (Best Effort)4.10.4.7.3 CT (RT, NRT and BE QoS Types)The CT (Committed Time) parameter defines the time window over which the information rate is averaged to ensure compliance with the CIR or MIR parameter. It is used also to prioritize bandwidth allocation to connections, where for each QoS Type, connections with a shorter CT get higher priority.The available options are Short (1), Medium (2), and Long (3).The actual value in milliseconds for each of the three options varies according to the QoS type:
202 OperationChapter 4 - Operation and Administration4.10.4.7.4 CIR (RT and NRT QoS Types)CIR is the information transfer rate that the system is committed to transfer under normal conditions. The rate is averaged over a minimum increment of time, which is defined by the CT parameter.The range is from 0 to 12,000 Kbps.4.10.4.7.5 MIR (NRT and BE QoS Types)MIR is the maximum information rate that the system will allow for the connection. The rate is averaged over a minimum increment of time, which is defined by the CT parameter.The range is from 1 to 12,000 Kbps.MIR cannot be lower than CIR (applicable to NRT QoS type).4.10.4.7.6 Packet Size (CG QoS Type)The Packet Size parameter defines the amount of data in bytes that is expected for each grant.The range is from 64 to 1550 (bytes).4.10.4.7.7 Sample Interval (CG QoS Type)The Sample Interval parameter defines the time in milliseconds between two successive grants (inter arrival time).The range is from 5 to 100 (milliseconds).4.10.4.7.8 QoS Profile ClassA read-only parameter (available only in Show menu) indicating whether the QoS Profile is Local or Global. Global QoS Profiles cannot be either updated or deleted.4.10.4.8 Filtering RulesThe Filtering Rules menu enables defining L2 Filtering Rules and L3/L4 Filtering Rules.Table 4-10: CT ValuesCT BE NRT RTShort 50 mS 50 mS 50 mSMedium 100 mS 100 mS 100 mSLong 200 mS 200 mS 200 mS
Services MenuBreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 2034.10.4.8.1 L2 Filtering RulesAn L2 (Layer 2) Filtering Rule includes the MAC Address and Ethertype. A range of MAC Addresses can be defined for either the Source or Destination MAC Address field. It is possible to define "Any" for either the MAC Address or Ethertype field (but not for both fields). The L2 Filtering Rules menu enables defining new L2 Filtering Rule, viewing details of previously defined L2 Filtering Rules and removing L2 Filtering Rules from the database. It is not possible to edit the parameters of an existing L2 Filtering Rule. The database can hold up to 255 L2 Filtering Rules. The configurable L2 Filtering Rule parameters are:4.10.4.8.1.1 Rule NameThe name of the L2 Rule. The L2 Rule Name is a string of 1 to 32 printable characters.4.10.4.8.1.2 MAC AddressThe base MAC Address that is used together with the MAC Address Mask to define a range of MAC addresses. A string of 6 octets (where each octet is represented by two hexadecimal numbers) separated by dashes ("-"). An empty entry means "Any". An "Any" MAC Address means that the filter is defined only by the Ethertype field.4.10.4.8.1.3 MAC Address MaskThe mask that is used together with the MAC Address to define a range of MAC addresses. A string of 6 octets (where each octet is represented by two hexadecimal numbers) separated by dashes ("-"). In a binary representation the string must comprise a series of contiguous binary '1's starting from the MSB, followed by a series of contiguous binary '0's (if the range includes more than a single address). The MAC Address Mask parameter is not applicable for an "Any" MAC Address.4.10.4.8.1.4 MAC Address DirectionThe direction (Source or Destination) of the MAC Address. Indicates whether the range defined by the MAC Address and MAC Address Mask is for the Source MAC Address field or the Destination MAC Address field in the Ethernet frame. The MAC Address Direction parameter is not applicable to "Any" MAC Address.4.10.4.8.1.5 EthertypeThe Ethertype of the Ethernet frame. The Ethertype is defined by 4 hexadecimal digits. An empty entry means "Any" and is applicable only if a MAC Address range is defined (the combination of "Any" for both the MAC Address and Ethertype is not allowed).
204 OperationChapter 4 - Operation and Administration4.10.4.8.2 L3/L4 Filtering RulesAn L3/L4 (Layer 3/Layer 4) Filtering Rule includes the IP Address and Protocol. A range of IP Addresses can be defined for either the Source or Destination IP Address field. It is possible to define "Any" for either the IP Address or Protocol field (but not for both fields). If the specified Protocol is either TCP (6) or UDP (17), either the Source or Destination Port can be defined. It is also possible to define "Any" Port. The direction is applicable for both IP Address and Port.The L3/L4 Filtering Rules menu enables defining new L3/L4 Filtering Rule, viewing details of previously defined L3/L4 Filtering Rules and removing L3/L4 Filtering Rules from the database. It is not possible to edit the parameters of an existing L3/L4 Filtering Rule. The database can hold up to 255 L3/L4 Filtering Rules.The configurable L3/L4 Filtering Rule parameters are:4.10.4.8.2.1 Rule NameThe name of the L3/L4 Rule. The L3/L4 Rule Name is a string of 1 to 32 printable characters.4.10.4.8.2.2 IP AddressThe base IP Address that is used together with the IP Address Mask to define a range of IP addresses. A string of 4 decimal numbers (where each number is in the range from 1 to 255) separated by dashes ("-"). An empty entry means "Any". An "Any" IP Address means that the filter is defined only by the Protocol field (and optionally by the Port and Port Direction for UDP or TCP protocols).4.10.4.8.2.3 IP Address MaskThe mask that is used together with the IP Address to define a range of IP addresses. A string of 4 decimal numbers (where each number is in the range from 1 to 255) separated by dashes ("-"). In a binary representation, the string must comprise a series of contiguous binary '1's starting from the MSB, followed by a series of contiguous binary '0's (if the range includes more than a single address). The IP Address Mask parameter is not applicable to an "Any" IP Address.4.10.4.8.2.4 IP Address DirectionThe direction (Source or Destination) of the IP Address. Indicates whether the range defined by the IP Address and IP Address Mask is for the Source IP Address field or the Destination IP Address field in the IP frame. The IP Address Direction parameter is not applicable to "Any" IP Address.4.10.4.8.2.5 ProtocolThe protocol of the IP packet. The Protocol is defined by a decimal number from 0 to 254. An empty entry means "Any" and is applicable only if an IP Address range
Services MenuBreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 205is defined (the combination of "Any" for both the IP Address and Protocol is not allowed).4.10.4.8.2.6 PortThe TDP/UCP port number, which is applicable only if the Protocol parameter is configured to a value of either 6 (TCP) or 17 (UDP). The Port is defined by a number in the range from 0 to 65534. An empty entry means "Any" port.4.10.4.8.2.7 Port DirectionThe direction (Source or Destination) of the Port. Indicates whether the Port number is for the Source Port field or the Destination Port field in the IP frame. The Port Direction parameter is not applicable to "Any" Port.4.10.4.9 Interface FilteringThe Interface Filtering menu enables viewing and editing the filtering mechanisms to be used on frames received from the network (From Network Filtering) and from the wireless link (From Wireless Filtering). The Interface Filtering menu also enables viewing and resetting the Filtering Rules Counters, which display for each of the applicable rules the number of frames matching the rule, accumulated since the last reset. In addition, there is a Non Matching counter, displaying the number of frames that did not match any of the relevant rules. The counters will be reset also after changing the Active Rule Type or disabling the Admin Status.For each of the interfaces, the configurable parameters are:4.10.4.9.1 L2 Filtering Rules ListThe L2 Filtering Rules List submenu enables viewing details on the L2 Filtering Rules assigned to the interface, adding Rules (from the L2 Filtering Rules lists) to the list of Rules assigned to the interface, and deleting one or all Rules from the list. It also enables viewing/resetting the counter for a selected Rule. The counter displays the number of frames matching the Rule, accumulated since the last reset. The counter will be reset also after changing the Active Rule Type or disabling the Admin Status.4.10.4.9.2 L3/L4 Filtering Rules ListThe L3/L4 Filtering Rules List submenu enables viewing details on the L3/L4 Filtering Rules assigned to the interface, adding Rules (from the L3/L4 Filtering Rules lists) to the list of Rules assigned to the interface, and deleting one or all Rules from the list. It also enables viewing/resetting the counter for a selected Rule. The counter displays the number of frames matching the Rule, accumulated since the last reset. The counter will be reset also after changing the Active Rule Type or disabling the Admin Status.
206 OperationChapter 4 - Operation and Administration4.10.4.9.3 Active Rule TypeThe Active Rule Type parameter defines which of the Filtering Rules List is used. The available options are Layer 2 and Layer 3/4. The default option is Layer 2.4.10.4.9.4 Admin StatusThe Admin Status parameter defines whether the filtering mechanism is enabled or disabled.The default option is Disabled.4.10.4.9.5 Default ActionThe Default Action parameter defines the action to be taken for a frame matching any of the applicable Filtering Rules: Deny (discard) or Allow (forward).If the Default Action is Allow, all frames matching any of the applicable Filtering Rules will be forwarded, and all other frames will be discarded.If the Default Action is Deny, all frames matching any of the applicable Filtering Rules will be discarded, and all other frames will be forwarded.The default option is Deny.The menu also enables viewing and resetting the Non Matching Counter, which displays the total number of frames that did not match any of the applicable Filtering Rules, accumulated since the last reset. The counter will be reset also after changing the Active Rule Type or disabling the Admin Status.NOTEL3/L4 Filtering Rules are applicable only to IP packets. If the Default Action is Allow, non-IP packets will be forwarded although they do not match any of the applicable Forwarding Rules.NOTEBroadcasts and Management frames received from the network, whose destination is the NPU, are never filtered.ARP messages will be forwarded automatically if the following conditions are met: 1. Active Rule Type is L3/L4. 2. The L3/L4 Filtering Rules List includes at least one L4 Filtering Rule (a defined protocol). 3. The Default Action is Allow. This is applicable for both interfaces.
Services MenuBreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 2074.10.4.10 Filtering ExamplesExample 1: Block All Broadcasts Except ARP and PPPoETo block all broadcasts except ARP and PPPoE, define an L2 Filtering Rule that includes all other broadcasts. Typically this includes broadcasts with IP Ethertype. The parameters of this rule will be:MAC Address: FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FFMAC Address Mask: FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FFMAC Address Direction: DestinationEthertype: 800Assuming the intention is to block this broadcast in both directions, this Filtering Rule should be included in the L2 Filtering Rules List of both the From Network Filtering and the From Wireless Filtering. In addition, for both Interfaces the following configuration should be defined:Active Rule Type: Layer 2Admin Status: EnabledDefault Action: DenyIf broadcasts using other Ethertypes except IP, ARP and PPPoE are excepted, similar Layer 2 Filtering Rules should be defined for these Ethertypes (with the broadcast MAC Address), and these rules should be added to the applicable Layer 2 Filtering Rules Lists.Example 2: Block DHCP Server behind SUTo prevent the use of a DHCP server behind an SU, define the following L3/L4 Filtering Rule:IP Address: Any (empty)Protocol: 17 (UDP)Port: 67 (the source port of the DHCP server)
208 OperationChapter 4 - Operation and AdministrationPort Direction: SourceThis Filtering Rule should be included in the L3/L4 Filtering Rules List of the From Wireless Filtering. In addition, the following configuration should be defined for the From Wireless Filtering Interface:Active Rule Type: Layer 3/4Admin Status: EnabledDefault Action: Deny4.10.4.11 MAC Addresses Deny ListThe MAC Addresses Deny List menu enables viewing and editing the MAC Addresses Deny List. This list is used to deny services to MAC Addresses behind SUs. Uplink frames whose source MAC address matches any of the entries in the list and downlink frames whose destination MAC address matches any of the entries in the list will be discarded.The MAC Addresses Deny List menu also enables viewing and resetting the MAC Addresses Deny List Counters, which display for each of the entries in the list the number of frames that were discarded because they match the entry, accumulated since the last reset.4.10.4.12 XML File Parsing ErrorsSelect this option to view the parsing errors (if any) for the most recent XML file loaded into the NPU.The NPU does not check the XML for XML format or syntax errors. It only check the validity of the content. 4.10.5 Defining Local Service ProfilesThe process of defining completely new Service Profiles should be done "from bottom up", as each entity in the process is defined using one or more "lower level" entities.1Define the QoS profiles that should be available for the required Priority Classifiers (Uplink/Downlink QoS Profiles) and for the required Forwarding Rules (Multicast QoS Profile).To define a new Service Profile "from scratch":
Services MenuBreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 2092Define the Priority Classifiers that should be available for the required Service Profiles. All QoS Profiles required for the Uplink/Downlink QoS profiles list must be defined in advance.3Define the Forwarding Rules that should be available for the required Service Profiles. The QoS Profiles required for the Multicast QoS Profile parameter must be defined in advance.4Define the Service Profile. All required Priority Classifiers and Forwarding Rules must be defined in advance.5Once there are various QoS Profiles, Priority Classifiers and Forwarding Rules in the database, you can skip one or more of the steps 1 to 6.4.10.6 Defining Local Services1Verify that the necessary Service Profile(s) are available in the database.2Define the relevant Subscriber.3Verify that the applicable SU is defined.4Use existing Subscriber Name, SU MAC Address and Service Profile Name to define the required Service.Once there are various Subscribers and SUs in the database, you can skip one or more of the steps 2 to 3.4.10.7 Defining RADIUS Based Services1Verify that the necessary Service Profiles are available in the database of the relevant Base Station(s).2The format of the each Service in the ID Filter in the RADIUS Authentication server(s) is n:v:h:a:c; The ID Filter may include up to 5 Services, separated by “;”: s1;s2;...n = Service Profile Namev=<VLAN List>. v=<> is an empty VLAN list.h=ON or OFF, indicating the configured Hybrid VLAN Mode. a=<OFF or ON, VLAN ID>, indicating the configured Access VLAN Mode, and the Access VLAN ID for Access VLAN ON.To define a new Service "from scratch":
210 OperationChapter 4 - Operation and Administrationc=ON/OFF, indicating the configured VLAN Classification Mode.Example 1: n=be_96:v=<2,4,5>:h=ON:a=<ON,100>:c=ON;Example 2: n=be_128:v=<22>:h=OFF:a=<OFF>:c=OFF;4.10.8 Pre-configured ProfilesAt manufacturing stage, each NPU is configured with a set of pre configured Profiles. Certain parameters of these Profiles may be modified to reflect specific implementation requirements. When the software version is upgraded, these pre-configured Profiles will not be installed again in the μBST. This is to prevent configuration problems from occurring if the modified Profiles differ from the factory loaded Profiles. Note that upon resetting to NPU to its default configuration (Set Factory Defaults), pre-configured Profiles that were modified are not affected.The pre-configured Service Profiles are:Internet Access L2 - for basic Internet Access service with Best Effort QoS, utilizing L2 Service Type. This is the recommended Default Service Profile for Quick Mode.Internet Access PPPoE - for basic Internet Access service with Best Effort QoS, utilizing PPPoE Service Type.Gold, Silver and Bronze Teleworking - for teleworking applications with different QoS requirements. The pre-configured Teleworking Services are asymmetric: DL Rate > UL Rate.Gold, Silver and Bronze LAN-to-LAN - for LAN-to LAN applications with different QoS requirements. The pre-configured LAN-to-LAN Services are symmetric: DL rate = UL rate.VoIP Service Profiles - for DRAP-based gateways. Two pre configured VoIP service Profiles are defined; VoIP 1V for gateways with a single POTS interface, and VoIP 2V for fully supporting gateways for 2 POTS interfaces.Service Profiles for Generic (non-DRAP) VoIP Devices:1 POTS Basic VoIP G.729: 1 POTS, no Fax, G.729 codec with a 20 milliseconds sample interval, no priority marking.
Services MenuBreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 2111 POTS Advanced VoIP G.729: 1 POTS, T.38 Fax, G.729 codec with a 20 milliseconds sample interval, DSCP priority marking.1 POTS Basic VoIP G.711: 1 POTS, no Fax, G.711 codec with a 20 milliseconds sample interval, no priority marking.1 POTS Advanced VoIP G.711: 1 POTS, T.38 Fax, G.729 codec with a 20 milliseconds sample interval, DSCP priority marking.For more details on defining Service Profiles for Generic (3rd party) VoIP devices, refer to Appendix B.Except for the Basic PPPoE Internet Access pre-configured Service Profiles, all pre-configured Data Service Profiles use L2 Service Type to ensure transport of all L2 and L3 protocols. It is recommended to use the L2 Best Effort Internet Access pre configured Service Profile as the Default Data Service Profile in Quick Mode.The following tables provide details on the pre-configured Service Profiles, Forwarding Rules, Priority Classifiers and QoS Profiles.In all pre-configured Data Service Profiles, the Priority Marking Mode is set to Transparent and the Maximum Number of Voice Calls is 0.* VPL IDs are assigned arbitrary values and should be configured in accordance with specific network implementation, taking into account the considerations described in Section 4.10.1.6.As Internet Access L2 is the recommended Default Data Service Profile, a VPL ID = None is used to ensure availability of basic data services in Quick Mode.Table 4-11: Pre-Configured Data Service ProfilesName Service Type VPL ID* Forwarding Rule Priority ClassifierInternet Access L2 L2 Null Internet Access L2 BE AsymmetricInternet Access PPPoE PPPoE 11 Internet Access PPPoE BE AsymmetricGold Teleworking L2 12 Gold Teleworking Gold AsymmetricSilver Teleworking L2 13 Silver Teleworking Silver AsymmetricBronze Teleworking L2 14 Bronze Teleworking Bronze AsymmetricGold LAN-to-LAN L2 15 Gold LAN-to-LAN Gold SymmetricSilver LAN-to-LAN L2 16 Silver LAN-to-LAN Silver SymmetricBronze LAN-to-LAN L2 17 Bronze LAN-to-LAN Bronze Symmetric
212 OperationChapter 4 - Operation and Administration* Multicast VLANs are assigned arbitrary values and should be configured in accordance with specific network implementation, taking into account the considerations described in Section 4.10.1.6. Table 4-12: Pre-Configured Forwarding Rules for Data ServiceName Service Type Unicast relaying Broadcast Relaying Unknown forwarding PolicyMulticast QoS Multicast VLAN*Internet Access L2 L2 Disable Disable Forward BE 750 NullInternet Access PPPoEPPPoE Disable (hard coded)Disable (hard coded)Forward (hard coded)BE 750 NullGold Teleworking L2 Disable Disable Forward NRT 1500/1750 NullSilver Teleworking L2 Disable Disable Forward NRT 1000/1150 NullBronze Teleworking L2 Disable Disable Forward NRT 750/850 NullGold LAN-to-LAN L2 Enable Enable Forward NRT 1500/1750 NullSilver LAN-to-LAN L2 Enable Enable Forward NRT 1000/1150 NullBronze LAN-to-LAN L2 Enable Enable Forward NRT 750/850 NullTable 4-13: Pre-Configured Priority Classifiers for Data Services Name Type Uplink Priority RangesUplink QoS Profiles Downlink Priority Ranges Downlink QoS ProfilesBE Asymmetric 802.1p 7 BE 96 7 BE 750Gold Asymmetric 802.1p 7 NRT 128/192 7 NRT 1500/1750Silver Asymmetric 802.1p 7 NRT 96/128 7 NRT 1000/1150Bronze Asymmetric 802.1p 7 NRT 96/128 7 NRT 750/850Gold Symmetric 802.1p 7 NRT 1500/1750 7 NRT 1500/1750Silver Symmetric 802.1p 7 NRT 1000/1150 7 NRT 1000/1150Bronze Symmetric 802.1p 7 NRT 750/850 7 NRT 750/850Table 4-14: Pre-Configured QoS Profiles for Data ServicesName Type CIR (Kbps) MIR (Kbps) CTBE 96 Best Effort NA 96 MediumBE 750 Best Effort NA 750 MediumNRT 96/128 Non Real Time 96 128 Medium
Services MenuBreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 213* VPL IDs are assigned arbitrary values and should be configured in accordance with specific network implementation, taking into account the considerations described in Section 4.10.1.6.** To properly support Call Waiting, an additional connection must be available. Thus, the Maximum Number of Voice Calls is twice the maximum expected number of actual voice sessions.In all pre-configured Service Profiles for generic VoIP services, the Priority Marking Mode is set to Transparent and the Maximum Number of Voice Calls is 0.* VPL IDs are assigned arbitrary values and should be configured in accordance with specific network implementation, taking into account the considerations described in Section 4.10.1.6.NRT 128/192 Non Real Time 128 192 MediumNRT 750/850 Non Real Time 750 850 MediumNRT 1000/1150 Non Real Time 1000 1150 MediumNRT 1500/1750 Non Real Time 1500 1750 MediumTable 4-15: Pre-Configured Voice Service Profiles (for DRAP-based Gateways)Name Service Type VPL ID* Priority Marking Mode Maximum Number of Voice Calls** Forwarding RuleVoIP 1V Voice 18 Transparent 2 VoIPVoIP 2V Voice 18 Transparent 4 VoIPTable 4-16: Pre-Configured Service Profiles for Generic (non-DRAP) VoIP ServicesName Service Type VPL ID* Forwarding Rule Priority Classifier1 POTS Basic VoIP G.729 L2 19 VoIP 1 POTS Basic VoIP G.7291 POTS Advanced VoIP G.729L2 19 VoIP 1 POTS Advanced VoIP G.7291 POTS Basic VoIP G.711 L2 19 VoIP 1 POTS Basic VoIP G.7111 POTS Advanced VoIP G.711L2 19 VoIP 1 POTS Advanced VoIP G.711Table 4-14: Pre-Configured QoS Profiles for Data ServicesName Type CIR (Kbps) MIR (Kbps) CT
214 OperationChapter 4 - Operation and Administration* Multicast VLANs are assigned arbitrary values and should be configured in accordance with specific network implementation, taking into account the considerations described in Section 4.10.1.6.All pre-configured Service profiles for VoIP (DRAP-based Voice Services and Generic (3rd party) VoIP Services share the same pre-configured Forwarding Rule, to enable direct communication between all users of VoIP Services, regardless of the gateway type and other possible differences in the Service Profiles. Table 4-17: Pre-Configured Forwarding Rule for Voice ServicesName Service Type Unicast Relaying Broadcast Relaying Unknown forwarding PolicyMulticast QoS Multicast VLAN*VoIP Voice Enable (hard coded)Enable (hard coded)Forward (hard coded)BE 128 NullTable 4-18: Pre-Configured Priority Classifiers for Generic (non-DRAP) VoIP ServiceName Type Uplink Priority RangesUplink QoS ProfilesDownlink Priority RangesDownlink QoS Profiles1 POTS Basic VoIP G.729 DSCP 63 CG 47 63 CG 471 POTS Advanced VoIP G.729DSCP 0 BE 64 0 BE 6426 RT 6 26 RT 663 CG 38 63 CG 381 POTS Basic VoIP G.711 DSCP 63 CG 108 63 CG 1081 POTS Advanced VoIP G.711DSCP 0 BE 64 0 BE 6426 RT 11 26 RT 1163 CG 88 63 CG 88Table 4-19: Pre-Configured BE and RT QoS Profile for Voice ServicesName Type CIR (Kbps) MIR (Kbps) CTBE 64 Best Effort NA 64 MediumBE 128 Best Effort NA 128 MediumRT 6 Real Time 6 NA ShortRT 11 Real Time 11 NA Short
Services MenuBreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 215The following tables provide details on the pre-configured Profiles used for Transparent Services (VLAN Transparency Mode is ON):Table 4-20: Pre-Configured CG QoS Profile for Generic (non-DRAP) VoIP ServicesName Type Packet Size (Bytes) Sample Interval (msec)CG 38 Continuous Grant 94 20CG 47 Continuous Grant 117 20CG 88 Continuous Grant 218 20CG 108 Continuous Grant 270 20Table 4-21: Pre-Configured Forwarding Rule for Transparent ServicesName Service Type Unicast Relaying Broadcast Relaying Unknown forwarding PolicyMulticast QoS Multicast VLAN@@Transparent@@ L2 Enable Enable Forward @@Transparent@@NullNOTEThe name of the Transparent Forwarding Rule cannot be edited.Table 4-22: Pre-Configured QoS Profile for Transparent ServicesName Type CIR (Kbps) MIR (Kbps) CT@@Transparent@@ Best Effort NA 128 Long
216 OperationChapter 4 - Operation and Administration4.11 NPU Parameters SummaryTable 4-23: NPU Monitor Parameters SummaryParameter Range Default Run-Time UpdatedBase Station Configuration ParametersDevice Name Up to 255 printable characters Null YesDevice Location Up to 255 printable characters Null YesATPC Enable/Disable 1 - Disable 2 - Enable Disable is temporary until next reset of the AUsEnable YesOptimal Uplink RSSI (dBm) -103 to -50 -69 YesOperator ID X.X.XX: 0-255186.190.0 NoCell ID X.XX: 0-2550.250 NoDuplex Mode FDD, TDD TDD NoDL-UL Ratio 1: 65-352: 60-403: 55-454: 50-505: 45-556: 40-607: 35-6565-35 NoExternal 1PPS Clock 1 - Disable 2 - EnableEnable NoExternal 16MHz Clock 1 - Disable 2 - EnableDisable NoBase Station Alarms and Traps
NPU Parameters SummaryBreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 217Traps Display Filter-Minimum Severity1 - Critical2 - Major3 - Minor4 - Warning5 - InfoInfo YesTraps Display Filter-Days 1 - 31 days 31 days YesTraps Configuration-Admin Status1 - Disable 2 - EnableEnable YesTrap Configuration-Severity 1 - Critical2 - Major3 - Minor4 - Warning5 - InfoDepends on trap YesTrap Configuration-Suppression Interval0 - 86,400 (seconds). 0 means no suppression0 (no suppression)YesRADIUS General ParametersShared Secret Up to 16 printable characters, case sensitivenull (must be defined)YesRetry Interval (sec) 1-5 (seconds) 5 (seconds) YesMaximum Number of Retries 0-5 5 YesKeep Alive Timeout (sec) 60-180 (seconds) 60 (seconds) YesRADIUS Authentication (up to two servers)IP Address IP address null YesUDP Port 1-65535 1812 YesServer Status 1 - Primary2 - Secondary(Only one server can be Primary)YesRADIUS Accounting (up to two servers)IP Address IP address null YesUDP Port 1-65535 1813 YesTable 4-23: NPU Monitor Parameters SummaryParameter Range Default Run-Time Updated
218 OperationChapter 4 - Operation and AdministrationServer Status 1 - Primary2 - Secondary(Only one server can be Primary)YesChainChain Number 1 - 1500 0 (not defined yet-must be defined)NoGPS Protocol 0 - None1 - Trimble2 - SymmetricomTimble NoTime Zone Offset From UTC -12:00 to +13:00 +02:00 YesStop Tx After Hold Over Timeout1 - Disable 2 - EnableDisable YesHold Over Passed Timeout 0 - 2880 (minutes) 30 (minutes) YesNPU Parameters Administrator Password Up to 16 printable characters, case sensitiveadmin YesInstaller Password Up to 16 printable characters, case sensitiveinstaller YesMonitor Password Up to 16 printable characters, case sensitivemonitor YesMonitor Inactivity Timeout 0 - 60 minutes (0 means no timeout)10 minutes YesManagement Port ParametersManagement Port IP Address IP address 10.0.0.1 NoManagement Port Subnet Mask IP address 255.255.255.0 NoManagement Port Gateway IP address 0.0.0.0 NoManagement Port Destination SubnetIP address 0.0.0.0 NoManagement Port Destination Subnet MaskIP address 0.0.0.0 NoTable 4-23: NPU Monitor Parameters SummaryParameter Range Default Run-Time Updated
NPU Parameters SummaryBreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 219Management Port Management Traffic Enable/Disable1 - Disable 2 - EnableEnable NoData Port ParametersData Port IP Address IP address 1.1.1.3 NoData Port Subnet Mask IP address 255.255.255.0 NoData Port Gateway IP address 0.0.0.0 NoData Port Management VLAN ID0-4094 or Null for No VLAN Null NoData Port Speed 1 - 100 Mbps2 - 1 Gbps100 Mbps NoData Port Management Traffic Enable/Disable1 - Disable2 - Enable Enable NoAuthorized ManagersAuthorized Manager IP Address IP address NA YesAuthorized Manager Send Traps1 - Disable 2 - Enable NA YesAuthorized Manager Read CommunityUp to 23 printable characters, case sensitiveNA YesAuthorized Manager Write CommunityUp to 23 printable characters, case sensitiveNA YesBridgeBridge Aging Time 1 - 1440 minutes or 0 for no aging 10 minutes YesVoiceDRAP TTL Retries 1 - 100 4 YesRadio Cluster ParametersRadio Cluster ID 1 - 6 YesName Up to 32 printable characters Null YesLocation 0 to 255 printable characters YesSector Heading 0 - 359 (degrees) 0 YesSector Beam Width 0 - 359 (degrees) 90 YesODU ParametersTable 4-23: NPU Monitor Parameters SummaryParameter Range Default Run-Time Updated
220 OperationChapter 4 - Operation and AdministrationODU ID 1 - 24 YesAssociated Radio Cluster 1 - 6(must be a defined Radio cluster ID)YesConfigured ODU Frequency BandAccording to loaded Frequency Bands file 0 (Not Defined) YesTx Power (dBm) 13 - 50 (dBm, in increments of 0.25)Actual value depending on ODU Type28 YesAdmin Status 1 - Disable 2 - EnableDisable YesAU - SW Files in NPU - Default SW File (Standard) Not applicable for current release. Name A name of an AU SW File that exist in the NPUYesAction 0 - None1 - Load2 - Run from Shadow3 - Set as MainYesAU - SW Files in NPU - Default SW File (Advanced Si)Name A name of an AU SW File that exist in the NPUYesAction 0 - None1 - Load2 - Run from Shadow3 - Set as MainYesAU - Unit Control - SW Versions ControlSW File: Name A name of an AU SW File that exist in the NPUYesSW File: Action 0 - None1 - Load2 - Run from Shadow3 - Set as MainYesTable 4-23: NPU Monitor Parameters SummaryParameter Range Default Run-Time Updated
NPU Parameters SummaryBreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 221SU SW File: Name A name of an SU SW File that exist in the NPUYesSU SW File: Action 0 - None1 - Load2 - Run from Shadow3 - Set as MainYesAU MAC ParametersSector ID 0-255 206 NoARQ Enable/Disable 1 - Disable 2 - Enable Disable NoMaximum Cell Radius (km) Bandwidth 3.5 MHz: 10 -50 kmBandwidth 5 MHz: 7 - 45 km20 km NoAU Phy ParametersBandwidth (MHz) 1 - 1.752 - 3.53 - 54 - 75 - 103.5 NoAU Multi Channel ParametersDiversity Mode 1 - No Diversity2 - Second Order Diversity3 - Fourth Order DiversityNo Diversity YesChannel ID 1 - 4 (1 - 2 in version 2.0)Associated ODU 1 - 24 (must be a defined ODU ID) NoDownlink (Tx) Frequency (MHz) According to the Configured ODU Frequency Band and AU BandwidthNoAdmin Status 1 - Disable2 - Enable Disable NoAU Multirate ParametersTable 4-23: NPU Monitor Parameters SummaryParameter Range Default Run-Time Updated
222 OperationChapter 4 - Operation and AdministrationMultirate Enable/Disable 1 - Disable 2 - Enable Disable is temporary until next resetEnable YesUplink Basic Rate 1 - BPSK 1/2 2 - BPSK 3/4 3 - QPSK 1/2 4 - QPSK 3/4 5 - QAM16 1/2 6 - QAM16 3/4 7 - QAM64 2/38 - QAM64 3/4 BPSK 1/2 YesDownlink Basic Rate 1 - BPSK 1/2 2 - BPSK 3/4 3 - QPSK 1/2 4 - QPSK 3/4 5 - QAM16 1/2 6 - QAM16 3/4 7 - QAM64 2/38 - QAM64 3/4 BPSK 1/2 YesAU Voice ParametersMaximum Number of Voice Calls0 - 300 50 YesSU - SW Files in NPU - Default SW File (Standard) Not applicable for current release. Name A name of an SU SW File that exist in the NPUYesAction 0 - None1 - Load2 - Run from Shadow3 - Set as MainYesSU - SW Files in NPU - Default SW File (Advanced Si)Table 4-23: NPU Monitor Parameters SummaryParameter Range Default Run-Time Updated
NPU Parameters SummaryBreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 223Name A name of an SU SW File that exist in the NPUYesAction 0 - None1 - Load2 - Run from Shadow3 - Set as MainYesSU - Unit Control ParametersSU Status 1 - Permanent2 - TemporaryPermanent YesSW File: Name A name of an SU SW File that exist in the NPUYesSW File: Action 0 - None1 - Load2 - Run from Shadow3 - Set as MainYesSU Registration ParametersName Read-only (User Name) NAOrganization Name Read-only NAAddress Read-only NACountry Read-only NASU MAC ParametersBase Station ID X.X.X.X.X.XX: 0 - 255 NoBase Station ID Mask X.X.X.X.X.XX: 0 - 255 NoSU Phy ParametersTable 4-23: NPU Monitor Parameters SummaryParameter Range Default Run-Time Updated
224 OperationChapter 4 - Operation and AdministrationBandwidth (MHz) 1 - 1.752 - 3.53 - 54 - 75 - 10NoUplink (Tx) Frequency (MHz) Not applicable for current release. Depends on Frequency Bands Group available for the AU, and the Bandwidth.NoSU Multirate and ATPC ParametersUplink Rate Applicable only if Multirate in AU is disabled:1 - BPSK 1/2 2 - BPSK 3/4 3 - QPSK 1/2 4 - QPSK 3/4 5 - QAM16 1/2 6 - QAM16 3/4 7 - QAM64 2/38 - QAM64 3/4New SU: Uplink Basic Rate.Connected SU: Last used rate.YesDownlink Rate Applicable only if Multirate in AU is disabled:1 - BPSK 1/2 2 - BPSK 3/4 3 - QPSK 1/2 4 - QPSK 3/4 5 - QAM16 1/2 6 - QAM16 3/4 7 - QAM64 2/38 - QAM64 3/4New SU: Downlink Basic Rate.Connected SU: Last used rate.YesSU Ethernet Port ParametersTable 4-23: NPU Monitor Parameters SummaryParameter Range Default Run-Time Updated
NPU Parameters SummaryBreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 225Ethernet Port Configuration 1 - 10 Mbps Half Duplex2 - 10 Mbps Full duplex3 - 100 Mbps Half Duplex4 - 100 Mbps Full Duplex5 - Auto NegotiationNoSU PasswordPassword Up to 20 printable characters, case sensitiveYesSU Bridging ParametersEnable/Disable Limit on Number of Supported Devices1 - Disable2 - Enable Disable YesMaximum Number of Supported Devices1 - 512 512 YesBridge Aging Time 1 - 1440 minutes 3 minutes YesBest BST/AU ParametersBest BST/AU Support 1 - Disable2 - Enable NoPreferred BST/AU ID X.X.X.X.X.XX: 0 - 255 NoPreferred BST/AU ID Mask X.X.X.X.X.XX: 0 - 255 NoFrequency Scanning ParametersStart Rx Frequency (MHz) Depends on Frequency Bands Group available for the AU, and the Bandwidth.NoEnd Rx Frequency (MHz) Depends on Frequency Bands Group available for the AU, and the Bandwidth.NoScanning Main Step (KHz) Bandwidth 3.5 MHz: 125 to 1750 in steps of 125Bandwidth 5 MHz: 125 to 5000 in steps of 125NoScan Step Mask Up to 8 numbers (1-8) separated by commas, or nullNoTable 4-23: NPU Monitor Parameters SummaryParameter Range Default Run-Time Updated
226 OperationChapter 4 - Operation and AdministrationServices - General ParametersService Mode 1 - Advanced 2 - Quick Quick YesDefault L2/Voice Service Profile Name of an existing L2 or Voice Service Profile, or None. Internet Access L2YesDefault PPPoE Service Profile Name of an existing PPPoE Service Profile, or None. None YesServices - Subscribers ParametersSubscriber Name Up to 32 printable characters. Must be unique in the network.YesFirst Name Up to 50 printable characters. YesLast Name Up to 50 printable characters. YesDescription Up to 50 printable characters. YesAdmin Status 1 - Disabled 2 - Enabled YesServices - Services ParametersService Name Up to 32 printable characters. YesSubscriber Name A Subscriber Name (up to 32 printable characters) that exists in the databaseYesSU MAC Address MAC Address of an SU that exists in the databaseYesService Profile Name A Service Profile Name (up to 32 printable characters) that exists in the databaseYesVLAN List A list of different numbers separated by commas where each entry is from 1 to 4094. Null is for No VLAN.Up to 16 entries when Hybrid VLAN Mode is Off. Up to 15 entries when Hybrid VLAN Mode is On.YesHybrid VLAN Mode 1 - Off2 - OnYesVLAN Classification Mode 1 - Off2 - OnYesTable 4-23: NPU Monitor Parameters SummaryParameter Range Default Run-Time Updated
NPU Parameters SummaryBreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 227Access VLAN 1-4094 YesAdmin Status 1 - Disabled2 - Enabled YesServices - Service Profiles ParametersService Profile Name Up to 32 printable characters. YesService Type Applicable only for new Service Profiles (Add):1 - L2 2 - PPPoE3 - VoiceYesVLAN Transparency Mode 1 - Off2 - OnYesVPL ID 0 - 4094 or null for No VPL ID. YesPriority Marking Mode 1 - Transparent2 - 802.1p3 - DSCPYesPriority Marking Value 802.1p: 0 - 7DSCP: 0 - 63YesForwarding Rule A Forwarding Rule Name (up to 32 printable characters) that exists in the databaseYesPriority Classifier A Priority Classifier Name (up to 32 printable characters) that exists in the databaseYesMaximum Number of Voice Calls0 - 50 YesServices - Forwarding Rule ParametersForwarding Rule Name Up to 32 printable characters YesService Type Applicable only for new Service Profiles (Add):1 - L2 2 - PPPoE YesTable 4-23: NPU Monitor Parameters SummaryParameter Range Default Run-Time Updated
228 OperationChapter 4 - Operation and AdministrationUnicast Relaying Applicable only for L2 Service type:1 - Disabled2 - Enabled YesBroadcast Relaying Applicable only for L2 Service type:1 - Disabled2 - EnabledYesUnknown Forwarding Policy Applicable only for L2 Service type:1 - Reject2 - Forward YesMulticast VLAN ID 0 - 4094 or null for No Multicast VLAN. Applicable only for Services assigned to SUs with SW version below 2.0.YesMulticast QoS Profile A QoS Profile Name (up to 32 printable characters) that exists in the databaseYesServices - Priority Classifiers ParametersPriority Classifier Name Up to 32 printable characters YesPriority Type 1 - DSCP2 - 802.1pYesUplink Priority Ranges Up to 4 numbers separated by commas, where each number must be higher than its predecessor and the last number must be the highest available for the applicable priority type (7 for 802.1p, 63 for DSCP).YesUplink QoS Profiles Up to four QoS Profile Names separated by commas, where each name (up to 32 printable characters) is a name of a QoS Profile that exists in the database. The number of entries in the list must be identical to number of entries in Uplink Priority Ranges list.YesDownlink Priority Ranges Up to 4 numbers separated by commas, where each number must be higher than its predecessor and the last number must be the highest available for the applicable priority type (7 for 802.1p, 63 for DSCP).YesTable 4-23: NPU Monitor Parameters SummaryParameter Range Default Run-Time Updated
NPU Parameters SummaryBreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 229Downlink QoS Profiles Up to four QoS Profile Names separated by commas, where each name (up to 32 printable characters) is a name of a QoS Profile that exists in the database. The number of entries in the list must be identical to number of entries in Downlink Priority Ranges list.YesServices - QoS Profiles ParametersQoS Profile Name Up to 32 printable characters YesQoS Type 2 - RT3 - NRT4 - BEYesCT 1 - Short2 - Medium3 - LongYesCIR (Kbps) Applicable to RT and NRT:0 - 12,000 YesMIR (Kbps) Applicable to NRT and BE:1 - 12,000. MIR cannot be lower than CIR (NRT)YesPacket Size (Bytes) Applicable to CG64 - 1550 (Bytes)YesSample Interval (msec) Applicable to CG5 - 100 (milliseconds)YesL2 Filtering Rules ParametersL2 Filtering Rule Name Up to 32 printable characters YesMAC Address MAC address or null for Any YesMAC Address Mask MAC address YesMAC Address Direction 1 - Source2 - DestinationYesEthertype 4 hexadecimal digits or null for Any YesL3/L4 Filtering Rules ParametersTable 4-23: NPU Monitor Parameters SummaryParameter Range Default Run-Time Updated
230 OperationChapter 4 - Operation and AdministrationL3/L4 Filtering Rule Name Up to 32 printable characters YesIP Address IP address or null for Any YesIP Address Mask IP address YesIP Address Direction 1 - Source2 - DestinationYesProtocol 0-254 or null for Any YesPort 0-65534 or null for Any YesPort Direction 1 - Source2 - DestinationYesFrom Wireless Filtering/From Network Filtering ParametersL2 Filtering Rules List - Add L2 Filtering Rule ID YesL3/L4 Filtering Rules List - Add L3/L4 Filtering Rule ID YesActive Filtering Rule Type 1 - Layer 22 - Layer 3/4Layer 2 YesAdmin Status 1 - Disabled2 - EnabledDisabled YesDefault Action 1 - Deny2 - AllowDeny YesMAC Address Deny ListAdd MAC address (of a device behind SU) YesTable 4-23: NPU Monitor Parameters SummaryParameter Range Default Run-Time Updated
AAppendix A - Software UpgradeIn This Appendix:“Before you Start” on page 232“File Loading Procedure” on page 233“Completing the Software Upgrade (Switching Versions)” on page 235
232 BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System ManualAppendix A - Software UpgradeA.1 Before you StartLoading of new SW files to the unit's FLASH memory can be performed by a simple loading procedure using a TFTP application. Upgrade packages can be obtained from the Technical Support section of Alvarion's web site, http://www.alvarion.com/. Before performing an upgrade procedure, be sure you have the most recent instructions, and that the correct SW files are available in your computer. If you are loading new SU/AU SW files, verify that no more than two SU/AU SW files exist in the NPU/μBST. If there are three SU/AU SW files in the unit, one of them must be deleted before loading a new SU/AU SW file.Select SU/AU > SW Files in NPU/μBST > Show Files.Select SU/AU > SW Files in NPU/μBST > Delete a File and enter the name of the file to be deleted.NOTEThis section describes software upgrades using the Monitor program. The upgrade procedure can also be performed using AlvariSTAR. For instructions on using AlvariSTAR for software upgrade, refer to "The Software Upgrade Manager" section in the AlvariSTAR User Manual.To view the current SU/AU SW files in NPU/μBST:To delete an SU/AU SW file from NPU/μBST:
File Loading ProcedureBreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 233A.2 File Loading Procedure1Verify that you have IP connectivity from your computer to the NPU/μBST (either the MGMT or the DATA port). To verify the connection, ping the unit's IP address and verify that PING replies are being received.2To perform the upgrade, use a DOS TFTP utility with the following syntax: tftp i hostaddress put sourcefilewhere -i stands for binary mode and hostaddress is the IP address of the unit to be upgraded (NPU/μBST). The put command instructs the PC client to send a file to the hostaddress. sourcefile is the name of the SW file in the PC Client.For example, to load the file npu_2_0_1_15 to the NPU whose IP address is 172.17.31.215, use the following command:tftp -i 172.17.31.215 put npu_2_0_1_153Following a successful completion of the file loading process, the Transfer successful DOS message is displayed.4The unit decompresses the loaded file and checks the integrity of the new version. The new version replaces the previous shadow version only after verification. If verification tests fail, the loaded version will be rejected. The unit will reject a file if either the file name or the version number matches the current Main versions. 5Check that the loaded versions exist in the unit: Select Unit Control > SW Versions Control > Show Versions.To load software files:NOTEIt is recommended to upgrade all system elements with the latest software version. Nevertheless, it is possible to upgrade each unit separately and independently.To view the current NPU/μBST SW Versions in the unit:
234 BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System ManualAppendix A - Software UpgradeSelect SU/AU > SW Files in NPU/μBST > Show Files.To view the current NPU/μBST SW Versions in the unit:
Completing the Software Upgrade (Switching Versions)BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 235A.3 Completing the Software Upgrade (Switching Versions)After verifying successful upload of all software files, set the new version as the main version in each one of the upgraded system elements:SU(s): Select the SU that should be upgraded. Select Unit Control > SW Versions Control > Set as Main, and enter the name of the new SU SW file. The unit will reset automatically and will use the new version after power-up. Repeat the process for all SUs that should be upgraded.AU(s): Select the AU that should be upgraded. Select Unit Control > SW Versions Control > Set as Main, and enter the name of the new AU SW file. The unit will reset automatically. After power-up, the unit will use the new version. Repeat the process for all AUs that should be upgraded.NPU/μBST: Select Unit Control > SW Versions Control > Run from Shadow. The system will reset automatically. After power-up, the NPU/μBST will run from the new version, that at this stage is still marked as the Shadow Version. To switch versions, select Unit Control > SW Versions Control > Set as Main.
BAppendix B - Defining Service Profiles for Generic VoIP GatewaysIn This Appendix:“Introduction” on page B-238“1 POTS Basic VoIP G.729 Service Profile” on page B-240“1 POTS Advanced VoIP G.729 Service Profile” on page B-242“1 POTS Basic VoIP G.711 Service Profile” on page B-244“1 POTS Advanced VoIP G.711 Service Profile” on page B-246
238 BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System ManualAppendix B - Defining Service Profiles for Generic VoIP GatewaysB.1 IntroductionThis section describes the method used for defining the pre-configured Service Profiles for Generic (3rd party) VoIP devices that do not use the DRAP protocol. The same principles can be used for modifying the pre-configured profiles or creating new ones for VoIP services that have different characteristics.B.1.1 Priority MarkingWe distinguish between two types of Service Profiles for Generic VoIP devices:Marking is not used: This scenario is applicable when the VoIP device behind the SU does not support either DSCP or 802.1p marking to distinguish between different VoIP related traffic types, or when such marking is not used for any reason. The implication is that a single Continuous Grant connection should be used for all VoIP traffic. Marking is used: This scenario is applicable when the VoIP device is capable of marking the different VoIP related traffic types. The assumption is that 3 different priority marks are used: One for RTP traffic, the second for RTCP and VoIP Signaling, and a third one for Data (Device Management).B.1.2 General AssumptionsProtocol Header: 18 bytes for Ethernet L2 header (including 4 bytes for VLAN), plus 40 bytes of IP/UDP/RTP headers. A total of 58 bytes.RTCP bandwidth: RFC 3556, Session Description Protocol (SDP) Bandwidth Modifiers for RTP Control Protocol (RTCP) Bandwidth, states that normally, the amount of bandwidth allocated to RTCP in an RTP session is 5% of the session bandwidth. To be on the safe side allocate 10% of the RTP bandwidth to RTCP.VoIP Signaling: Cisco states that its IP Phones generate approximately 150 bps signaling traffic (without L2 overhead). To be on the safe side assume 2 Kbps of VoIP Signaling traffic for each POTS interface. Fax: Fax services are assumed to be based on T.38 Fax Relay. Protocol Header is assumed to be 58 bytes (same as for RTP).Data: Data traffic may include ARP, DHCP, TFTP, SNMP, HTTP and other management protocols. The recommended default bandwidth value is up to 64
IntroductionBreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 239Kbps if a Best Effort connection is used for this traffic. If a Continuous Grant service is used for all VoIP related traffic, a lower bandwidth will be allocated to Data traffic. Note that the use of bandwidth consuming protocols when an active call is present should be avoided.
240 BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System ManualAppendix B - Defining Service Profiles for Generic VoIP GatewaysB.2 1 POTS Basic VoIP G.729 Service ProfileB.2.1 Service CharacteristicsG.729 codec, 20msec sample interval1 POTSNo FaxPriority marking behind the SU is not used: All VoIP related traffic is classified onto a single Continuous Grant (CG) connection.Multiple media streams to support Call-Waiting: If the traffic exceeds the BW allocated to the CG connection, the SU may request to double the allocated BW. B.2.2 RTP BW CalculationThe required bandwidth for a G.729 call (8 Kbps codec bit rate) with RTP and 20 bytes of voice payload is:Total packet size (bytes) = (Ethernet of 18 bytes) + (IP/UDP/RTP header of 40 bytes) + (voice payload of 20 bytes) = 78 bytesTotal packet size (bits) = (78 bytes) * 8 bits per byte = 624 bitsPPS (Packets Per Second) = (8 Kbps codec bit rate) / (160 bits) = 50 ppsNote: 160 bits = 20 bytes (voice payload) * 8 bits per byteBandwidth per call = Total packet size (624 bits) * 50 pps = 31.2 KbpsB.2.3 RTCP BW CalculationRTCP BW is 10% of RTP: 10% of 31.2 Kbps is 3.12 Kbps.B.2.4 QoS ProfileThe calculated bandwidth required for RTP traffic is 31.2 Kbps. To accommodate for other traffic types, such as RTCP (up to 3.1 Kbps), Voice Signaling (up to 2 Kbps) and Data (Device Management), we allocate to it a total bandwidth of 31.2 x 1.5=46.8 Kbps (equivalent to a Packet Size of 936 bits, or 117 bytes). The SU may
1 POTS Basic VoIP G.729 Service ProfileBreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 241request twice this BW so it will be allocated with up to approximately 94 Kbps. This is assumed to be sufficient for all traffic scenarios, including Call Waiting.Thus, the CG 47 QoS Profile parameters are:Packet Size: 117 bytesSample Interval: 20 msec
242 BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System ManualAppendix B - Defining Service Profiles for Generic VoIP GatewaysB.3 1 POTS Advanced VoIP G.729 Service ProfileB.3.1 Service CharacteristicsG.729 codec, 20msec sample interval 1 POTST.38 FaxDSCP priority marking behind the SU is used, with the following values:63: RTP traffic 26: RTCP and VoIP traffic0: Data trafficSingle media stream to support Call-WaitingB.3.2 Voice RTP BW CalculationThe required bandwidth for a G.729 call (8 Kbps codec bit rate) with RTP and 20 bytes of voice payload is:Total packet size (bytes) = (Ethernet of 18 bytes) + (IP/UDP/RTP header of 40 bytes) + (voice payload of 20 bytes) = 78 bytesTotal packet size (bits) = (78 bytes) * 8 bits per byte = 624 bitsPPS (Packets Per Second) = (8 Kbps codec bit rate) / (160 bits) = 50 ppsNote: 160 bits = 20 bytes (voice payload) * 8 bits per byteBandwidth per call = Total packet size (624 bits) * 50 pps = 31.2 KbpsB.3.3 Voice RTCP BW CalculationRTCP BW is 10% of RTP: 10% of 31.2 Kbps is 3.12 Kbps.B.3.4 T.38 14,400 Kbps Fax RTP BW CalculationThe required bandwidth with a 20 msec sample interval is as follows:
1 POTS Advanced VoIP G.729 Service ProfileBreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 243Total packet size (bytes) = (Ethernet of 18 bytes) + (IP/UDP/RTP header of 40 bytes) + (voice payload of 36 bytes) = 94 bytesTotal packet size (bits) = (94bytes) * 8 bits per byte = 752 bitsPPS = (14.4 Kbps bit rate) / (288 bits) = 50 ppsNote: 288 bits = 36 bytes (voice payload) * 8 bits per byteBandwidth per call = total packet size (752bits) * 50 pps = 37.6 KbpsSince Fax BW is higher than Voice BW, the Fax BW requirement mandates the CG connection's attributes. This is true for all G.729 and G.723 codecs.B.3.5 FAX RTCP BW CalculationRTCP BW is 10% of RTP: 10% of 37.6 Kbps is 3.76 Kbps.B.3.6 QoS ProfilesB.3.6.1 CG QoS for RTP TrafficThe calculated bandwidth required for RTP traffic is 37.6 Kbps (equivalent to a Packet Size of 752 bits, or 94 bytes). Thus, the CG 38 QoS Profile parameters are:Packet Size: 117 bytesSample Interval: 20 msecB.3.6.2 RT QoS for RTCP and VoIP SignalingThe required bandwidth is 5.76 Kbps (3.76 Kbps for Fax RTCP plus 2 Kbps for VoIP Signaling). We round it up to 6 Kbps. Thus, the required RT 6 QoS Profile parameters are:CIR: 6 KbpsCT: ShortB.3.6.3 BE QoS for DataAs stated, the recommended QoS Profile for Data is BE 64, with the following parameters:MIR: 64 KbpsCT: Medium
244 BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System ManualAppendix B - Defining Service Profiles for Generic VoIP GatewaysB.4 1 POTS Basic VoIP G.711 Service ProfileB.4.1 Service CharacteristicsG.711 codec, 20msec sample interval 1 POTSNo FaxPriority marking behind the SU is not used: All VoIP related traffic is classified onto a single Continuous Grant (CG) connection.Multiple media streams to support Call-Waiting: If the traffic exceeds the BW allocated to the CG connection, the SU may request to double the allocated BW. B.4.2 RTP BW CalculationThe required bandwidth for a G.711 call (64 Kbps codec bit rate) with RTP and 160 bytes of voice payload is:Total packet size (bytes) = (Ethernet of 18 bytes) + (IP/UDP/RTP header of 40 bytes) + (voice payload of 160 bytes) = 218 bytesTotal packet size (bits) = (218 bytes) * 8 bits per byte = 1744 bitsPPS = (64 Kbps codec bit rate) / (1280 bits) = 50 ppsNote: 1280 bits = 160 bytes (voice payload) * 8 bits per byteBandwidth per call = total packet size (1744 bits) * 50 pps = 87.2KbpsB.4.3 RTCP BW CalculationRTCP BW is 10% of RTP: 10% of 87.2 Kbps is 8.72 Kbps.B.4.4 QoS ProfileThe calculated bandwidth required for RTP traffic is approximately 88 Kbps. To accommodate for other traffic types, such as RTCP (up to 8.7 Kbps), Voice Signaling (up to 2 Kbps) and Data (Device Management), we allocate to it a total bandwidth of 108 Kbps (equivalent to a Packet Size of 2160 bits, or 270 bytes). The SU may request twice this BW so it will be allocated with up to approximately
1 POTS Basic VoIP G.711 Service ProfileBreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 245216 Kbps. This is assumed to be sufficient for all traffic scenarios, including Call Waiting.Thus, the CG 108 QoS Profile parameters are:Packet Size: 270 bytesSample Interval: 20 msec
246 BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System ManualAppendix B - Defining Service Profiles for Generic VoIP GatewaysB.5 1 POTS Advanced VoIP G.711 Service ProfileB.5.1 Service CharacteristicsG.729 codec, 20msec sample interval 1 POTST.38 FaxDSCP priority marking behind the SU is used, with the following values: 63: RTP traffic 26: RTCP and VoIP traffic0: Data trafficSingle media stream to support Call-WaitingB.5.2 Voice RTP BW CalculationThe required bandwidth for a G.711 call (64 Kbps codec bit rate) with RTP and 160 bytes of voice payload is:Total packet size (bytes) = (Ethernet of 18 bytes) + (IP/UDP/RTP header of 40 bytes) + (voice payload of 160 bytes) = 218 bytesTotal packet size (bits) = (218 bytes) * 8 bits per byte = 1744 bitsPPS = (64 Kbps codec bit rate) / (1280 bits) = 50 ppsNote: 1280 bits = 160 bytes (voice payload) * 8 bits per byteBandwidth per call = total packet size (1744 bits) * 50 pps = 87.2KbpsB.5.3 Voice RTCP BW CalculationRTCP BW is 10% of RTP: 10% of 87.2 Kbps is 8.72 Kbps.B.5.4 T.38 14,400 Kbps Fax RTP BW CalculationThe required bandwidth with a 20 msec sample interval is as follows:
1 POTS Advanced VoIP G.711 Service ProfileBreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 247Total packet size (bytes) = (Ethernet of 18 bytes) + (IP/UDP/RTP header of 40 bytes) + (voice payload of 36 bytes) = 94 bytesTotal packet size (bits) = (94bytes) * 8 bits per byte = 752 bitsPPS = (14.4 Kbps bit rate) / (288 bits) = 50 ppsNote: 288 bits = 36 bytes (voice payload) * 8 bits per byteBandwidth per call = total packet size (752bits) * 50 pps = 37.6 KbpsAs Fax BW is lower than Voice BW, the Voice BW requirement mandates the CG connection's attributes. This is true for all G.711 codecs.B.5.5 FAX RTCP BW CalculationRTCP BW is 10% of RTP: 10% of 37.6 Kbps is 3.76 Kbps.B.5.6 QoS ProfilesB.5.6.1 CG QoS for RTP TrafficThe calculated bandwidth required for RTP traffic is 87.2 Kbps (equivalent to a Packet Size of 1744 bits, or 218 bytes). Thus, the CG 88 QoS Profile parameters are:Packet Size: 218 bytesSample Interval: 20 msecB.5.6.2 RT QoS for RTCP and VoIP SignalingThe required bandwidth is 10.72 Kbps (8.72 Kbps for Voice RTCP plus 2 Kbps for VoIP Signaling). We round it up to 611 Kbps. Thus, the required RT 11 QoS Profile parameters are:CIR: 11 KbpsCT: Short
248 BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System ManualAppendix B - Defining Service Profiles for Generic VoIP GatewaysB.5.6.3 BE QoS for DataAs stated, the recommended QoS Profile for Data is BE 64, with the following parameters:MIR: 64 KbpsCT: Medium
GlossaryAAA Authentication, Authorization, and Accounting (Pronounced "triple a."). A system (or several systems) that controls what resources users have access to, and keeps track of the activity of users over the network. ANSI American National Standards Institute. A voluntary organization composed of corporate, government, and other members that coordinates standards-related activities, approves U.S. national standards, and develops positions for the United States in international standards organizations. ARP Address Resolution Protocol. Internet protocol used to map an IP address to a MAC address. Defined in RFC 826.ARQ Automatic Repeat reQuest. A communication technique in which the receiving device detects errors and requests retransmissions.ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange. A code for representing English characters as numbers, with each letter assigned a number from 0 to 127.ATM Asynchronous Transfer Mode. A network technology that dynamically allocates bandwidth. ATM uses fixed-size data packets and a fixed channel between two points for data transfer. ATM was designed to support multiple services such as voice, graphics, data, and full-motion video. It allows service providers to dynamically assign bandwidth to individual customers.ATPC Automatic Transmit Power ControlAU Access UnitAVU Air Ventilation UnitBE Best effort. A service where neither throughput nor delay guarantees are provided. The subscriber unit sends requests for bandwidth in either random access slots or dedicated transmission opportunities. The occurrence of dedicated opportunities is subject to network load, and the subscriber unit cannot rely on their presence. Service parameters include Committed Time (CT) and Maximum Information Rate (MIR).
250 BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System ManualGlossaryBER Bit Error Rate. In a digital transmission, BER is the percentage of bits with errors divided by the total number of bits that have been transmitted, received or processed over a given time period.BPSK Binary Phase-Shift Keying. A data transfer technique. BPSK transmits data using two phase modulation signals, one phase representing a binary one, and the other representing a binary zero. The signal is divided into bits; their status is determined by the preceding wave. If the wave changes, for example, the signal is reversed.BST Base StationBW BandwidthBWA Broadband Wireless AccessCBR Constant Bit-RateCG Continuous Grant. Also known as Unsolicited Grant Services (UGS), is tailored for carrying constant bit- rate (CBR) real-time services characterized by fixed size data packets on a periodic basis such as VoIP or E1/T1. Service parameters include unsolicited grant size (packet size) and normal grant interval (sample interval).CIR Committed Information Rate. The rate (in bits per second) at which a network guarantees to transfer information under normal conditions, averaged over a minimum increment of time.cPCI Compact Peripheral Component Interface. a new standard for computer backplane architecture and peripheral integration, defined and developed by the peripheral component interconnect (PCI) industrial computers manufacturers group (PICMG). Designed to provide rugged, high-density systems.CPE Customer Premise Equipment. Communications equipment that resides on the customer's premises.CPLD Complex Programmable Logic DeviceCRC Cyclical Redundancy Check. A common technique for detecting data transmission errors, in which the frame recipient calculates a remainder by dividing frame contents by a prime binary divisor and compares the calculated remainder to a value stored in the frame by the sending equipment.
GlossaryBreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 251CSMA/CD Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection. Media-access mechanisms wherein devices ready to transmit data first check the channel for a carrier. If no carrier is sensed for a specific period of time, a device can transmit. If two devices transmit at once, a collision occurs and is detected by all colliding devices. This collision subsequently delays retransmissions from those devices for some random length of time. Ethernet and IEEE 802.3 use CSMA/CD access.CT Committed Time. The time interval used for measuring average information transfer rates.DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol. A protocol for dynamically assigning IP addresses from a pre-defined list to nodes on a network. Using DHCP to manage IP addresses simplifies client configuration and efficiently utilizes IP addresses. DIP Switch A group of subminiature switches mounted in a Dual Inline Package compatible with standard integrated-circuit sockets. DL Down LinkDOS Disk Operating SystemDRAP Dynamic Resources Allocation ProtocolDSCP Differentiated Service Code Point, AKA DiffServ: An alternate use for the ToS byte in IP packets. Six bits of this byte are being reallocated for use as the DSCP field where each DSCP specifies a particular per-hop behavior that is applied to the packet.DiffServ See DSCPDLI Data Loss IndicatorEIR Excess Information Rate. Specifies the excess rate (above the committed rate) of information that can be available to a user. The EIR is used by the traffic policing mechanism to prevent users from sending excess traffic to the network. (EIR = MIR-CIR).EIRP Equavalent Isotropic Radiated Power. The apparent power transmitted towards the receiver, if it is assumed that the signal is radiated equally in all directions. The EIRP is equal to the power (in dBm) at the antenna port, plus the power gained from the directivity of the antenna (in dBi).
252 BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System ManualGlossaryEMC Electro-Magnetic Compatibility. The capability of equipment or systems to be used in their intended environment within designed efficiency levels without causing or receiving degradation due to unintentional EMI (Electro Magnetic Interference). EMC generally encompasses all of the electromagnetic disciplines. ETSI European Telecommunications Standards Institute. A non-profit organization producing voluntary telecommunications standards used throughout Europe, some of which have been adopted by the EC as the technical base for Directives or Regulations. FCC Federal Communications Commission. A U.S. government agency that supervises, licenses, and controls electronic and electromagnetic transmission standards. FDD Frequency Division Duplex. Full duplex operation by using a pair of frequencies, one for transmission and one for reception.FEC Forward Error Correction. A method of communicating data that can corrects errors in transmission on the receiving end. Prior to transmission, the data is put through a predetermined algorithm that adds extra bits specifically for error correction to any character or code block. If the transmission is received in error, the correction bits are used to check and repair the data.FFT Fast Fourier Transform. An algorithm for converting data from the time domain to the frequency domain; often used in signal processing.FTP File Transfer Protocol. A protocol for exchanging files over the Internet. FTP uses the Internet's TCP/IP protocols to enable data transfer.G.711 A 64 Kbps PCM voice-coding technique. Described in the ITU-T standard in its G-series recommendations. G.723.1 A compression technique that can be used for compressing speech or audio signal components at a very low bit rate as part of the H.324 family of standards. This codec has two bit rates associated with it: 5.3 and 6.3 Kbps. The higher bit rate provides a somewhat higher quality of sound. The lower bit rate provides system designers with additional flexibility. Described in the ITU-T standard in its G-series recommendations.
GlossaryBreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 253G.729 A compression technique where voice is coded into 8 Kbps streams. There are two variations of this standard (G.729 and G.729 Annex A) that differ mainly in computational complexity; both provide speech quality similar to 32-kbps ADPCM. Described in the ITU-T standard in its G-series recommendations.GPS Global Positioning System. A system that uses satellites, receivers and software to allow users to determine their precise geographic position.H.323 A protocol suite defined by ITU-T for voice transmission over internet (Voice over IP or VoIP). In addition to voice applications, H.323 provides mechanisms for video communication and data collaboration, in combination with the ITU-T T.120 series standards.IB In-BandIDU Indoor UnitIEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers. IEEE (pronounced I-triple-E) is an organization composed of engineers, scientists, and students. The IEEE is best known for developing standards for the computer and electronics industry. In particular, the IEEE 802 standards for local-area networks are widely followed.IEEE 802.1p A QoS method - A three-bit value that can be placed inside an 802.1Q frame tag. IEEE 802.16 Also known as WIMAX. A group of broadband wireless communications standards for metropolitan area networks (MANs) developed by a working group of the IEEE.IEEE 802.16a An extension of IEEE 802.16. 802.16a operates in the 2-11GHz frequency band over a theoretical maximum range of 31 miles with a theoretical maximum data transfer rate of 70Mbps.IEEE 802.1Q The IEEE 802.1Q standard defines the operation of VLAN Bridges that permit the definition, operation and administration of Virtual LAN topologies within a Bridged LAN infrastructure. The 802.1Q specification establishes a standard method for inserting VLAN membership information into Ethernet frames. A tag field containing VLAN (and/or 802.1p priority) information can be inserted into an Ethernet frame, carrying VLAN membership information.
254 BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System ManualGlossaryIEEE 802.3 A Local Area Network protocol suite commonly known as Ethernet. Ethernet uses Carrier Sense Multiple Access bus with Collision Detection CSMA/CD. This method allows users to share the network cable. However, only one station can use the cable at a time. A variety of physical medium dependent protocols are supported.IEEE 802.11b The IEEE 802.11b (also referred to as 802.11 High Rate or Wi-Fi). An extension to 802.11 standard for wireless Ethernet networks, that applies to wireless LANS and provides 11 Mbps transmission (with a fallback to 5.5, 2 and 1 Mbps) in the 2.4 GHz band.IEEE 802.11g An extension to 802.11 standard for wireless Ethernet networks, that applies to wireless LANs and provides 20+ Mbps in the 2.4 GHz band.IETF Internet Engineering Task Force. One of the task forces of the IAB (Internet Architecture Board), formally called the Internet Activities Board, which is the technical body that oversees the development of the Internet suite of protocols (commonly referred to as "TCP/IP").The IETF is responsible for solving short-term engineering needs of the Internet.IF Intermediate Frequency. Radio communications systems modulate a carrier frequency with a baseband signal in order to achieve radio transmission. In many cases, the carrier is not modulated directly. Instead, a lower IF signal is modulated and processed. At a later circuit stage, the IF signal is converted up to the transmission frequency band.IP Internet Protocol. The standard that defines how data is transmitted over the Internet. IP bundles data, including e-mail, faxes, voice calls and messages, and other types, into "packets", in order to transmit it over public and private networks.IPsec Security Architecture for IP Network. IP Control Protocol (IPCP) and IPv6 Control Protocol IPsec provides security services at the IP layer by enabling a system to select required security protocols, determine the algorithm(s) to use for the service(s), and put in place any cryptographic keys required to provide the requested services. IPsec can be used to protect one or more "paths" between a pair of hosts, between a pair of security gateways, or between a security gateway and a host.ISP Internet Service Provider
GlossaryBreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 255ITU-T International Telecommunication Union - Telecommunications. An intergovernmental organization through which public and private organizations develop telecommunications. The ITU was founded in 1865 and became a United Nations agency in 1947. It is responsible for adopting international treaties, regulations and standards governing telecommunications. The standardization functions were formerly performed by a group within the ITU called CCITT, but after a 1992 reorganization the CCITT no longer exists as a separate entity.LAN Local area Network. A computer network limited to a small geographical area, such as a single building. The network typically links PCs as well as shared resources such as printers.LED Light Emitting Diode.μBST Micro Base StationMAC Media Access Control. The lower of the two sub-layers of the data link layer defined by the IEEE. The MAC sub-layer handles access to shared media, such as whether token passing or contention will be used.MAC Address Standardized data link layer address that is required for every port or device that connects to a LAN. Other devices in the network use these addresses to locate specific ports in the network and to create and update routing tables and data structures. MAC addresses are 6bytes long and are controlled by the IEEE. MAN Metropolitan Area Network. A data network designed for a town or city. In terms of geographic breadth, MANs are larger than local-area networks (LANs), but smaller than wide-area networks (WANs).MCS Multipoint Communications Systems. Applications licensed at 2500 MHz in Canada. A wide variety of applications are possible, including one-way and two-way transmission and a diversity of distribution capacities.MD5 A Message-Digest algorithm developed by RSA Laboratories used for creating unforgeable digital signatures. MD5 produces an 128-bit (16 byte) message digest. Most existing software applications that handle certificates only support MD5.MIB Management Information Base. A database of objects that can be monitored by a network management system. SNMP uses standardized MIB formats that allow any SNMP tools to monitor any device defined by a MIB.
256 BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System ManualGlossaryMIR Maximum Information Rate. Specifies the maximum rate of information that can be available to a user. The MIR is used by the traffic policing mechanism to prevent users from sending excess traffic to the network.MMDS Multichannel Multipoint Distribution Service. MMDS is a licensed wireless service that has the capability to provide broadband access. MMDS operates in several parts of the 2 GHz spectrum.MRRC Maximum Receive Ratio Combining.NA Not Available or Not ApplicableNAS Network Access Server. A Network Access Server operates as a client of RADIUS. The client is responsible for passing user information to designated RADIUS server(s(, and then acting on the response.NAT Network Address Translation. Basic Network Address Translation (Basic NAT) is a method by which IP addresses are mapped from one group to another, transparent to end users. Network Address Port Translation, or NAPT is a method by which many network addresses and their TCP/UDP ports are translated into a single network address and its TCP/UDP ports. Together, these two operations, referred to as traditional NAT, provide a mechanism to connect a realm with private addresses to an external realm with globally unique registered addresses.NIC Network Interface Card. An expansion board you insert into a computer (or a built-in component) that enables the computer to connect to a network. Most NICs are designed for a particular type of network, protocol, and media, although some can serve multiple networks.NIU Network Interface UnitNLOS Non Line Of Sight. A term referring to wireless services which don't require a clear open path between sites.NMS Network Management System. A system responsible for managing at least part of a network. An NMS is generally a reasonably powerful and well-equipped computer, such as an engineering workstation. NMSs communicate with agents to help keep track of network statistics and resources.NOC Network Operations Center. The physical space from which a typically large telecommunications network is managed, monitored and supervised.NPU Network Processing Unit
GlossaryBreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 257NRT Non Real Time. is very similar to the Real-Time polling service except that connections may utilize random access transmit opportunities for sending bandwidth requests. These Non Real Time Variable Bit Rate (NRT-VBR) services, such as file transfer and Internet access with a minimum guaranteed rate, are characterized by requirement for a guaranteed rate, but can tolerate longer delays and are rather insensitive to jitter. Service parameters include CIR, Committed Time (CT), and MIR that limit the rate as otherwise bandwidth intensive services may expand to occupy full bandwidth.OA&M Operation, Administration & Maintenance. Provides the facilities and the personnel required to manage a network. ODU Outdoor UnitOFDM Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing: A method for multiplexing signals, which divides the available bandwidth into a series of frequencies known as tones. Orthogonal tones do not interfere with each other when the peak of one tone corresponds with the null. The rapid switching, frequency-hopping technique is intended to allow more robust data service.OFDMA Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiple Access. It’s a logical extension of OFDM and a modulation/multiple access technique. OFDMA divides a signal into sub-channels (i.e. groups of carriers), with each sub-channel (or several sub-channels) being allocated to a different subscriber. OOB Out-Of-BandPAP Password Authentication Protocol. A means of authenticating passwords which is defined in RFC 1334. PAP uses a two-way handshaking procedure. The validity of the password is checked at login.PER Packet Error Rate. In a digital transmission, PER is the percentage of packets with errors divided by the total number of packets that have been transmitted, received or processed over a given time period.PHY PHYsical Layer. The physical, or lowest, layer of the OSI Network Model. In a wireless network, the PHY defines parameters such as data rates, modulation method, signaling parameters, transmitter/receiver synchronization, etc. Within an actual radio implementation, the PHY corresponds to the radio front end and baseband signal processing sections.
258 BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System ManualGlossaryPIU Power Interface UnitPOTS Plain Old Telephone System. A basic analog telephone equipment.PSU Power Supply UnitPPPoE Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet. PPPoE relies on two widely accepted standards: PPP and Ethernet. PPPoE is a specification for connecting the users on an Ethernet to the Internet through a common broadband medium, such as a single DSL line, wireless device or cable modem. All the users over the Ethernet share a common connection, so the Ethernet principles supporting multiple users in a LAN combines with the principles of PPP, which apply to serial connections.QAM Quadrature Amplitude Modulation. A technique used in wireless applications to double the available bandwidth by combining two amplitude-modulated signals. The two combined signals differ in phase by 90 degrees; this technique doubles the bandwidth by combining the two signals at the source before transmission, transmitting digital data at a rate of 4 bits per signal change. QoS Quality of Service. Measure of performance for a transmission system that reflects its transmission quality and service availability.QPSK Quadrature Phase Shift Keying. A data transfer technique used in coaxial cable networks that sends data using modulating signals. Four different phases represent data, with each signal's information determined by the signal before it. For example, if a phase stays the same from one signal to the other, the information has not changed.RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service, an authentication and accounting system used by many Internet Service Providers (ISPs). When you connect to the system you must enter your username and password. This information is passed to a RADIUS server, which checks that the information is correct, and then authorizes access to the system.RF Radio frequency. An AC signal of high enough frequency to be used for wireless communications. RFC Request For Comments. The name of the result and the process for creating a standard on the Internet. New standards are proposed and published on the Internet, as a Request For Comments. The proposal is reviewed by the Internet Engineering Task Force.
GlossaryBreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 259RoHS Restriction of the use of certain Hazardous Substances in electrical and electronic equipment, reference EC Directive 2002/95/EC of 27 January 2003.RSA A public-key encryption technology developed by RSA Data Security, Inc. The acronym stands for Rivest, Shamir, and Adelman, the inventors of the technique. The RSA algorithm is based on the fact that there is no efficient way to factor very large numbers. Deducing an RSA key, therefore, requires an extraordinary amount of computer processing power and time. The RSA algorithm has become the de facto standard for industrial-strength encryption, especially for data sent over the Internet.RSSI Received Signal Strength Indicator. A signal or circuit that indicates the strength of the incoming (received) signal in a receiver.R&TTE Radio & Telecommunications Terminal Equipment. The R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC governs the marketing and use of R&TTE equipment. With the exception of a few categories of equipment, the Directive covers all equipment, which uses the radio frequency spectrum. It also covers all terminal equipment attached to public telecommunication networks.RT Real Time. Real Time service is designed to meet the needs of Real Time Variable Bit Rate (RT-VBR) like services characterized by requirements for guaranteed rate and delay such as streaming video or audio. These services are dynamic in nature, but offer periodic dedicated requests opportunities to meet real-time requirements. Because the subscriber equipment issues explicit requests, the protocol overhead and latency is increased, but capacity is granted only according to the real needs of the connection. Service parameters include CIR and CT.RTCP RTP Control Protocol. A protocol that monitors the QoS of an RTP connection and conveys information about the on-going session. RTP Real Time Protocol. An Internet protocol for transmitting real-time data such as audio and video. RTP itself does not guarantee real-time delivery of data, but it does provide mechanisms for the sending and receiving applications to support streaming data. Typically, RTP runs on top of the UDP protocol, although the specification is general enough to support other transport protocols.Rx Receive
260 BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System ManualGlossarySIP Session Initiation Protocol. An application-layer control IETF protocol that can establish, modify, and terminate multimedia sessions such as Internet telephony calls (VoIP). SIP can also invite participants to already existing sessions, such as multicast conferences. Media can be added to (and removed from) an existing session. SIP transparently supports name mapping and redirection services, which supports personal mobility - users can maintain a single externally visible identifier regardless of their network location.SLA Service Level Agreement. A contract between a service provider and the end user, which stipulates and commits the service provider to a required level of service. An SLA relates to issues such as specified level of service, support options, enforcement or penalty provisions for services not provided, a guaranteed level of system performance as relates to downtime or uptime, a specified level of customer support and what software or hardware will be provided and for what fee.SME Small and Medium-sized Enterprises. SMEs are small-scale entrepreneurial private enterprises: they are usually defined as having less than 250 employees, but most have far fewer.SNAP Sub Network Access ProtocolSNMP Simple Network Management Protocol. A network management protocol that provides a means to monitor and control network devices, and to manage configurations, statistics collection, performance, and security. SNMP works by sending messages, called protocol data units (PDUs), to different parts of a network. SNMP-compliant devices, called agents, store data about themselves in Management Information Bases (MIBs) and return this data to the SNMP requesters.SNR Signal to Noise Ratio. The ratio of the amplitude of a desired analog or digital data signal to the amplitude of noise in a transmission channel at a specific point in time. SNR is typically expressed logarithmically in decibels (dB). SNR measures the quality of a transmission channel or a signal over a network channel. The greater the ratio, the easier it is to identify and subsequently isolate and eliminate the effects of noise. SNR also is abbreviated as S/N.
GlossaryBreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 261SOHO Small Office Home Office. A term that refers to the small or home office environment and the business culture that surrounds it. Typically it refers to an office or business with ten or fewer computers and/or employees.SRC SourceSU Subscriber UnitTCP Transmission Control Protocol. Connection-oriented transport layer protocol that provides reliable full-duplex data transmission. TCP is the part of the TCP/IP suite of protocols that is responsible for forming data connections between nodes that are reliable, as opposed to IP, which is connectionless and unreliable. TCP/IP Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol. A set of protocols developed by the U.S. Department of Defense to allow communication between dissimilar networks and systems over long distances. TCP/IP is the de facto standard for data transmission over networks, including the Internet.TDD Time Division Duplex is a duplexing technique dividing a radio channel in time to allow downlink operation during part of the frame period and uplink operation in the remainder of the frame period.TDM Time Division Multiplexing. Technique in which information from multiple channels can be allocated bandwidth on a single link based on pre-assigned time slots. Bandwidth is allocated to each channel regardless of whether the station has data to transmit.TFTP Trivial File Transfer Protocol. Simplified version of FTP that allows files to be transferred from one computer to another over a network, usually without the use of client authentication.TTL Time To LiveTx TransmitUA unit for measuring the height in rack cabinets. 1U = 1.75 inches.UDP User Datagram Protocol. Connectionless transport layer protocol in the TCP/IP protocol stack. UDP is a simple protocol that exchanges datagrams without acknowledgments or guaranteed delivery, requiring that error processing and retransmission be handled by other protocols. UDP is defined in RFC 768. UL Up Link
262 BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System ManualGlossaryUTC Coordinated Universal Time. The reference for the official time used by all countries in the world, and it is independent from the time zones. The modern implementation of Greenwich Mean Time. VLAN Virtual Local Area Network. A group of devices on one or more LANs that are configured with the same VLAN ID so that they can communicate as if they were attached to the same wire, when in fact they are located on a number of different LAN segments. Used also to create separation between different user groups.VLSI Very Large Scale Integration. The process of placing thousands (or hundreds of thousands) of electronic components on a single chip.VoIP Voice over Internet Protocol. Provides an advanced digital communications network that bypasses the traditional public switched telephone system and uses the Internet to transmit voice communication. VoIP enables people to use the Internet as the transmission medium for telephone calls by sending voice data in packets using IP rather than by traditional circuit switched transmissions of the PSTN.VPL Virtual Private Link. A virtual connection between two points on the network, such as a base station and a service provider or corporate network. Identified by the VPL ID, with functionality that is similar to VLAN ID (VLAN on the backbone network). VPN Virtual Private Network. A private network of computers that's at least partially connected by public lines. A good example would be a private office LAN that allows users to log in remotely over the Internet (an open, public system). VPNs use encryption and secure protocols like PPTP to ensure that data transmissions are not intercepted by unauthorized parties.WAN Wide Area Network. A computer network that spans a relatively large geographical area. Wide area networks can be made up of interconnected smaller networks spread throughout a building, a state, or the entire globe.WCS Wireless Communications Services. The variety of services available using frequencies in the 2.3 GHz band for general fixed wireless use.
GlossaryBreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 263WEEE Waste Electronic and Electrical Equipment. The purpose of Directive 2002/96/EC on waste electrical and electronic equipment (WEEE) is, as a first priority, the prevention of waste electrical and electronic equipment (WEEE), and in addition, the reuse, recycling and other forms of recovery of such wastes so as to reduce the disposal of waste. It also seeks to improve the environmental performance of all operators involved in the life cycle of electrical and electronic equipment, e.g. producers, distributors and consumers and in particular those operators directly involved in the treatment of waste electrical and electronic equipment.WIMAX The name commonly given to the IEEE 802.16 standard. Specifications for fixed broadband wireless metropolitan access networks (MANs) that use a point-to-multipoint architecture. WIMAX supports very high bit rates in both uploading to and downloading from a base station up to a distance of 30 miles.
IndexNumerics1 POTS Advanced VoIP G.711 Pre-Configured Profile, 2111 POTS Advanced VoIP G.729 Pre-Configured Profile, 2111 POTS Basic VoIP G.711 Pre-Configured Profile, 2111 POTS Basic VoIP G.729 Pre-Configured Profile, 210802.1p Marking Mode, 194AAccess Unit Indoor Module, 44Access VLAN, 188AccountingActivity Status, 100Add Server, 100Delete Selected Server, 101IP Address, 100Operation Status, 100Select Server, 100Server Status, 100Show All, 100Show Selected Server, 101Statistics, 101UDP Port, 100Accounting Parameters, 99ActionSU SW File, 159Active AlarmsShow, 91Active Rule Type, 206Active Voice Calls, 133Activity StatusAccounting, 100Authentication, 97AddAccounting Server, 100Authentication Server, 97Authorized Manager, 119New SU, 172ODU, 129Radio Cluster, 125Add New SU, 172Add ServerAccounting, 100Authentication, 97Address, 161Admin StatusChannel, 145Interface Filtering, 206ODU, 130Service, 188Subscriber, 185Trap Configuration, 93Administrator Password, 109Advanced Service Mode, 176, 177Air Ventilation Unit, 52Alarms and Traps, 91Altitude, 106Antenna Selection, 157ARQ Enable/Disable, 141Associated ODU, 144Associated Radio Cluster, 129ATPC Enable/Disable, 88ATPC Parameters, 88AUBandwidth, 142Base Station ID Parameters, 141Configuration Menu, 140Configured Operation, 132Configured SU Operation, 133Configured SU SW File Name, 132
Index266 BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System ManualConfigured SU SW Version, 133Configured SW File Name, 132Configured SW Version, 132Default SW File (Adv-Si), 135Default SW File (Std), 134IDU Type, 133MAC Parameters, 141Maximum Number of Voice Calls, 147Menu, 132Multirate Parameters, 146Operation Mode, 133Performance Monitoring, 148Phy Parameters, 142Reset Unit, 138Select, 135Set Factory Defaults, 138Show Summary, 132SU SW File, 140SW Download Status, 132SW File, 139SW Files in NPU, 134SW Versions Control, 138Unit Control, 138Voice Parameters, 147AU IDU Type, 133AU Slot #Menu, 136Show, 136AU Wireless Port Counters, 148AU-IDU, 44Ejecting, 49Inserting, 48LEDs, 45AU-ODUConnectors, 34Installation, 28LEDs, 34AuthenticationActivity Status, 97Add Server, 97Delete Selected Server, 98IP Address, 97Operation Status, 97Select Server, 98Server Status, 98Show All, 97Show Selected Server, 98Statistics, 98UDP Port, 98Authentication Parameters, 97Authorized ManagersAdd, 119IP Address, 119Parameters, 119Read Community, 119Select, 119Send Traps, 119Show All, 119Write Community, 120AVU, 52LEDs, 52Replacing, 52BBack Panel Port Counters, 148Backup FileCreating, 112Filtering, 112Full, 112Profiles, 112Profiles and Services, 112Traps, 112Upload/Download, 113BandwidthAU, 142SU, 162Base StationChassis, 38Chassis Slot Assignment, 87Configuration Menu, 87Installation, 37Power Cable, 41Power Requirements, 39Show, 86
IndexBreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 267Base Station IDAU, 141SU, 162Base Station ID Mask, 162Base Station Licenses, 103Basic Parameters, 64BE, 200Best BST/AU Parameters, 166Best BST/AU Support, 167Best BST/AU Table, 167Best Effort (BE) Qos Profile, 200Bridge Aging TimeNPU, 120SU, 165Bridging Parameters (SU), 165Broadcast Relaying, 197Bronze LAN-to-LAN Pre-Configured Profile, 210Bronze Teleworking Pre-Configured Profile, 210Burst Error Rate CountersAU, 149SU, 171CCalculated Local Date and Time, 106Cell ID, 89Cell Parameters, 88CG, 200Chain Number, 104Chain Parameters, 104Change Password, 109ChannelAdmin Status, 145Associated ODU, 144Associated Radio Cluster, 145Downlink (Tx) Frequency, 144Frequency Band, 146Select, 144Tx Power, 145Uplink (Rx) Frequency, 146Chassis, 38Slot Assignment, 87CIR, 202Clear All Configured AU SW Files, 135Clear All Configured SU SW Files for this AU, 140Clock Parameters, 90Committed Information Rate, 202Committed Time, 201ConfigurationAU, 140Base Station Parameters, 87NPU, 114SU, 160Configured OperationAU, 132SU, 151Configured SU OperationAU, 133Configured SU SW File NameAU, 132Configured SU SW VersionAU, 133Configured SW File NameAU, 132SU, 150Configured SW VersionAU, 132SU, 150ConnectorsAU-ODU, 34GPS Adapter, 59NPU, 47ODU Power Feeder, 55Continuous Grant (CG) QoS Profile, 200CountersAU Ports, 148Back Panel Port, 148Burst Error Rate (AU), 149Burst Error Rate (SU), 171Data Port, 121Management Port, 123Service, 188SU Ethernet Port, 170SU Port, 170Wireless Port (AU), 148
Index268 BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System ManualWireless Port (SU), 170Country, 161CPEs License Bank, 102Create Backup, 112CT, 201DData PortAuto Negotiation Option, 118Gateway, 117IP Address, 117Management Traffic Enable/Disable, 118Management VLAN, 117Parameters, 117Speed, 118Subnet Mask, 117Data Port Counters, 121Days, 92DC Power CableODU Power Feeder, 56Debug Stream, 120Default ActionInterface Filtering, 206Default L2/Voice Service Profile, 184Default PPPoE Service Profile, 184Default SW File (Adv-Si)AU, 135SU, 153Default SW File (Std)AU, 134SU, 153Defining Local Service Profiles, 208Defining Local Services, 209DeleteAccounting Server, 101AU SW File (in NPU), 135Authentication Server, 98ODU, 129SU, 172SU SW File, 154Dest Subnet, 115Dest Subnet Mask, 115Device Location, 88Device Name, 87Discrete Frequencies, 169DL-UL Ratio, 90Downlink (Tx) Frequency (Channel), 144Downlink Basic Rate (AU), 147Downlink QoS Profiles, 199Downlink Upper Priority Limits, 199DRAPDescription, 175DRAP TTL Retries, 120DSCP Marking Mode, 194Duplex Mode, 89Duplex Parameters, 89Duplicate Sessions, 178Duplicate SU Name, 151EEjectAU-IDU, 49NPU, 49PIU (with HOT SWAP), 49PIU (without HOT SWAP), 49PSU, 49Enable/Disable Limit on Number of Supported Devices (SU), 165Ethernet Port (SU), 164Ethertype (L2 Filtering Rule), 203External 16MHz Clock, 91External 1PPS Clock, 90FFile Loading Procedure, 233Filtering RulesMenu, 202First Name, 185Forwarding RuleBroadcast Relaying, 197Definition, 173Menu, 196Multicast QoS Profile, 198Multicast VLAN ID, 197
IndexBreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 269Name, 196Service Type, 196Unicast Relaying, 196Unknown Forwarding Policy, 197Forwarding Rule Class, 198Forwarding Rule Name, 196Frequency Bands File, 130Frequency Bands Groups, 130Frequency Scanning Parameters, 167From Network Filtering, 205From Wireless Filtering, 205GGatewayData Port, 117Management Port, 115General Service ParametersDefault L2/Voice Service Profile, 184Default PPPoE Service Profile, 184Menu, 184Service Mode, 184Show, 184Update, 184Global Profiles, 176Gold LAN-to-LAN Pre-Configured Profile, 210Gold Teleworking Pre-Configured Profile, 210GPS AdapterConnectors, 59Installation, 58LEDs, 60, 74GPS Info, 105GPS Protocol, 104GPS Supported, 104Grace Licenses, 103HHold Over Passed Timeout, 105HOT SWAP, 39Hybrid VLAN Mode, 187IIDU Type, 151IF Cables, 30InsertAU-IDU, 48PIU (with HOT SWAP), 48PIU (without HOT SWAP), 49PSU, 49InsertingNPU, 48Installation, 27AU-ODU, 28Base Station, 37GPS Adapter, 58ODU Power Feeder, 54Installer PasswordNPU, 109SU, 165Interface FilteringActive Rule Type, 206Admin Status, 206Default Action, 206From Network Filtering, 205From Wireless Filtering, 205L2 Filtering Rules List, 205L3/L4 Filtering Rules List, 205Menu, 205Interface Type, 157Internet Access L2 Pre-Configured Profile, 210Internet Access PPPoE Pre-Configured Profile, 210IP AddressAccounting Server, 100Authentication Server, 97Authorized Managers, 119Data Port, 117L3/L4 Filtering Rule, 204Management Port, 115IP Address Direction (L3/L4 Filtering Rule), 204IP Address Mask (L3/L4 Filtering Rule), 204
Index270 BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System ManualKKeep Alive Timeout, 96LL2 Filtering RulesEthertype, 203MAC Address, 203MAC Address Direction, 203MAC Address Mask, 203Menu, 203Rule Name, 203L2 Filtering Rules List, 205L2 Service, 174L3/L4 Filtering RulesIP Address, 204IP Address Direction, 204IP Address Mask, 204Menu, 204Port, 205Port Direction, 205Protocol, 204Rule Name, 204L3/L4 Filtering Rules List, 205Last Name, 185Latitude, 106LEDsAU-IDU, 45AU-ODU, 34AVU, 52GPS Adapter, 60, 74NPU, 47ODU Power Feeder, 56, 74PIU, 41PSU, 43Local Profiles, 176Longitude, 105Loop, 151MMAC Address (L2 Filtering Rule), 203MAC Address Direction (L2 Filtering Rule), 203MAC Address Mask (L2 Filtering Rule), 203MAC Addresses Deny List, 208MAC ParametersAU, 141SU, 161Management PortDest Subnet, 115Dest Subnet Mask, 115Gateway, 115IP Address, 115Management Traffic Enable/Disable, 116Parameters, 115Subnet Mask, 115Management Port Counters, 123Management Traffic Enable/DisableData Port, 118Management Port, 116Management VLAN (Data Port), 117Marking Mode802.1p, 194DSCP, 194Transparent, 193Max Tx Power, 128Maximum Cell Radius, 141Maximum Information Rate, 202Maximum Number of Retries, 96Maximum Number of Supported DevicesSU, 165Maximum Number of Voice CallsAU, 147Service Profile, 195Minimum Severity, 91MIR, 202MonitorVia Telnet, 81Via the MON Port, 80Monitor Inactivity Timeout, 113Monitor Password, 109Multi ChannelShow Summary, 143Multi Channel Parameters, 143Multicast QoS Profile, 198
IndexBreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 271Multicast VLAN ID, 197Multirate Algorithm, 146Multirate and ATPC Parameters (SU), 163Multirate Enable/Disable (AU), 147Multirate ParametersAU, 146NNavigation Processor SW Version, 106Network Processing Unit, 46Non Real Time (NRT) QoS Profile, 200NPU, 46Bridge Aging Time, 120Configuration Menu, 114Connectors, 47Ejecting, 49Inserting, 48LEDs, 47Menu, 107Performance Monitoring, 121Replacing, 53Reset Unit, 110Run from Shadow, 112Set as Main, 112Set Factory Defaults, 110Show, 107SW Versions Control, 110Unit Control, 109NRT, 200Number of Gateways, 151Number Of Received Satellites, 105OODUAdd, 129Admin Status, 130Associated Radio Cluster, 129Configured ODU Frequency Band, 129Delete, 129ID, 129Menu, 127Parameters, 129Select, 128Show, 128Show Summary, 127Tx Power, 129Update, 128ODU Power FeederConnectors, 55Installation, 54LEDs, 56, 74Operation Mode, 133SU, 155Operation StatusAccounting, 100Authentication Server, 97Service, 188Operator ID, 89Optimal Uplink RSSI, 88Organization Name, 161PPacket Size, 202PasswordDefaults (NPU), 110NPU, 109PerformanceService, 188Performance MonitoringAU, 148NPU, 121SU, 170Permanent, 177Permanent SUDefinition, 176Phy ParametersAU, 142SU, 162PIU, 39LEDs, 41PIU (with HOT SWAP)Ejecting, 49Inserting, 48PIU (without HOT SWAP)
Index272 BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System ManualEjecting, 49Inserting, 49Port (L3/L4 Filtering Rule), 205Port Direction (L3/L4 Filtering Rule), 205Ports CountersAU, 148Power Cable, 41Power Interface Unit, 39Power Requirements, 39Power Supply Unit, 42PPPoE Service, 174Pre-configured Profiles, 210Preferred BST/AU ID, 167Preferred BST/AU ID Mask, 167Priority ClassifierDefinition, 173Downlink QoS Profiles, 199Downlink Upper Priority Limits, 199Menu, 198Name, 198Priority Type, 198Uplink QoS Profiles, 199Uplink Upper Priority Limits, 199Priority Classifier Name, 198Priority Marking Mode, 192Priority Marking Value, 195Priority Type, 198ProfilesPre-configured, 210Protocol (L3/L4 Filtering Rule), 204PSU, 42Ejecting, 49Inserting, 49LEDs, 43QQoS ProfileBest Effort (BE) Service Type, 200CIR, 202Continuous Grant (CG) Service Type, 200CT, 201Menu, 200MIR, 202Name, 201Non Real Time (NRT) Service Type, 200Packet Size, 202QoS Type, 201Real Time (RT) Service Type, 200Sample Interval, 202QoS Profile Class, 202QoS Profile Name, 201QoS Type, 201Quick Service Mode, 176, 177quickynikinyoky, 177RRadio ClusterAdd, 125ID, 125Location, 125Menu, 124Name, 125Parameters, 125Sector Beam Width, 126Sector Heading, 126Select, 125Show Summary, 124RADIUS General Parameters, 95RADIUS Parameters, 94Read Community (Authorized Manager), 119Real Time (RT) Qos Profile, 200Registration ParametersSU, 161ReplaceAVU, 52NPU, 53Reset UnitAU, 138NPU, 110SU, 158Retry Interval, 96RT, 200Run from ShadowAU, 139
IndexBreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 273NPU, 112SU, 160SSample Interval, 202Sector Heading, 126Sector ID, 141SelectAU, 135Authorized Managers, 119Channel, 144ODU, 128Radio Cluster, 125Select by MAC AddressSU, 154Select by NameSU, 154Select ServerAccounting, 100Authentication, 98Send Traps (Authorized Manager), 119Server StatusAccounting, 100Authentication, 98ServiceAccess VLAN, 188Admin Status, 188Best Effort, 200Continuous Grant, 200Definition, 173General Parameters, 184Generic VoIP (non DRAP-based), 176Hybrid VLAN Mode, 187L2, 174Menu, 185Name, 186Non Real Time, 200Operation Status, 188Performance, 188PPPoE, 174Real Time, 200SU MAC Address, 186Types, 174VLAN Classification Mode, 187VLAN List, 186Service Fault Status, 151Service Mode, 184Service ProfileDefinition, 173Maximum Number of Voice Calls, 195Menu, 190Name, 190Priority Marking Mode, 192Priority Marking Value, 195Service Type, 191VLAN Transparency Mode, 191VPL ID, 192Service Profile Class, 196, 199Service Profile Name, 190Service ProfilesDefining Local Service Profiles, 208Service TypeL2, 174PPPoE, 174Voice, 175ServicesDefining Local Services, 209Voice (DRAP-based), 175Session Timeout, 178Set as MainAU, 140NPU, 112SU, 160Set Factory DefaultsAU, 138NPU, 110SU, 158Set Rates, 164SeverityTrap Configuration, 93Shared Secret, 96ShowAccounting Server, 101AU Slot #, 136
Index274 BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System ManualAuthentication Server, 98Base Station Licenses, 103Base Station Parameters, 86CPEs License Bank Status, 102Files in NPU, 134General Service Parameters, 184Grace Licenses, 103NPU Parameters, 107ODU, 128SU #, 154Temporary Grace Licenses, 103Show Active Alarms, 91Show AllAccounting Servers, 100Authentication Servers, 97Authorized Managers, 119Show MAC Addresses Behind SU, 172Show SummaryAU, 132Multi Channel, 143ODU, 127Radio Cluster, 124SU, 150SUs by AU, 152Show Traps Log, 92Signal Processor SW Version, 106Silver LAN-to-LAN Pre-Configured Profile, 210Silver Teleworking Pre-Configured Profile, 210Smart Card Status, 157Software Upgrade, 231SpeedData Port, 118StatisticsAccounting, 101Authentication, 98Stop Tx After Hold Over Timeout, 105SUAdd New SU, 172Address, 161Bandwidth, 162Base Station ID, 162Base Station ID Mask, 162Bridge Aging Time, 165Bridging Parameters, 165Configuration Menu, 160Configured Operation, 151Configured SW File Name, 150Configured SW Version, 150Country, 161Default SW File (Adv-Si), 153Default SW File (Std), 153Delete, 172Delete SW File, 154Duplicate SU Name, 151Ethernet Port, 164IDU Type, 151Installer Password, 165Loop, 151MAC Parameters, 161Menu, 150Multirate and ATPC Parameters, 163Number of Gateways, 151Operation Mode, 155Organization Name, 161Performance Monitoring, 170Phy Parameters, 162Registration Parameters, 161Reset Unit, 158Select by MAC Address, 154Select by Name, 154Service Fault Status, 151Set Factory Defaults, 158Set Rates, 164Show Summary, 150Status, 158SU Name, 161SW Download Status, 151SW Files in NPU, 152SW Versions Control, 158Unit Control, 157Uplink (Tx) Frequency, 163Voice/Networking Gateways, 164SU #Menu, 154
IndexBreezeMAX Modular Base Station System Manual 275Show, 154SU Ethernet Port Counters, 170SU MAC AddressService, 186SU MAC Control Number, 155SU Name, 161SU Ports Counters, 170SU Status, 158SU SW FileAU, 140SU Wireless Port Counters, 170Subnet MaskData Port, 117Management Port, 115SubscriberAdmin Status, 185Definition, 173Description, 185First Name, 185Last Name, 185Menu, 184Name, 184Subscriber Name, 185SUID, 150Suppression Interval, 93SW Download StatusAU, 132SU, 151SW FileAU, 139SU, 159SW Files in NPUAU, 134SU, 152SW Versions ControlAU, 138NPU, 110SU, 158TTemporary, 177Temporary Grace Licenses, 103Temporary SUDefinition, 176Termination Action, 178Time Zone Offset From UTC, 105Transparent Marking Mode, 193Trap Configuration, 92Admin Status, 93Severity, 93Suppression Interval, 93TrapsDisplay Filter, 91Log, 92Traps Display FilterDays, 92Minimum Severity, 91Tx Power (ODU), 129UUDP PortAccounting Server, 100Authentication, 98Unicast Relaying, 196Unit ControlAU, 138NPU, 109SU, 157Unknown Forwarding Policy, 197UpdateGeneral Service Parameters, 184ODU, 128Uplink (Tx) FrequencySU, 163Uplink Basic Rate (AU), 147Uplink QoS Profiles, 199Uplink Upper Priority Limits, 199VVLAN Classification Mode, 187VLAN List, 186VLAN Transparency Mode, 191Voice Parameters (AU), 147Voice Service, 175
Index276 BreezeMAX Modular Base Station System ManualVoice/Networking Gateways (SU), 164VoIP 1V Pre-Configured Profile, 210VoIP 2V Pre-Configured Profile, 210VPL ID, 192WWrite Community (Authorized Manager), 120

Navigation menu